HP Color LaserJet 2820/28430/2840 Software Technical Reference, External ENWW Laser Jet 2820/2830/2840 All In One Reference C00341096

2830 to the manual 892daa9a-117b-44c0-a1eb-f29c36bf3091

User Manual: HP HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 All-In-One - Software Technical Reference

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 406

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
Software Technical Reference

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840

Software Technical Reference

Trademarks

Adobe®, Acrobat®, and PostScript® are
either registered trademarks or trademarks
of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and/or other countries/regions.

Reproduction, adaptation or translation
without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.
The information in this document is subject
to change without notice.
The only warranties for HP products and
services are set forth in the express warranty
statements accompanying such products
and services. Nothing herein should be
construed as constituting an additional
warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical
or editorial errors or omissions contained
herein.
Edition 1, 04/2005

EnergyStar® and the Energy Star logo® are
US registered marks of the United States
Environmental Protection Agency.

Linux is a U.S. registered trademark of Linus
Torvalds.
Microsoft®, Windows®, and Windows NT®
are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation.
Pentium® is a US registered trademark of
Intel Corporation.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of The
Open Group.

Table of contents

1 Purpose and scope
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................2
HP LaserJet all-in-one product comparison ..........................................................................................3
Software availability and fulfillment .......................................................................................................6
Ordering software .................................................................................................................6
Documentation availability and localization ...........................................................................................8
2 Software overview for Windows
Operating systems ..............................................................................................................................12
Supported Windows operating systems .............................................................................12
Fully supported operating systems ....................................................................12
Print-only supported operating systems .............................................................12
Windows system requirements ...........................................................................................12
Windows operating system requirements ..........................................................13
Operating system requirements for print-only support .......................................13
Printing from other operating systems ................................................................................13
Software component information .........................................................................................................15
New HP LaserJet all-in-one software features ...................................................................15
HP LaserJet all-in-one software for Windows .....................................................................15
Software component comparison .......................................................................................17
Software component availability .........................................................................................18
Software component localization ........................................................................................19
HP Extended Capabilities ....................................................................................................................26
HP Director ..........................................................................................................................................27
Select Device ......................................................................................................................28
Status ..................................................................................................................................28
Settings ...............................................................................................................................30
Scan Picture and Scan Document ......................................................................................31
Transfer Images ..................................................................................................................31
Send a Fax .........................................................................................................................32
HP Image Zone ...................................................................................................................32
HP Document Viewer .........................................................................................................33
Support ...............................................................................................................................34
How Do I .............................................................................................................................35
Creative Ideas .....................................................................................................................35
HP Shopping .......................................................................................................................35
Utilities ................................................................................................................................35
Software Update .................................................................................................................36
Scanning system .................................................................................................................................37

ENWW

iii

Scanning methods ..............................................................................................................37
HP Scan software ...............................................................................................................38
E-mail .................................................................................................................40
Scan drivers ........................................................................................................................40
TWAIN driver ......................................................................................................41
TWAIN compatibility ..........................................................................41
TWAIN scanning does not work with some programs
...........................................................................................41
Additional information about TWAIN .................................41
TWAIN driver user interface ..............................................................42
WIA driver ..........................................................................................................43
HP Send Fax software ........................................................................................................................45
Faxing to multiple recipients ...............................................................................................46
Creating a cover page ........................................................................................................47
Faxing without first printing and scanning the document ....................................................47
Available product configurations .........................................................................................................49
Software features by connection type .................................................................................49
Supported configurations ....................................................................................................50
Direct connection ...............................................................................................50
Network connection options ...............................................................................50
Local connection that uses Microsoft peer-to-peer networking
(Windows only) ..................................................................................50
Networking requirements ...................................................................51
Multitasking capabilities ......................................................................................................51
Differences between the network-connected and direct-connected configurations ............52
Supported third-party software ............................................................................................................53
Text-recognition software ...................................................................................................53
About text-recognition reliability .........................................................................53
Other PC fax programs .......................................................................................................53
3 Windows HP unidriver features
Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................55
HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP) ......................56
Access to drivers ................................................................................................................56
Help system ........................................................................................................................56
What's this? Help ...............................................................................................57
Context-sensitive Help .......................................................................................57
Constraint messages .........................................................................................57
HP postscript level 3 emulation support .............................................................................57
Driver tab features ..............................................................................................................58
Printing Preferences tab set ...............................................................................58
Advanced tab features .......................................................................58
Paper/Output settings .......................................................60
Copy Count setting ...........................................60
Graphic settings ................................................................60
Image Color Management settings ...................60
TrueType Font settings .....................................61
Document Options ............................................................61
Advanced Printing Features .............................62

ENWW

Color Printing Mode (HP PCL 6 Unidriver
only) ..................................................................62
Print Optimizations (HP PCL 6 Unidriver
only) ..................................................................62
PostScript Options (PS Emulation Unidriver
only) ..................................................................62
PostScript Output option ..................63
TrueType Font Download option
..........................................................63
PostScript Language Level ..............64
Send PostScript Error Handler .........64
Mirrored Output ................................64
Printer Features ................................................64
Print All Text as Black ......................64
Send TrueType as Bitmap
(HP PCL 6 Unidriver only) ................64
Raster Compression (HP PCL 6
Unidriver only) ..................................65
Layout Options .................................................65
Page Order ......................................65
Paper/Quality tab features .................................................................65
Print Task Quick Sets ........................................................66
Default Print Settings ........................................67
User Guide Print Settings .................................67
Type new Quick Set name here .......................67
Paper Options group box ..................................................67
Size is: ..............................................................68
Use Different Paper/Covers check box ............69
Source Is: drop-down menu .............................69
Type is: drop-down menu .................................69
Use Different Paper/Covers options .................70
Front Cover and Back Cover
options .............................................71
First Page, Other Pages, and Last
Page options ....................................72
Document preview image ..................................................73
Effects tab features ............................................................................73
Print Task Quick Sets ........................................................74
Resizing options group box ...............................................74
Actual Size setting ............................................74
Print Document On setting ...............................74
Scale to Fit option .............................................74
% of Normal Size option ...................................75
Document preview image ..................................................75
Watermarks group box ......................................................76
Current watermarks ..........................................77
Watermark message ........................................77
Message angle .................................................77
Font attributes ...................................................77
Name ...............................................78

ENWW

Color ................................................78
Shading ............................................79
Size ..................................................79
Style .................................................79
Default settings ................................79
Finishing tab features ........................................................................80
Print Task Quick Sets ........................................................80
Document Options ............................................................81
Correct Order for Straight Paper Path check
box ....................................................................81
Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box
...........................................................................81
Manually printing on both sides
..........................................................81
Flip Pages Up ...................................................81
Booklet layout ...................................................82
Book and booklet printing ................82
Printing a Booklet .............................82
Printing a book .................................83
Pages per Sheet ...............................................83
Print Page Borders ...........................................83
Page Order .......................................................83
Document preview image ..................................................84
Orientation group box ........................................................84
Portrait option button ........................................84
Landscape option button ..................................84
Rotate by 180 degrees check box ....................85
Color tab ............................................................................................85
Print Task Quick Sets ........................................................86
Color options .....................................................................86
Automatic color settings ....................................................86
Manual color settings ........................................................86
Text, Graphics, and Photographs sections .......................87
Neutral Grays ...................................................87
General .............................................................................88
Edge Control .....................................................88
Halftone ............................................................88
RGB Color ........................................................89
Print in Grayscale ..............................................................89
Printer Properties tab set ...................................................................................89
Device Settings ..................................................................................89
Form to Tray Assignment ..................................................91
Font Substitution Table .....................................................91
External Fonts (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only) .........................92
Installing external fonts .....................................93
Removing external fonts ...................................93
Installable Options .............................................................93
Tray 2 ...............................................................94
Allow Manual Duplexing ...................................94
Printer Memory .................................................94

ENWW

PostScript Passthrough (PS Emulation
Unidriver only) ..................................................94
Additional Device Settings options (PS Emulation
Unidriver only) ...................................................................94
Available PostScript Memory ............................95
Output Protocol .................................................................95
Send CTRL-D Before Each Job ........................................95
Send CTRL-D After Each Job ...........................................95
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray ...............................95
Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray .......................96
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts ...............96
Job Timeout ......................................................................96
Wait Timeout .....................................................................96
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline .....................96
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline ....................96
About tab features .............................................................................96
4 Windows HP traditional driver features
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me) .................................100
Help system ......................................................................................................................100
What's this? Help .............................................................................................100
Context-sensitive Help .....................................................................................100
Constraint messages .......................................................................................101
Bubble Help ......................................................................................................101
Finishing tab features .......................................................................................................104
Print Task Quick Sets .......................................................................................105
Default Print Settings .......................................................................105
User Guide Print Settings ................................................................105
Custom Print Task Quick Sets .........................................................105
Document Options ...........................................................................................105
Correct Order for Straight Paper Path .............................................106
Print on Both Sides (Manually) ........................................................106
Manually printing on both sides .......................................................107
Flip Pages Up ..................................................................................107
Manually printing on both sides .......................................................107
Booklet Printing ...............................................................................108
Activating booklet printing ...............................................109
Printing a booklet cover ...................................................109
Pages per Sheet ..............................................................................110
Document preview image .................................................................................110
Print Quality ......................................................................................................111
Current Setting ................................................................................111
Graphics Settings group box ...........................................................111
Output Settings group box ...............................................................112
Font Settings group box ..................................................................112
Effects tab features ...........................................................................................................112
Print Task Quick Sets .......................................................................................113
Document preview image .................................................................................114
Fit To Page .......................................................................................................114
Print Document On ..........................................................................114

ENWW

vii

Scale to Fit .......................................................................................114
% of Normal Size .............................................................................115
Watermarks ......................................................................................................115
Current Watermarks ........................................................................116
Watermark Message .......................................................................117
Message Angle ................................................................................117
Font Attributes .................................................................................117
Name ...............................................................................117
Color ................................................................................117
Shading ...........................................................................118
Size .................................................................................119
Default settings ...............................................................119
Paper tab features ............................................................................................................119
Print Task Quick Sets .......................................................................................120
Paper Options group box .................................................................................121
Size is: .............................................................................................121
Custom Paper Size ..........................................................................122
Name drop-down menu ...................................................123
Dynamic command button ..............................................123
Width and height controls ................................................125
Custom width and height control limits ............................125
Paper and envelope icons ..............................125
Measurement Units button ..............................................125
Close button ....................................................................126
Use Different Paper/Covers check box ...........................................126
Use Different Paper/Covers options ................................................126
Front Cover and Back Cover options ..............................127
First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options ............128
Source Is: drop-down menu ............................................................129
Type is: drop-down menu ................................................................130
Document preview image .................................................................................130
Printer image ....................................................................................................131
Basics tab features ...........................................................................................................131
Print Task Quick Sets .......................................................................................132
Copies ..............................................................................................................132
Orientation ........................................................................................................132
Portrait .............................................................................................132
Landscape .......................................................................................133
Rotate by 180 degrees ....................................................................133
Document preview image .................................................................................133
About ................................................................................................................133
Color tab features .............................................................................................................134
Print Task Quick Sets .......................................................................................134
Color Options ...................................................................................................135
Manual Color Options ......................................................................................135
Document preview image .................................................................................137
Configure tab features ......................................................................................................137
Paper-handling options ....................................................................................138
Optional Paper Sources ..................................................................139
Other Options ...................................................................................................139

viii

ENWW

Fonts ................................................................................................140
Printer Memory ................................................................................141
Include Types in Application Source List selection ..........................141
Printer image ....................................................................................................141
Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me) ..............................142
HP postscript level 3 emulation support ...........................................................................142
Paper tab features ............................................................................................................142
Paper size ........................................................................................................143
Layout ..............................................................................................................144
Orientation ........................................................................................................144
Paper source ....................................................................................................144
Copies ..............................................................................................................144
Custom button ..................................................................................................144
Unprintable Area button ...................................................................................144
About button .....................................................................................................144
Restore Defaults button ...................................................................................144
Graphics tab features .......................................................................................................144
Resolution ........................................................................................................145
Color Control ....................................................................................................145
Choose Rendering Intent button ......................................................146
Halftoning .........................................................................................................146
Special .............................................................................................................146
Scaling .............................................................................................................146
Restore Defaults button ...................................................................................146
Device Options tab features .............................................................................................146
Available printer memory (in KB) .....................................................................147
Printer features .................................................................................................147
Installable options ............................................................................................147
Restore Defaults button ...................................................................................147
PostScript tab features .....................................................................................................147
PostScript Output Format .................................................................................148
PostScript header .............................................................................................149
PostScript error info .........................................................................................149
Advanced .........................................................................................................149
Restore Defaults ..............................................................................................151
5 Macintosh software overview
Supported Macintosh operating systems ..........................................................................................154
Supported e-mail programs ...............................................................................................................155
All-in-one software for Macintosh ......................................................................................................156
Software components for Macintosh ................................................................................156
Software features not available on Macintosh operating systems ....................................157
Software component availability for Macintosh .................................................................157
Software component localization ......................................................................................158
Ordering software for Macintosh .......................................................................................158
HP EWS Device Configuration .........................................................................................159
Access ..............................................................................................................159
HP EWS Device Configuration screens ...........................................................159
Status ..............................................................................................160
System .............................................................................................160

ENWW

Print .................................................................................................161
Fax ...................................................................................................161
Networking .......................................................................................162
System requirements for a direct connection (Macintosh) ................................................................164
Installation overview ..........................................................................................................................165
Installation options .............................................................................................................................166
Installation instructions for all Macintosh OSs — Animated Getting Started Guide ..........166
Macintosh installation instructions for direct connections .................................................168
Installation instructions for Mac OS 9.2.2 .........................................................168
Installation instructions for Mac OS X ..............................................................169
Macintosh installation instructions for networked computers ............................................169
Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh ....................................................................................171
HP LaserJet all-in-one uninstall instructions for Macintosh ...............................................................183
6 The HP Toolbox
Overview of the HP Toolbox ..............................................................................................................186
Starting the HP Toolbox ....................................................................................................186
Structure ...........................................................................................................................186
Opening screen ................................................................................................................186
Navigation .........................................................................................................................187
System requirements ........................................................................................................................188
Web browser requirements ...............................................................................................188
Other requirements ...........................................................................................................188
Key features ......................................................................................................................................189
Scan to e-mail or a folder ..................................................................................................189
Receive faxes to this computer .........................................................................................190
Receive Alert messages for device events .......................................................................190
HP Device pop-up alert messages ...................................................................191
System-tray icon alert ......................................................................................191
E-mail alert .......................................................................................................191
Configuration options ........................................................................................................................192
HP Toolbox section ...........................................................................................................192
Status tab .........................................................................................................192
Device Status ..................................................................................193
Supplies Status ................................................................................194
Setup Status Alerts ..........................................................................195
Set up E-mail Alerts .........................................................................197
Device Configuration .......................................................................199
Network Configuration .....................................................................202
Print Info Pages ...............................................................................204
Event Log ........................................................................................204
Fax tab .............................................................................................................205
Fax Tasks ........................................................................................206
Fax Phone Book ..............................................................................207
Fax Phone Book - Edit Entry ...........................................................208
Fax Phone Book - Create a New Group ..........................................209
Fax Phone Book - Edit a Group .......................................................210
Import information into the Fax Phone Book ...................................211
Fax Phone Book – Import – Select Entries ......................................213
Fax Send Log and Fax Receive Log ...............................................214

ENWW

Fax Viewer .......................................................................................216
Fax Data Properties .........................................................................217
Fax Reports screen .........................................................................218
Detailed Fax Settings ......................................................................219
Fax: How do I... ? ............................................................................220
Scan to tab .......................................................................................................221
Scan to E-mail or Folder ..................................................................221
Preferences .....................................................................................222
How do I... ? ....................................................................................224
Troubleshooting tab .........................................................................................224
Troubleshooting Process .................................................................225
Troubleshooting Information ............................................................225
Control Panel Messages .................................................................226
Clearing Jams ..................................................................................227
Print Problems screen .....................................................................228
Scan Problems ................................................................................229
Copy Problems ................................................................................230
Fax Problems ..................................................................................231
Memory Card Problems ...................................................................232
Troubleshooting Tools .....................................................................233
Animated Demonstrations ...............................................................234
Documentation tab ...........................................................................................235
How do I... ? screens .......................................................................235
Print: How do I... ? ...........................................................................236
Fax: How do I... ? ............................................................................236
Copy: How do I... ? ..........................................................................237
Scan: How do I... ? ..........................................................................238
Photo: How do I... ? .........................................................................238
Network: How do I... ? .....................................................................239
Other: How do I... ? .........................................................................240
User Guide ......................................................................................240
Device Settings section ....................................................................................................241
System Settings tab .........................................................................................242
Device Information ...........................................................................242
Paper Handling ................................................................................243
Print Quality .....................................................................................246
Print Density ....................................................................................249
Print Modes .....................................................................................251
System Setup ..................................................................................254
Volumes ...........................................................................................256
Date/Time ........................................................................................257
Service .............................................................................................257
Device Polling ..................................................................................259
Save/Restore ...................................................................................260
Print Settings tab ..............................................................................................261
Printing ............................................................................................261
PCL5e ..............................................................................................262
PostScript ........................................................................................263
Memory Card ...................................................................................263
Fax Settings tab ...............................................................................................265

ENWW

General ............................................................................................265
Fax Send .........................................................................................265
Fax Receive .....................................................................................267
Fax Setup Wizard ............................................................................269
Copy Settings tab .............................................................................................275
Copying ...........................................................................................275
Reduce / Enlarge .............................................................................276
Network Settings ...............................................................................................................276
IP Configuration ...............................................................................................277
Advanced .........................................................................................................279
SNMP ...............................................................................................................280
Network Configuration ......................................................................................282
Password .........................................................................................................284
Other screens ...................................................................................................................284
About HP Toolbox ............................................................................................285
Select Device ...................................................................................................286
Current Alerts ...................................................................................................286
HP Toolbox – text only .....................................................................................286
Product Registration .........................................................................................287
Order Supplies .................................................................................................288
Product Support ...............................................................................................289
7 Software installation for Windows operating systems
Installation overview ..........................................................................................................................292
Installation options .............................................................................................................................294
Windows installation for direct connections ......................................................................294
Setting up Windows sharing (peer-to-peer networking) ...................................294
Setting up the host computer running Windows 98 SE,
Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, or Windows 2000 ..........................295
Setting up the host computer running Windows XP ........................295
Setting up client computers running Windows 98 SE,
Windows Me, or Windows 2000 ......................................................295
Setting up client computers running Windows XP ...........................296
Windows Installation for computers on a network ............................................................296
Network setup ..................................................................................................296
Windows installation instructions for networked computers .............................297
Installing the print driver only ............................................................................................298
Print driver installation for Windows 98 SE or Windows Me ............................298
Print-driver installation for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003 ......................................................................................298
Printing-system software installation .................................................................................................300
Animated Install Guide ......................................................................................................300
Printing-system software installation ................................................................................301
USB installation dialog box options for Windows .............................................305
Network installation dialog box options for Windows .......................................315
Uninstall .............................................................................................................................................326
Uninstall instructions for Windows ....................................................................................326
Uninstalling HP Image Zone in Windows operating systems ...........................326
Uninstalling a Typical or Minimum installation .................................................326

xii

ENWW

Using the HP LaserJet all-in-one software Uninstall component
(recommended) ...............................................................................326
Using the Windows Add or Remove Programs component ............327
Uninstalling a Minimum installation ..................................................................327
Uninstalling an Add-Printer installation ............................................................328
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me .....................................................328
Windows 2000 or Windows XP .......................................................329
Files not removed and manual uninstall (Windows) .........................................................329
8 Engineering details
Media attributes .................................................................................................................................332
Media sources and destinations .......................................................................................332
Source commands ............................................................................................................332
Media types and sizes ......................................................................................................332
Media features and attributes ...........................................................................333
Custom media sizes .........................................................................................335
Media-type commands .....................................................................................335
Readme .............................................................................................................................................337
Windows Readme .............................................................................................................337
Introduction ......................................................................................................337
Purpose of this document ................................................................337
Who needs this software? ...............................................................338
Overview of the printing-system components ..................................338
Late-breaking information ................................................................................340
Known issues and workarounds ......................................................340
Issues fixed ......................................................................................346
Installation Instructions .....................................................................................347
Installation options ...........................................................................347
Installing software on Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, and
Windows XP ....................................................................................347
Uninstaller ........................................................................................347
Technical assistance ........................................................................................348
Customer support ............................................................................348
Web .................................................................................................348
HP software and support services — additional information ...........348
Legal statements ..............................................................................................348
Trademark notices ...........................................................................348
Warranty and copyright ...................................................................348
Macintosh Readme ...........................................................................................................349
Information about the hp LaserJet all-in-one software version 5.8 ..................349
Contents ..........................................................................................349
Supported HP Products ...................................................................349
Supported Operating Systems ........................................................349
For OSX Users Only ........................................................................349
How to Configure a Print or Fax Queue ..........................349
To configure a print queue for your
HP LaserJet all-in-one ....................................349
To configure a fax queue for your
HP LaserJet all-in-one (fax models only)
.........................................................................350

ENWW

xiii

For OS 9.2.2 users only ...................................................................350
For More Information .......................................................................350
Copyright .........................................................................................350
HP System Diagnostics .....................................................................................................................352
System ..............................................................................................................................352
Devices .............................................................................................................................352
Applications ......................................................................................................................353
HP Applications ................................................................................................................354
Logging .............................................................................................................................354
Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................................356
Port communication ..........................................................................................................356
Overview ..........................................................................................................356
USB port connections ......................................................................................356
Device conflicts in Windows .............................................................................356
Opening the Windows Device Manager ..........................................357
Check for device conflicts ................................................................357
Guidelines for troubleshooting and resolving device conflicts .........358
Installed Devices .............................................................................359
File to E-mail utility ............................................................................................................360
Standalone scrubber .........................................................................................................362
Two-pass cleaning-page utility .........................................................................................362
Collect.bat utility ................................................................................................................362
E-mail ................................................................................................................................363
My Scans directory ...........................................................................................................363
Summary of HP Toolbox known issues .............................................................................................364
Firewalls block HP Toolbox communication .....................................................................364
USB drivers are unsigned .................................................................................................364
Second restart is required after installation ......................................................................364
Problems occur after device replacement or restoration of factory defaults .....................364
Receive-to-PC problems occur after receiving a large number of faxes ..........................365
After experiencing fax communication problems, Receive to PC problems occur ...........365
Intermittent scan problems occur ......................................................................................366
A need to enabling or disabling HP Toolbox arises ..........................................................366
Index...................................................................................................................................................................369

xiv

ENWW

List of tables

Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Table 2-5
Table 2-6
Table 2-7
Table 2-8
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 4-3
Table 4-4
Table 4-5
Table 4-6
Table 4-7
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 6-1
Table 6-2
Table 6-3
Table 6-4
Table 6-5
Table 6-6
Table 6-7
Table 6-8
Table 6-9
Table 6-10
Table 6-11
Table 8-1
Table 8-2
Table 8-3
Table 8-4

ENWW

Features of the HP LaserJet all-in-one products ............................................................................3
CD part numbers for the HP LaserJet all-in-one software .............................................................6
User documentation availability and localization ............................................................................8
Software components for Windows ..............................................................................................15
Software component comparison .................................................................................................17
Software component availability for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one ..............18
Software component localization by language, A-K .....................................................................20
Software component localization by language, L-Z .....................................................................21
Supported e-mail programs ..........................................................................................................40
Software features by connection type ..........................................................................................49
Multitasking capabilities ...............................................................................................................51
Standard paper types and engine speeds ...................................................................................69
Watermark color values ...............................................................................................................78
Page orientation ...........................................................................................................................81
Bubble Help messages ..............................................................................................................102
Page orientation .........................................................................................................................107
Selected paper size ....................................................................................................................108
Watermark color values .............................................................................................................117
Custom media sizes ...................................................................................................................125
Close dialog box text strings ......................................................................................................126
Standard paper types and engine speeds .................................................................................130
Supported e-mail programs ........................................................................................................155
Software components for Macintosh ..........................................................................................156
Software component availability for Macintosh ..........................................................................158
CD part numbers for the HP LaserJet all-in-one software .........................................................159
Browsers supported by HP Toolbox ...........................................................................................188
Alerts ..........................................................................................................................................196
Preferences for Scan to E-mail or a Folder ................................................................................222
Paper Handling options and settings .........................................................................................243
Print Quality options and settings ...............................................................................................247
Print Density options and settings ..............................................................................................249
Print mode settings and default fuser modes .............................................................................253
Printing options and settings ......................................................................................................262
Copying options and settings .....................................................................................................275
Reduce / Enlarge options and settings ......................................................................................276
Advanced Network Settings options and settings ......................................................................280
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 media sources and destinations .......................................332
Media-source commands ...........................................................................................................332
Supported features and attributes, by driver ..............................................................................333
Supported media types ..............................................................................................................334

Table 8-5
Table 8-6
Table 8-7
Table 8-8

xvi

Custom media sizes ...................................................................................................................335
Media-type commands ...............................................................................................................335
Devices installed by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software in Windows 2000 and
Windows XP ...............................................................................................................................360
Devices installed by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software in Windows 98 SE and
Windows Me ...............................................................................................................................360

ENWW

List of figures

Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 3-1
Figure 3-2
Figure 3-3
Figure 3-4
Figure 3-5
Figure 3-6
Figure 3-7
Figure 3-8
Figure 3-9
Figure 3-10
Figure 3-11
Figure 3-12
Figure 3-13
Figure 3-14
Figure 3-15
Figure 3-16
Figure 3-17
Figure 3-18
Figure 3-19
Figure 3-20
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6

ENWW

HP Director screen .......................................................................................................................27
Device Status screen ...................................................................................................................29
Device Selection screen ...............................................................................................................31
My Images screen ........................................................................................................................32
HP Document Viewer screen .......................................................................................................34
HP Image Zone Help screen ........................................................................................................35
HP Software Update screen .........................................................................................................36
hp LaserJet Scan dialog box ........................................................................................................39
Scan Settings dialog box ..............................................................................................................39
TWAIN driver user interface .........................................................................................................42
Scan Preferences – Web Page Dialog .........................................................................................43
hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – user interface .......................................................................45
hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – multiple recipients ................................................................46
hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – cover page ...........................................................................47
A typical constraint message .......................................................................................................57
Advanced tab – HP PCL 6 Unidriver ............................................................................................59
Advanced tab – PS Emulation Unidriver ......................................................................................59
Advanced tab - PS Emulation Unidriver - PostScript Options ......................................................63
Paper/Quality tab .........................................................................................................................66
Paper Options group box .............................................................................................................68
Front Cover setting .......................................................................................................................71
First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options .........................................................................72
Effects tab ....................................................................................................................................73
Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) .........................................75
Watermark Details dialog box ......................................................................................................76
Finishing tab - HP PCL 6 Unidriver ..............................................................................................80
Page-order preview images .........................................................................................................84
Color tab .......................................................................................................................................85
Color Settings dialog box .............................................................................................................87
Device Settings tab - HP PCL 6 Unidriver ....................................................................................90
Device Settings tab - PS Emulation Unidriver ..............................................................................90
Font Substitution Table ................................................................................................................92
Font Installer dialog box ...............................................................................................................92
About tab ......................................................................................................................................97
A typical constraint message .....................................................................................................101
A property page with a Bubble Help icon ...................................................................................102
Finishing tab - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ...............................................................................104
Document Options group box ....................................................................................................106
Page-order preview images .......................................................................................................110
Print Quality Details dialog box - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ...................................................111

xvii

Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14
Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
Figure 4-19
Figure 4-20
Figure 4-21
Figure 4-22
Figure 4-23
Figure 4-24
Figure 4-25
Figure 4-26
Figure 4-27
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6
Figure 6-7

xviii

Effects tab - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ...................................................................................113
Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right) .......................................114
Watermark Details dialog box ....................................................................................................116
Paper tab - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ....................................................................................120
Paper Options group box ...........................................................................................................121
Custom Paper Size dialog box ...................................................................................................122
Front Cover setting .....................................................................................................................128
First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options .......................................................................129
Basics tab – HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver ..................................................................................131
About This Driver dialog box ......................................................................................................133
Color tab .....................................................................................................................................134
Manual Color Options dialog box ...............................................................................................135
Configure tab ..............................................................................................................................138
More Configuration Options dialog box ......................................................................................139
Configure Font DIMMs dialog box ..............................................................................................140
Paper tab - HP PS traditional driver ...........................................................................................143
Graphics tab ...............................................................................................................................145
Image Color Management dialog ...............................................................................................146
Device Options tab .....................................................................................................................147
PostScript tab .............................................................................................................................148
Advanced PostScript options .....................................................................................................150
HP EWS Device Configuration – Status tab ..............................................................................160
HP EWS Device Configuration – System tab .............................................................................161
HP EWS Device Configuration – Print tab .................................................................................161
HP EWS Device Configuration – Fax tab ...................................................................................162
HP EWS Device Configuration – Networking tab .......................................................................163
Start Here icon ...........................................................................................................................167
Macintosh install – Animated Getting Started Guide ..................................................................167
Congratulations! Your all-in-one setup is complete screen ........................................................168
Authenticate dialog box ..............................................................................................................171
License dialog box – HP Software License Agreement .............................................................172
Installing dialog box – progress indicator ...................................................................................172
If you are using a USB cable... dialog box .................................................................................173
Restart alert ................................................................................................................................173
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Introduction ...............................................................................174
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Select Device ...........................................................................175
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – User Identification .....................................................................176
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Phone Line ...............................................................................177
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Outside Line .............................................................................178
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Distinctive Ring .........................................................................179
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Answering Machine ..................................................................180
hp all-in-one Setup Assist – Finish .............................................................................................181
hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Congratulations ........................................................................182
HP Device Alert – LOAD PAPER ...............................................................................................191
Device Status screen .................................................................................................................194
Supplies Status screen ..............................................................................................................195
Set up Status Alerts screen ........................................................................................................196
Set up E-mail Alerts screen – 1 of 2 ...........................................................................................197
Set up E-mail Alerts screen – 2 of 2 ...........................................................................................198
Device Configuration screen – 1 of 4 .........................................................................................199

ENWW

Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
Figure 6-22
Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
Figure 6-25
Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Figure 6-31
Figure 6-32
Figure 6-33
Figure 6-34
Figure 6-35
Figure 6-36
Figure 6-37
Figure 6-38
Figure 6-39
Figure 6-40
Figure 6-41
Figure 6-42
Figure 6-43
Figure 6-44
Figure 6-45
Figure 6-46
Figure 6-47
Figure 6-48
Figure 6-49
Figure 6-50
Figure 6-51
Figure 6-52
Figure 6-53
Figure 6-54
Figure 6-55
Figure 6-56
Figure 6-57

ENWW

Device Configuration screen – 2 of 4 .........................................................................................200
Device Configuration screen – 3 of 4 .........................................................................................201
Device Configuration screen – 4 of 4 .........................................................................................202
Network Configuration screen ....................................................................................................203
Print Information Pages screen ..................................................................................................204
Event Log screen .......................................................................................................................205
Fax Tasks screen .......................................................................................................................206
Fax Phone Book screen .............................................................................................................208
Fax Phone Book – Edit Entry screen .........................................................................................209
Fax Phone Book - Create a New Group screen .........................................................................210
Fax Phone Book - Edit a Group screen .....................................................................................211
Import information into the Fax Phone Book screen ..................................................................212
Fax Phone Book – Import – Select Entries screen ....................................................................214
Fax Send Log screen .................................................................................................................215
Fax Receive log screen ..............................................................................................................215
Fax Viewer screen .....................................................................................................................217
Fax Data Properties screen .......................................................................................................218
Fax Reports screen ....................................................................................................................219
Detailed Fax Settings screen .....................................................................................................220
Fax: How do I... ? screen ...........................................................................................................220
Scan to E-mail or a Folder screen ..............................................................................................221
Preferences for Scan to E-mail or a Folder screen ....................................................................222
Scan: How do I... ? screen .........................................................................................................224
Troubleshooting Process screen ................................................................................................225
Troubleshooting tools screen .....................................................................................................226
Control panel messages screen .................................................................................................227
Clearing jams screen .................................................................................................................228
Print problems screen ................................................................................................................229
Scan problems screen ...............................................................................................................230
Copy problems screen ...............................................................................................................231
Fax problems screen ..................................................................................................................232
Memory card problems screen ...................................................................................................233
Troubleshooting Tools screen ....................................................................................................234
Animated Demonstrations screen ..............................................................................................235
Print: How do I... ? screen ..........................................................................................................236
Fax: How do I? screen ...............................................................................................................237
Copy: How do I... ? screen .........................................................................................................237
Scan: How do I... ? screen .........................................................................................................238
Photo: How do I... ? screen ........................................................................................................239
Network: How do I... ? screen ....................................................................................................239
Other: How do I... ? screen ........................................................................................................240
User Guide screen .....................................................................................................................241
Device Information screen .........................................................................................................242
Paper Handling screen ...............................................................................................................243
Print Quality screen ....................................................................................................................247
Print Density screen ...................................................................................................................249
Print Modes screen ....................................................................................................................252
System Setup screen .................................................................................................................255
Volumes screen .........................................................................................................................256
Date/Time screen .......................................................................................................................257

xix

Figure 6-58
Figure 6-59
Figure 6-60
Figure 6-61
Figure 6-62
Figure 6-63
Figure 6-64
Figure 6-65
Figure 6-66
Figure 6-67
Figure 6-68
Figure 6-69
Figure 6-70
Figure 6-71
Figure 6-72
Figure 6-73
Figure 6-74
Figure 6-75
Figure 6-76
Figure 6-77
Figure 6-78
Figure 6-79
Figure 6-80
Figure 6-81
Figure 6-82
Figure 6-83
Figure 6-84
Figure 6-85
Figure 6-86
Figure 6-87
Figure 6-88
Figure 6-89
Figure 6-90
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3
Figure 7-4
Figure 7-5
Figure 7-6
Figure 7-7
Figure 7-8
Figure 7-9
Figure 7-10
Figure 7-11
Figure 7-12
Figure 7-13
Figure 7-14
Figure 7-15
Figure 7-16
Figure 7-17

Service screen ...........................................................................................................................258
Device Polling Settings screen ...................................................................................................260
Save / Restore Settings screen ..................................................................................................261
Printing screen ...........................................................................................................................262
PCL5e screen ............................................................................................................................263
PostScript screen .......................................................................................................................263
Memory Card Printing Settings screen ......................................................................................264
General Settings screen .............................................................................................................265
Send screen ...............................................................................................................................267
Receive screen ..........................................................................................................................268
Fax Setup Wizard – Welcome screen ........................................................................................269
Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Identification: User Information screen ...............................................270
Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup: Dial prefix screen ....................................................................271
Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup: Distinctive Ring screen ............................................................272
Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup: Fax Line screen .......................................................................272
Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup Confirmation screen .................................................................273
Fax Setup Wizard – Fax identification: Fax & Voice Number screen .........................................273
Fax Setup Wizard – Finish Fax Setup screen ............................................................................274
Fax Setup Wizard – Settings Saved screen ...............................................................................274
Copying screen ..........................................................................................................................275
Reduce / Enlarge screen ............................................................................................................276
IP Configuration screen ..............................................................................................................278
Advanced Network Settings screen ...........................................................................................279
SNMP screen .............................................................................................................................281
Network Configuration screen ....................................................................................................282
Password screen ........................................................................................................................284
About toolbox screen .................................................................................................................285
Current Alerts screen .................................................................................................................286
Text-only Toolbox screen ...........................................................................................................287
Text-only screen – sample expanded section ............................................................................287
Product Registration screen .......................................................................................................288
Order Supplies screen ...............................................................................................................289
Product Support screen .............................................................................................................290
Animated Install Guide – Welcome screen ................................................................................300
Congratulations! Your all-in-one setup is complete screen ........................................................301
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 CD Browser screen ...........................................................302
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 documentation ..................................................................303
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Online Support ..................................................................304
USB install – Welcome to the Install Wizard dialog box .............................................................305
USB install – Check for recommended installation updates (optional) dialog box .....................305
USB install – Installation Options dialog box ..............................................................................306
USB Install – sample System Requirements Results dialog box ...............................................307
USB install – License Agreement dialog box .............................................................................307
USB install – HP Extended Capabilities dialog box ...................................................................308
Welcome to the HP Product Survey Program screen ................................................................308
USB install – Destination Folder dialog box ...............................................................................309
USB install – Ready to Install dialog box ...................................................................................310
USB install – Connection Type dialog box .................................................................................310
USB install – Connect Your Device Now dialog box ..................................................................311
USB install – Device Found dialog box ......................................................................................312

ENWW

Figure 7-18
Figure 7-19
Figure 7-20
Figure 7-21
Figure 7-22
Figure 7-23
Figure 7-24
Figure 7-25
Figure 7-26
Figure 7-27
Figure 7-28
Figure 7-29
Figure 7-30
Figure 7-31
Figure 7-32
Figure 7-33
Figure 7-34
Figure 7-35
Figure 7-36
Figure 7-37
Figure 7-38
Figure 7-39
Figure 7-40
Figure 7-41
Figure 7-42
Figure 8-1
Figure 8-2
Figure 8-3
Figure 8-4
Figure 8-5
Figure 8-6
Figure 8-7

ENWW

USB install – Time Remaining dialog box ..................................................................................312
USB install – Restart your computer dialog box .........................................................................313
USB install – Congratulations! Software installation complete dialog box .................................313
USB install – Test Page dialog box ............................................................................................314
Sign Up Now screen ..................................................................................................................314
HP Registration screen ..............................................................................................................315
Network install — Welcome dialog box ......................................................................................316
Network install – Sample screen showing current progress ......................................................316
Network install – Licence Agreement dialog box .......................................................................317
Network install – HP Extended Capabilities dialog box ..............................................................317
Welcome to the HP Product Survey Program screen ................................................................318
Network install – Thank you for buying another HP product! dialog box ....................................318
Network install – Ready to Install dialog box ..............................................................................319
Network install – Connection Type dialog box ...........................................................................319
Network install – Identify Printer dialog boxIdentify Printer ........................................................320
Network install – Searching dialog box ......................................................................................320
Network install – Specify Printer dialog box ...............................................................................321
Network install – Printer Found dialog box .................................................................................321
Network install – Confirm Settings dialog box ............................................................................322
Network install – Confirm Changing Setting dialog box .............................................................322
Network Install – Set Network Protocol dialog box ....................................................................323
Network install – Congratulations! Software installation complete dialog box ...........................323
Network install – Test Page dialog box ......................................................................................324
Sign Up Now screen ..................................................................................................................324
HP Registration screen ..............................................................................................................325
HP System Diagnostics – System tab ........................................................................................352
HP System Diagnostics – Devices tab .......................................................................................353
HP System Diagnostics – Applications tab ................................................................................353
HP System Diagnostics – HP Applications tab ..........................................................................354
HP System Diagnostics – Logging tab .......................................................................................355
Sample Device Manager screen – Windows XP ........................................................................359
File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached .......................................................361

xxi

xxii

ENWW

Purpose and scope

This chapter provides information about the following topics:

ENWW

●

Introduction

●

HP LaserJet all-in-one product comparison

●

Software availability and fulfillment

●

Documentation availability and localization

Purpose and scope

Introduction
This software technical reference (STR) provides information about and troubleshooting tips for the allin-one software for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products.
This document is prepared in an electronic format to serve as a quick-reference tool for Customer Care
Center (CCC) agents, support engineers, system administrators, management information systems
(MIS) personnel, and end users, as appropriate.
NOTE This STR describes software that is shipped on the all-in-one software CD that comes
with the HP LaserJet all-in-one product. This STR does not describe drivers that will become
available on the web.
The following information is included in this technical reference:
■

Overview of software and platforms

■

Procedures for installing and uninstalling software components

■

Descriptions of problems that can arise while using the HP LaserJet all-in-one products, and known
solutions to those problems
NOTE An addendum to this STR describes system modification information, including file lists
and changes to registry keys.

Chapter 1

Purpose and scope

ENWW

Purpose and scope

HP LaserJet all-in-one product comparison
The following table contains descriptions of the three HP LaserJet all-in-one products that are described
in this STR.
Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet all-in-one products
Feature

HP Color LaserJet 2820

HP Color LaserJet 2830

HP Color LaserJet 2840

HP Product number

Q3948A

Q3949A

Q3950A

Memory

■

4 megabytes (MB) of ROM/
flash memory

■

4 MB of ROM/flash memory

■

4 MB of ROM/flash memory

■
96 MB of RAM, expandable
to 224 MB

96 MB of RAM, expandable
to 224 MB.

■

96 MB of RAM, expandable
to 224 MB.

■

Mass storage driver for
Windows® 98 SE,
Windows Me,
Windows 2000, and
Windows XP. This driver
provides access to memory
card slots on the product.
The HP Color
LaserJet 2840 can read the
following memory-card
types:
■

CompactFlash

■

Ultra CompactFlash

■

Smart Media

■

Memory Stick

■

Secure Digital

■

Multi Media Card

■

XD Card

For more information, see the
HP Color LaserJet
2820/2830/2840 User Guide.
Speed

Connectivity

ENWW

■

Prints and copies up to
20 pages per minute (ppm)
for Letter-size paper

■

Prints and copies up to
20 ppm for Letter-size
paper

■

Prints and copies up to
20 ppm for Letter-size
paper

■

Prints and copies up to 19
ppm for A4-size paper

■

Prints and copies up to 19
ppm for A4-size paper

■

Prints and copies up to 19
ppm for A4-size paper

■

Prints and copies up to 4 ppm
in color for Letter/A4-size
paper

■

Prints and copies up to 4
ppm in color for Letter/A4size paper

■

Prints and copies up to 4
ppm in color for Letter/A4size paper

■

A High-speed universal serial
bus (USB) port

■

A high-speed USB port

■

A high-speed USB port

■
10/100Base-T network
Jetdirect port

10/100Base-T network
Jetdirect port

■

10/100Base-T network
Jetdirect port

■

Fax port

■

Fax port

HP LaserJet all-in-one product comparison

Purpose and scope

Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet all-in-one products (continued)
Feature

HP Color LaserJet 2820

HP Color LaserJet 2830

HP Color LaserJet 2840

HP Product number

Q3948A

Q3949A

Q3950A

Paper handling

■

One 50-sheet ADF;
maximum media size, 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

■

One 50-sheet ADF;
maximum media size, 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

■
One 125-sheet or 10envelope media input tray
(tray 1); maximum media
size, 216 x 356 mm (8.5 x 14
■
inches)

One 125-sheet media input
tray (tray 1); maximum
media size, 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)

■

One 125-sheet media input
tray (tray 1); maximum
media size, 216 x 356 mm
(8.5 x 14 inches)

One 250-sheet media input
tray (tray 2) for standard
Letter/A4 sizes.

■

One 250-sheet media input
tray (tray 2) for standard
Letter/A4 sizes.

■

A Letter/A4-size flatbed
scanner

■

A Letter/A4-size flatbed
scanner

■

1200 dpi effective output
quality (600x600x2 dpi
using HP REt 2400)

■

1200 dpi effective output
quality (600x600x2 dpi
using HP REt 2400)

■

Printer command language
(PCL) Level 6

■

Printer command language
Level 6 (PCL 6)

■

PS Level 3 emulation

■

PCL 6 (black and white) for
Windows 2000 and
Windows XP

■

PS Level 3 emulation

■

Fax (monochrome)

Copy

Scan

Energy savings

Chapter 1

■

One 50-sheet automatic
document feeder (ADF);
maximum media size, 216 x
356 mm (8.5 x 14 inches)

A Letter/A4-size flatbed
scanner

1200 dots per inch (dpi)
effective output quality
(600x600x2 dpi using HP
Resolution Enhancement
Technology [REt] 2400)
Printer command language
(PCL) Level 6
Adobe® PostScript® (PS)
Level 3 emulation

Not available for the
HP Color LaserJet 2820

■

Full-functionality fax
capabilities with a V.34 fax,
including a phone book; fax
from ADF, flatbed, or
computer; and delayed-fax
features

■

Full-functionality fax
capabilities with a V.34 fax,
including a phone book; fax
from ADF, flatbed, or
computer; and delayed-fax
features

■

4 MB of flash memory for
storing faxes and phonebook entries

■

4 MB of flash memory for
storing faxes and phonebook entries

■

Reduce/enlarge feature

■

Reduce/enlarge feature

■

Reduce/enlarge feature

■

Up to 20-ppm automatic
collation for black and white
Letter/A4-size paper; 4 ppm
for color.

■

Up to 20-ppm automatic
collation for black and white
Letter/A4-size paper; 4 ppm
for color.

■

Up to 20-ppm automatic
collation for black and white
Letter/A4-size paper; 4 ppm
for color.

■

24-bit

■

24-bit

■

24-bit

■

1,200 pixels per inch (ppi)
color scanning (optimal); up
to 19,200 ppi (interpolated)

■

1,200 ppi color scanning
(optimal); up to 19,200 ppi
(interpolated)

■

1,200 ppi color scanning
(optimal); up to 19,200 ppi
(interpolated)

The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 automatically conserves electricity by substantially reducing
power consumption when it is not in use. As an ENERGY STAR® partner, Hewlett-Packard Company
has determined that this product meets ENERGY STAR® guidelines for energy efficiency. ENERGY
STAR® is a U.S. registered service mark of the United States Environmental Protection Agency.

Purpose and scope

ENWW

Feature

HP Color LaserJet 2820

HP Color LaserJet 2830

HP Color LaserJet 2840

HP Product number

Q3948A

Q3949A

Q3950A

HP LaserJet all-in-one product comparison

Purpose and scope

Table 1-1 Features of the HP LaserJet all-in-one products (continued)

Purpose and scope

Software availability and fulfillment
Ordering software
To order the software if the CD is damaged or missing, contact HP Support at the following Web site.
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series
To request the software CD by phone, see the following Web site for the correct contact number for your
country/region:
welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact.html
The following table presents the part numbers and language groups on the software CDs for the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products.
Table 1-2 CD part numbers for the HP LaserJet all-in-one software
Part number

Description

Languages included on CD

Q3948–60177

Windows software CD for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products

■

Danish

■

Dutch

■

English

■

Finnish

■

French

■

German

■

Italian

■

Norwegian

■

Portuguese

■

Spanish

■

Swedish

■

Czech

■

English

■

Hungarian

■

Polish

■

Russian

■

Turkish

■

English

■

Korean

■

Simplified Chinese

■

Thai

Q3948–60180

Q3948–60181

Chapter 1

Windows software CD for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products

Purpose and scope

ENWW

Part number

Description

Languages included on CD
■

Q3948–60183

Purpose and scope

Table 1-2 CD part numbers for the HP LaserJet all-in-one software (continued)

ReadIRIS V9.0 software CD for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product

Traditional Chinese

The ReadIRIS user interface
is available in the following
languages:

NOTE The ReadIRIS CD is not set up at fulfillment.
The CD will be available from Global Support
Organization (GSO) or HP Parts due to contractual
and licensing agreements.

■

Dutch

■

English

■

French

■

German

■

Italian

■

Spanish

■

Portuguese-Brazilian
NOTE ReadIRIS
can perform text
recognition (also
known as optical
character
recognition, or OCR)
in 124 languages.
See Table 2-4
Software component
localization by
language, A-K and
Table 2-5 Software
component
localization by
language, L-Z for a
list of these
languages.

NOTE If you need a replacement CD or newer version of the software than what was shipped
with the product, go to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series
Click CD-ROM Order Page to order, or click Download drivers and software to get the software
update.

ENWW

Software availability and fulfillment

Purpose and scope

Documentation availability and localization
The documentation in the following table is available for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-inone product.
Table 1-3 User documentation availability and localization
Document name

Languages

Part number

Location

HP Color LaserJet
2820/2830/2840 User Guide

■

Danish

Q3948-90901 (EN)

■

Dutch

■

English

The HP Color LaserJet
2820/2830/2840 User Guide
is available in electronic
format on the HP LaserJet allin-one software CD.

■

Finnish

■

French

■

German

■

Hungarian

■

Indonesian

Q3948-90921

The HP LaserJet
2820/2830/2840 Start Guide
is available in hard copy and
comes in the box with your HP
LaserJet all-in-product .

Italian

HP LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
Start Guide

Chapter 1

■

Korean

■

Norwegian

■

Polish

■

Portuguese (Brazilian)

■

Russian

■

Simplified Chinese

■

Spanish

■

Swedish

■

Thai

■

Traditional Chinese

■

Turkish

■

Dutch

■

English

■

French

■

German

■

Hebrew

■

Italian

■

Portuguese (Brazilian)

■

Spanish

Purpose and scope

ENWW

Document name

ENWW

Languages

Part number

■

Danish

Q3948–90922

■

English

■

Finnish

■

Hebrew

■

Norwegian

■

Swedish

■

Arabic

■

English

■

Estonian

■

Kazakh

■

Latvian

■

Lithuanian

■

Russian

■

Turkish

■

Bulgarian

■

Croatian

■

English

■

Greek

■

Romanian

■

Slovenian

■

Czech

■

English

■

Hungarian

■

Polish

■

Slovak

■

English

■

Indonesian

■

Simplified Chinese

■

Thai

■

Traditional Chinese

■

Vietnamese

Purpose and scope

Table 1-3 User documentation availability and localization (continued)
Location

Q3948-90923

Q3948–90924

Q3948–90925

Q3948–90926

Documentation availability and localization

Purpose and scope

The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide is available, on a print-on-demand basis, in the
languages shown in the following table.

Language

Part number

English (EN)

Q3948-90901

Czech (CS)

Q3948-90902

Danish (DN)

Q3948-90903

Dutch (NL)

Q3948-90904

Finnish (FI)

Q3948-90905

French (FR)

Q3948-90906

German (DE)

Q3948-90907

Hungarian (HU)

Q3948-90908

Italian (IT)

Q3948-90909

Korean (KO)

Q3948-90910

Norwegian (NO)

Q3948-90911

Polish (PL)

Q3948-90912

Portuguese (PT)

Q3948-90913

Russian (RU)

Q3948-90914

Simplified Chinese (ZHCN)

Q3948-90915

Spanish (ES)

Q3948-90916

Swedish (SV)

Q3948-90917

Traditional Chinese (ZHTW)

Q3948-90918

Thai (TH)

Q3948-90919

Turkish (TR)

Q3948-90920

Chapter 1

Purpose and scope

ENWW

Software overview for Windows

Software overview for
Windows

This chapter provides information about the following topics:
●

Operating systems

●

Software component information

●

HP Extended Capabilities

●

HP Director

●

Scanning system

●

HP Send Fax software

●

Available product configurations

●

Supported third-party software
NOTE For information about the HP LaserJet all-in-one software for Macintosh operating
systems, see Macintosh software overview.

ENWW

Operating systems
This section contains information about the following topics:
■

Supported Windows operating systems

■

Windows system requirements

■

Printing from other operating systems

Software overview for
Windows

Supported Windows operating systems
The all-in-one software for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products supports the
following operating systems.

Fully supported operating systems
The following Windows operating systems fully support the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-inone through the software installer, and drivers for these operating systems are available on the software
CD that comes with the product.
■

Microsoft® Windows 98 Second Edition (Windows 98 SE)

■

Windows 98 Millennium Edition (Windows Me)

■

Microsoft Windows 2000

■

Microsoft Windows XP (32-bit)
NOTE Microsoft Windows 98First Edition does not support the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840.
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me support only the Minimum Installation, not the Typical
Installation.

Print-only supported operating systems
The following operating systems have print-only support for the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software.
■

Windows XP Intel 64-bit (driver available only on the Web)

■

Windows Server 2003 (driver available only on the Web)

■

Windows NT® 4.0 (network connection only; driver available only on the Web)

You must use the Add Printer Wizard to install the print driver for these operating systems. The print
driver for these operating systems is available at the HP support Web site for your product:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

Windows system requirements
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products can function as standalone copiers (and, in
the case of HP Color LaserJet 2830 and HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one products, standalone fax
machines) without installing the software, but certain functions are not available unless the full
HP LaserJet all-in-one software is installed. If you have a computer, HP strongly recommends installing

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

the HP LaserJet all-in-one software. This provides the full functionality of the HP LaserJet all-in-one
products and is the easiest method for setting required features.
The HP LaserJet all-in-one software has the following minimum system requirements.

■

Microsoft Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP operating system

■

Processor and RAM requirements:

■

For Windows 98 SE: a Pentium® II processor or greater, with 64 MB of RAM (256 MB
recommended)

■

For Windows Me: a Pentium II processor or greater, with 64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended)

■

For Windows 2000 and Windows XP: a Pentium II processor or greater, with 192 MB of RAM
(256 MB recommended)

Available hard disk space:
■

Windows NT 4.0: 10 MB

■

Windows 98 SE and Windows Me: 100 MB

■

Windows 2000, Windows XP, and Windows Server 2003: 550 MB

■

A 2x or faster CD-ROM drive (required for installation)

■

A direct connection to a computer for full product functionality requires a USB port.
NOTE If the USB port has another device attached to it, such as an external storage device,
the device must be disconnected or you must add an additional USB port. You can add an
additional USB port by using a hub, or by installing an additional USB card.

Operating system requirements for print-only support
■

A computer running Windows XP (Intel 64-bit), Windows Server 2003, or Windows NT 4.0

■

A computer that meets your operating-system requirements for processing speed (in MHz) and RAM
(in MB)

Printing from other operating systems
NOTE For information about the HP LaserJet all-in-one software for Macintosh operating
systems, see Macintosh software overview.
You can also print to the HP LaserJet all-in-one product from any operating system that complies with
the PCL command language, such as OS/2, UNIX®, or Linux systems. The OS/2 drivers will be
available, shortly after the product release, from the HP support Web site.
UNIX systems require a Model Script to set up the UNIX environment for printing. The HP LaserJet III
model script, or any generic HP LaserJet printer Model Script, should work. These files are written and
provided by the individual UNIX vendor. Users of HP-UX can check for availability of the Model Script
and the support model at the following Web site:

ENWW

Operating systems

Software overview for
Windows

Windows operating system requirements

www.hp.com/support/net_printing
Click the Support & Drivers link.
Linux users should check for the availability of drivers at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
NOTE The Linux drivers are supported through the Linux community.

Software overview for
Windows

The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one series print drivers have been tested and have printonly support with Windows Terminal Server or Citrix Metaframe.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Software component information
●

New HP LaserJet all-in-one software features

●

HP LaserJet all-in-one software for Windows

●

Software component comparison

●

Software component availability

●

Software component localization

New HP LaserJet all-in-one software features
The HP LaserJet all-in-one software includes new features since the release of the HP LaserJet 3015,
3020, 3030, and 3380 all-in-one products. The following are new features for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one:
■

New installer. The HP LaserJet all-in-one products include a new installer that improves the
software installation process and supports a software-first installation.
■

Software-first is the recommended installation method.

■

You have the option to perform a Minimum installation, which consists of print and scan drivers
and, on the HP Color LaserJet 2840, a storage driver to gain access to photo card slots as well.

■

HP Director. The HP Director provides access to the software programs, default settings, status,
and onscreen Help installed specifically for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840. By using the
HP Director, you can scan various types of originals (pictures, documents, and slides), transfer
images from a camera or photo memory card, send faxes, make copies, view and print images or
video clips, go to the HP Shopping Web site, and update your HP software.

■

Improved network scanning

■

HP Image Zone. Use the HP Image Zone to work with photos, scanned images, and video clips.
You can edit images, create printing projects, and send images.

■

HP Document Viewer. Use the HP Document Viewer to display thumbnails and full-page views of
your images and documents. You can annotate images and text, change the document format, and
print.

■

Mass storage driver. On the HP Color LaserJet 2840, the mass storage driver provides access to
memory card slots for CompactFlash, UltraCompactFlash, Smart Media, Memory Stick, Secure
Digital, Multi Media Card, and XC Card memory cards.

HP LaserJet all-in-one software for Windows
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products include the following software components
and programs for Microsoft Windows operating systems.
Table 2-1 Software components for Windows
Components

ENWW

Description

Software component information

Software overview for
Windows

This section contains information about the following topics:

Table 2-1 Software components for Windows (continued)

Software overview for
Windows

Components

Description

HP installer

Installs the HP LaserJet all-in-one software based on the hardware it detects from the host
computer.

Uninstaller

Removes files and folders that were installed when the HP LaserJet all-in-one software was
originally installed on the computer.

Scrubber utility

After running the uninstaller, removes files and folders that were installed when the HP LaserJet
all-in-one software was originally installed on the computer.

HP Scan software1

Provides access to the scan functions on your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one.

HP LaserJet Fax software

Provides access to the fax functions on your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

HP Toolbox

Provides a Web-based interface to manage the HP LaserJet all-in-one products. Use the
HP Toolbox to perform the following tasks:

Driver software

■

Monitor the status of the product.

■

Change the print, fax, and copy settings for the product.

■

Use the scanning functionality from the control panel of the product.

■

Set the scan-to e-mail addresses and the scan-to folder locations.

■

Find troubleshooting information and instructions for performing basic tasks.

■

Receive Status Alerts when certain events occur or conditions exist on the product.

Use the driver software to print, fax, and scan with the computer and the HP Color LaserJet 2830
and HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one products, and to print and scan with the HP Color
LaserJet 2820 all-in-one product.
This software includes the following drivers:
■

The HP PCL 6 Unidriver and HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver. The HP PCL 6 Unidriver(color) and
HP PCL 6 Unidriver (black and white) are installed by default in Windows 2000, Windows XP,
and Windows Server 2003. The HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver is installed by default in
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me. The HP PCL 5e Unidriver and HP Traditional
PCL 5e Driver are supported, but are not included in the printing-system software.

■

The PS print driver and PostScript printer description (PPD) file for printing with PS level 3
emulation. This driver is not installed by default. To install the PS Emulation Unidriver or
PS Emulation Driver, use the Add Printer wizard.`

■

The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Fax (PC fax) driver

■

Scan drivers

■
ReadIRIS Professional
V9.0 text-recognition
software by IRIS

Chapter 2

■

TWAIN driver. TWAIN is an industry-standard scanning protocol. Scanning from the
HP LaserJet all-in-one product can be initiated from any TWAIN-compliant software
program.

■

Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver. WIA scanning (Windows XP only) can be
started from a WIA-compliant program or from the computer. WIA has its own user
interface that is relatively simple and does not contain the wide range of image quality
options that are available in the TWAIN driver user interface.

Mass storage driver for access to memory card slots on the product.

Converts scanned images into text that can be edited in word-processing programs.
The user interface is localized into six languages. However, the software supports text-recognition
in 124 languages.

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Table 2-1 Software components for Windows (continued)
Components

Description
ReadIRIS Pro V9.0 supports text recognition in 2-byte Asian characters. You must have your
operating system set up to display 2-byte characters in order to see the resulting text.
NOTE For better text-recognition scanning results, start ReadIRIS and scan directly into
the program. ReadIRIS V9.0 automatically starts a wizard to help you through this process.

Software overview for
Windows

When ReadIRIS is installed on the computer, it appears as an option in the destination
drop-down box in the HP Scan software. If you select ReadIRIS as the destination, your
image is scanned into .TIFF format and ReadIRIS starts automatically to begin the textrecognition process.
NOTE The ReadIRIS software uses a separate installer that comes on a separate CD.
The initial release of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 includes READIRIS
Professional V9.0 software. Future releases will include ReadIRIS V10.0
Online Help

Provides help for using the software for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products.
The user documentation for these products is included on the installation CD as both .CHM (online
help) files and Adobe Acrobat® .PDF files. The software CD uses a version of Adobe Acrobat
Reader that remains on the CD and does not need to be installed on the computer. However, you
need a web browser installed on the computer in order to view the contents from any .CHM file.

The HP Color LaserJet 2820 does not support faxing.

Software component comparison
The following table lists the differences between the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one
software feature set compared to the software for the HP LaserJet 3015, 3020, 3030, and 3380 all-inone products.
Table 2-2 Software component comparison
Windows software components

HP LaserJet 3015, HP LaserJet 3020 and HP Color
3030, and HP LaserJet 3380 all-in-one
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-inproducts
one products

HP installer

Uninstaller

Driver software

HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Black and White)

HP Director

HP Document Viewer

HP LaserJet Send Fax/Fax Driver

Network Receive to PC fax functionality

HP Scan software

HP Image Zone
ReadIRIS Professional text-recognition
software by IRIS

ENWW

X
V8.0

V9.0

Software component information

Table 2-2 Software component comparison (continued)

Software overview for
Windows

1
2
3

Windows software components

HP LaserJet 3015, HP LaserJet 3020 and
3030, and HP LaserJet 3380 all-in-one
products

HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-inone products

Online Help

HP Toolbox and Fax Management

X (in Windows 2000 and
Windows XP only)

Scan Application

TWAIN drivers

WIA drivers

Scrubber utility

Online user guide

Web Registration

Two installers run in sequence.
This feature is not supported on the HP Color LaserJet 2820 all-in-one.
This feature is disabled.

Software component availability
The following table lists the availability of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software components by operating
system.
Table 2-3 Software component availability for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one
Component

Windows 98 S
E and
Windows Me

Windows 2000
and
Windows XP

UNIX

Linux

Drivers
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

PS Emulation Driver

HP PCL 6 Unidriver (color)

HP PCL 6 Unidriver (black and white)

PS Emulation Unidriver

HP traditional Postscript Printer Description (PPD)

UNIX Model Script

Linux print drivers and model script

Fax driver

Fax software

TWAIN scan driver

WIA scan driver

Scan Application

Installers

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Table 2-3 Software component availability for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one (continued)
Component

Windows 98 S
E and
Windows Me

Windows 2000
and
Windows XP

Common Windows Installer

CD Browser

Fonts

UNIX

Linux

.INF File (Add Printer)

HP Web Jetadmin6

Applet for HP Web Jetadmin6

Direct Connect Bidirectional Communications

Software overview for
Windows

Bidirectional communication

Remote management and status

HP Toolbox

Online Documentation
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide

Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Allin-one Install Notes7

Help systems

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Animated Getting
Started Guide

Other
PS Fonts

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

HP Director

HP Image Zone

HP Document Viewer

This driver is installed through the Add Printer Wizard only.
This component is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/net_printing
This component is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/linuxprinting
This driver is available for Windows XP only.
Fonts are installed only during a Typical Installation, not a Minimum Installation.
This component is available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/go/webjetadmin
This document is also available at the following Web site: www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

Software component localization
The following table provides localization information about the all-in-one software components for the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840.
NOTE A language key follows each table.

ENWW

Software component information

Table 2-4 Software component localization by language, A-K
Component 1

Operating
system

HP Toolbox

C
S

D
E

D
N

Software overview for
Windows

E
N

E
S

F
R

2000, XP

HP Director

2000, XP

HP Image Zone

2000, XP

HP Document
Viewer

2000, XP

HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and
PS Emulation
Driver

98SE, Me

HP PCL 6
Unidriver (color,
and black and
white) and
PS Emulation
Unidriver

2000, XP, 2003
Server

Common
Windows
Installer

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

Online manuals
(.PDF)

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

Scan drivers

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

ReadIRIS text
recognition

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

ReadIRIS UI

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

1
2

A
R

B
G

E
L

E
T

H
E

H
R

H
U

K
K

K
O

Components that are not available in a specific language are supported in English.
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide only.

Language key for Table 2-4 Software component localization by language, A-K:

■

AR = Arabic

■

BG = Bulgarian

■

CS = Czech

■

DE = German

■

DN = Danish

■

EL = Greek

■

EN = English

■

ES = Spanish

■

ET = Estonian

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

FI = Finnish

■

FR = French

■

HE = Hebrew

■

HR = Croatian

■

HU = Hungarian

■

ID = Indonesian

■

IT = Italian

■

KK = Kazakh

■

KO = Korean

Software overview for
Windows

■

Table 2-5 Software component localization by language, L-Z

ENWW

Component 1

Operating system

HP Toolbox

N
O

2000, XP

HP Director

2000, XP

HP Image Zone

2000, XP

HP Document
Viewer

2000, XP

HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver and
PS Emulation
Driver

98SE, Me

HP PCL 6
Unidriver and
PS Emulation
Unidriver

2000, XP, 2003
Server

Common Windows
Installer

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

Online manuals
(.PDF)

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

Scan drivers

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

ReadIRIS text
recognition

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

ReadIRIS UI

98SE, Me, 2000,
XP

R
O

ZH
C
N

ZH
T
W

R
U

S
K

Components that are not available in a specific language are supported in English.

Software component information

Language key for Table 2-5 Software component localization by language, L-Z:

Software overview for
Windows

■

LT = Lithuanian

■

LV = Latvian

■

NL = Dutch

■

NO = Norwegian

■

PL = Polish

■

PT = Portuguese

■

RO = Romanian

■

RU = Russian

■

SK = Slovak

■

SL = Slovenian

■

SV = Swedish

■

TH = Thai

■

TR = Turkish

■

VI = Vietnamese

■

ZHCN = Simplified Chinese

■

ZHTW = Traditional Chinese

The ReadIRIS text-recognition software component is also available in the following languages:

■

Afaan Oromo

■

American English

■

British English

■

Afrikaans

■

Albanian

■

Arabic

■

Aymara

■

Asturian

■

Azeri Latin

■

Balinese

■

Basque

■

Bemba

■

Bikol

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Bislama

■

Brazilian

■

Breton

■

Bulgarian - English

■

Byelorussian

■

Byelorussian - English

■

Catalan

■

Cebuano

■

Chamorro

■

Corsican

■

Esperanto

■

Faroese

■

Fijian

■

Frisian

■

Friulian

■

Galician

■

Ganda

■

Greek - English

■

Greenlandic

■

Haitian (Creole)

■

Hani

■

Hiligaynon

■

Icelandic

■

Ido

■

Ilocano

■

Interlingua

■

Irish (Gaelic)

■

Japanese

■

Javanese

■

Kapampangan

■

Kicongo

Software overview for
Windows

■

Software component information

Software overview for
Windows
24

■

Kinyarwanda

■

Kurdish

■

Latin

■

Luba

■

Luxemburgh

■

Macedonian

■

Macedonian-English

■

Madurese

■

Malagasy

■

Malay

■

Maltese

■

Manx (Gaelic)

■

Maori

■

Mayan

■

Minangkabau

■

Nahuatl

■

Numeric

■

Nyanja

■

Nynorsk

■

Occitan

■

Papiamento

■

Pidgin English

■

Quechua

■

Rhaeto-Roman

■

Rundi

■

Russian - English

■

Samoan

■

Sardinian

■

Scottish (Gaelic)

■

Serbian

■

Serbian - English

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Serbian (Latin)

■

Shona

■

Somali

■

Sotho

■

Sudanese

■

Swahili

■

Tagalog

■

Tahitian

■

Tatar

■

Tok Pisin

■

Tonga

■

Tswana

■

Turkmen

■

Ukrainian

■

Ukrainian-English

■

Waray

■

Welsh

■

Wolof

■

Xhosa

■

Zapotec

■

Zulu

Software overview for
Windows

■

Software component information

HP Extended Capabilities
When you install your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840, you have the option of participating in HP's
voluntary program for communication between your system and HP. This feature, available through
software that is included on your printing-system software CD, helps HP monitor toner usage.
At the time of the invitation (about two weeks after installation), full disclosure of the information to be
communicated is provided. Participation is entirely voluntary, and the impact on your processing and
connecting speed is negligible. Personal information is never sent to HP unless you give permission.
TCP/IP addresses are used only to enable the connection and for security purposes.

Software overview for
Windows

If you decline the invitation, the dialog box does not appear again later, and no data will be gathered.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

HP Director
Use the HP Director to gain access to the product-specific software, default settings, status, and
onscreen Help. By using the HP Director, you can scan various types of originals (pictures, documents,
and slides), send faxes, make copies, view and print images or video clips, go to the HP Shopping Web
site, and update your HP software. If you have the HP Color LaserJet 2840, you can also transfer images
from a camera or photo memory card.

Software overview for
Windows

To start the HP Director, click Start, click Programs, click HP, and then select HP Director. You can
also double-click the click the HP Director icon on your desktop shortcut. The following screen appears.

Figure 2-1 HP Director screen
The following options are available on this screen:

ENWW

■

Select Device

■

Status

■

Settings

■

Help

■

Scan Picture

■

Scan Document

■

Transfer Images (HP Color LaserJet 2840 only)

■

Send a Fax

■

HP Image Zone

■

HP Document Viewer

■

Support

■

How Do I

■

Creative Ideas

■

HP Shopping

■

Utilities

HP Director

■

Software Update

Select Device
If more than one HP device is installed on your system, use this drop-down menu to select the one you
want to use.

Status
Software overview for
Windows

Click Status to open the HP Toolbox Device Status screen, as shown in the following illustration.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Software overview for
Windows
Figure 2-2 Device Status screen

ENWW

HP Director

Settings
When you click Settings, the options that are available depend on the capabilities and configuration of
your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. The following table lists various options and settings
that might be accessible from the Settings menu.

Software overview for
Windows

Setting

Details

Scan Settings & Preferences

■

Scan Picture Settings

■

Scan Document Settings

■

Scan Slide Settings

■

Scan Negative Settings

■

Scan Preferences Settings

■

Button Settings

■

Scan to... Setup

■

Fax Settings

■

Fax Speed Dial Settings

■

Fax Setup Wizard

■

Fax Cover Page

■

Fax Log

■

Test Fax Setup

Fax Settings & Setup (not available on the HP Color
LaserJet 2820 all-in-one)

Print Settings

Click this setting to specify default settings for print jobs,
maintain your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one,
or set up a remote print driver, for example.

Copy Settings

Click this setting to specify default settings that affect all copy
jobs.

E-Mail Settings

Click this setting to specify default settings for the e-mail
software program.

Image Transfer Settings

Click this setting to specify default settings that affect all
transfer sessions.

Camera Share Menu Setup (for the HP Color LaserJet 2840
only)

Click this setting to set up an HP device, such as a digital
camera, to work with the HP Instant Share tool.

HP Instant Share Setup

Click this setting to register your network-enabled HP device
and set up the HP Instant Share.

Network Settings

Click this setting to modify current network settings for the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. If the device is
not set up for networking, a message appears explaining that
this feature is not available.
CAUTION If you are not familiar with changing
network settings, do not modify the settings in the
window that appears. Incorrect settings could prevent
networked computers from communicating with the
device.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Setting

Details

Auto Prompt Settings

Click this setting to cause the HP Director to appear
automatically when you load a document into the automatic
document feeder (ADF). This option appears only if your
HP device has an ADF and supports this function.
To enable this feature, select the Automatically display the
HP Director when a document is loaded check box.
Click this setting to change the color appearance of the
HP Director.

Scan Picture and Scan Document
When you click Scan Picture or Scan Document, the HP LaserJet Scan software opens. For more
information about scanning pictures and documents, see Scanning system.

Transfer Images
Digital images can be created and stored on digital imaging devices such as digital cameras and memory
cards, and then transferred to a computer for printing or sharing with the HP Image Zone Transfer
software.
NOTE This feature is available only on the HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one.
When you click Transfer Images, the following screen appears.

Figure 2-3 Device Selection screen

ENWW

HP Director

Software overview for
Windows

Change Appearance

Send a Fax
When you click Send a Fax, the HP LaserJet Send a Fax software opens. For more information about
sending faxes, see HP Send Fax software.
NOTE This feature is not available for the HP Color LaserJet 2820 product.

HP Image Zone
When you click HP Image Zone, the HP Image Zone screen appears.

Software overview for
Windows
Figure 2-4 My Images screen

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

■

My Images. You can navigate to any images in your system from the Folders Menu at the left of
the screen.

■

Edit. Select an image and click the Edit tab to open and make changes to the image.

■

Projects. Click this tab to use your photos and other images in creative print projects such as photo
album pages, cards, CD labels, calendars, flyers, and brochures. These projects contain predefined
layouts with picture holders and text objects that you can customize. The available projects vary
depending on the HP device you have installed.

■

HP Instant Share. Select the HP Instant Share tab to share photos with colleagues using e-mail,
online albums, and an online photo-finishing service.

You can also open the HP Image Zone software independently of the HP Director by clicking Start,
clicking Programs, clicking HP, and then selecting HP Image Zone.

HP Document Viewer
The HP Document Viewer is a software program that you can use to organize your scanned documents
(.JPG and .TIFF), annotate them with text and graphics, print them, convert them to text, and send them
in e-mail or fax them. You can also display and print Word, text, and .PDF files.
When you click HP Document Viewer, the HP Document Viewer screen appears.

ENWW

HP Director

Software overview for
Windows

Four tabs are available on the Image Zone UI:

Software overview for
Windows
Figure 2-5 HP Document Viewer screen
Two tabs are available on the HP Document viewer screen:
■

View Thumbnails. This view shows thumbnail images of the images in the folder that is selected.
You can navigate to any images in your system by using the Folders Menu at the left of the screen.

■

View Page. Select an image or document and click the View Page tab to view the image or
document.

Support
If you have access to the web, you can click the Support icon to open the HP support web page for the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 product.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

You can also open the web page directly by going to the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

How Do I

Creative Ideas
When you click the Creative Ideas icon, the Image Zone Help opens, as shown in the following
illustration. You can navigate through the Help system for HP Image Zone instructions, information about
creative projects, or troubleshooting and support.

Figure 2-6 HP Image Zone Help screen

HP Shopping
If you have access to the Web, you can click the HP Shopping icon to gain access to the HP Shopping
Web site.

Utilities
When you click the Utilities icon, the HP Toolbox opens. For more information about the HP Toolbox,
see the The HP Toolbox chapter in this guide.

ENWW

HP Director

Software overview for
Windows

Click the How Do I icon to open the HP Toolbox to the Print: How do I…? screen on the
Documentation tab. For more information about the HP Toolbox, see the The HP Toolbox chapter in
this guide. For more information about the Documentation tab, see Documentation tab.

Software Update
If you have Internet access, you can click the Software Update icon to open the Welcome to HP
Software Update dialog box, which is shown in the following illustration. This software automatically
checks the web for updates to the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software.

Software overview for
Windows
Figure 2-7 HP Software Update screen
You can also gain access directly to the latest software for the product by navigating to the following
Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Scanning system
●

Scanning methods

●

HP Scan software

●

Scan drivers

Scanning methods
You can scan from your HP LaserJet all-in-one product by using any of the following methods.
■

Open the HP Director. Click Start, click Programs, click HP, click HP Director, and then click either
Scan Pictures or Scan Documents.

■

From the HP LaserJet all-in-one product control panel. On the HP LaserJet all-in-one product
control panel, press the SCAN TO button. Use the < or > buttons to make a selection from following
list, and then press the START SCAN or the ENTER button.
NOTE Scanning from the product control panel is possible only after it has first been
configured in the HP Toolbox.
See The HP Toolbox for information about the following options;
■

If you select an e-mail address that you had previously added in the HP Toolbox, your scanned
item is sent to that e-mail recipient as an attachment.

■

If you select a folder location that you had previously added in the HP Toolbox, your scanned
item is saved in the folder location you specify.

■

If you select MY SCANS, you will save the scanned item to the \My
Documents\My Scans directory on your computer.
CAUTION If you move the My Documents folder, the My Scans folder does not follow
to the new location. It remains hard-coded to the current-user's home, and scan jobs
continue to be stored there.

ENWW

■

If you select ADD NEW E-MAIL, the HP Toolbox automatically opens on your computer, and
you can add e-mail recipients.

■

If you select ADD NEW FOLDER, the HP Toolbox automatically opens on your computer, and
you can add additional folder locations.

■

From a TWAIN- or WIA-compliant software program. Check the Help system in the software
program to learn how to scan from a TWAIN- or WIA-compliant scanner from within that program.

■

From the Camera and Scanner Wizard on Windows XP. In Windows XP, click Start, click Control
Panel, double-click Scanners and Cameras, and then double-click the HP LaserJet all-in-one
product scanner icon. The Camera and Scanner Wizard appears. Follow the onscreen directions
to save your scanned item to a file.

Scanning system

Software overview for
Windows

This section contains information about the following topics.

HP Scan software
Use the HP Scan software to scan from the HP LaserJet all-in-one product or to read from a file and
then complete any of the following tasks with the data:

Software overview for
Windows

■

Save the scanned item to a file.

■

Attach the scanned item to an e-mail.

■

Perform text recognition on the scanned item through ReadIRIS (if ReadIRIS text-recognition
software is installed on the computer).

■

Open the scanned item with any third-party software program that supports the drag-and-drop
function.

The HP LaserJet Scan software is set up to scan by default , but the General tab does provide an
override to read a scanned item from a file. This is helpful both for testing when a scanner is not available
and for converting existing files into some other output file type. The following file types are currently
supported:
■

.BMP

■

.GIF

■

.JPG

■

.PDF

■

.TIFF (both regular and compressed)

The following file types are supported as output in ReadIRIS.
■

.BMP

■

.DCA

■

.DOC

■

.DW

■

.HTM

■

.MM

■

.PDF

■

.RTF

■

.TXT

■

.WP

■

.WPS

■

.WS

■

.WS2

The HP LaserJet Scan software is composed of a simple user interface that provides only a Where
should the data go? drop-down menu and a Settings button.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Click Settings to open a more detailed property dialog box called the Scan Settings dialog box, where
you can make changes to the scan settings. The tabs that are available in the Scan Settings dialog
box depend on the destination that you select on the HP LaserJet Scan dialog box. For example,
the E-mail tab appears only if the selected destination is Send it through e-mail. Quick Sets are also
available to store settings that you use on a regular basis.

Figure 2-9 Scan Settings dialog box
If you do not change any settings in the Scan Settings dialog box, the HP LaserJet Scan software
prompts you for any needed information, such as a file name if you are sending the scanned item to a
file folder or an e-mail address if you are sending the scanned item in e-mail. If you specify an e-mail
address in the Scan Settings dialog box before you scan your item, the e-mail is sent automatically
without the new message dialog box opening.
Because the Scan Settings dialog box contains only a limited set of variables; more functionality is
available when using command-line arguments.
Every time the HP LaserJet Scan software is used, an HPPSCAN2.LOG file is generated within the
current user's temporary directory. The HPPSCAN2.LOG file develops a log of operations and aids in
troubleshooting problems.
Scanning to a file sends the scanned image to a MY SCANS directory in your MY DOCUMENTS folder.

ENWW

Scanning system

Software overview for
Windows

Figure 2-8 hp LaserJet Scan dialog box

CAUTION If you move the My Documents folder, the My Scans folder does not follow to the
new location. It remains hard-coded to the current-user's home, and scan jobs continue to be
stored there.
Selecting the third-party destination option saves the scanned image to a file of the specified file type.
The HP LaserJet Scan software then starts the specified software program by appending the filename
after the software filename. Because the HP LaserJet Scan software does not support automatic
discovery of software programs, you must specify the correct software program and specify a file type
that your program supports. The HP LaserJet Scan software opens when the filename is passed as a
command-line argument.

Software overview for
Windows

NOTE The HP LaserJet Scan software does not support multipage scanning from the flatbed.
Multipage scanning from the scanner flatbed is supported when you scan from the HP Director,
the HP Image Zone, or the HP Document Viewer.

E-mail
The HP LaserJet all-in-one software for Windows supports only 32-bit, messaging application
programming interface (MAPI)-compliant e-mail programs, and does not support Internet-based e-mail
programs such as Hotmail or Yahoo. The following table lists some examples of supported e-mail
programs.
Table 2-6 Supported e-mail programs
Program Name

Windows OS

Microsoft Entourage

Macintosh OS
Mac OS X

Microsoft Outlook

Yes; Outlook 97, Outlook 98, Outlook 2000, Outlook XP

Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X

Microsoft Outlook Express

Yes

Mac OS 9

Lotus Notes

Yes; V3.0 and later

E-mail is always sent through your default e-mail client. To see what your default e-mail client is in
Windows XP (the path varies for other Windows operating system), click Start, click Settings, click
Control Panel, click Network and Internet Options, click Internet Options, click the Programs tab,
and see the E-mail setting.
Sending a scan to e-mail generally uses the simple MAPI protocol. If you add the e-mail address prior
to scanning, extended MAPI might be used to avoid security messages while the program tries to send
the e-mail automatically. Setting a MapiLevel registry key forces the scan program to always use either
simple or extended MAPI. This might be required if scanning to e-mail fails even when your default email client is set up correctly.

Scan drivers
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product software includes the following integrated
scan drivers.

■

TWAIN driver

■

Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) driver

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

NOTE A network administrator must initiate the scan and fax features. Faxing is not available
for the HP Color LaserJet 2820 product.

TWAIN driver
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product software includes a TWAIN driver user
interface that provides great flexibility and a wide range of image-quality options. TWAIN is an industry
standard scanning protocol, and you can initiate scans from the HP LaserJet all-in-one product by using
any TWAIN-compliant program.

Software overview for
Windows

The current supported scan language is peripheral management language (PML).
NOTE The TWAIN driver does not support duplex scanning.
TWAIN compatibility
TWAIN-compliant programs can acquire documents directly from the HP LaserJet all-in-one product.
Programs that follow the TWAIN standards should work. (HP LaserJet all-in-one products support the
required core functions for TWAIN compliance, but have only limited support for extended TWAIN
options.)
TWAIN scanning does not work with some programs
For programs that are not TWAIN-compliant, use the following process as a workaround.
1

Use the HP LaserJet Scan software to scan the document in .TIFF format (or any other file type that
the software supports) into a folder.

Import the .TIFF file into the program.

Additional information about TWAIN
For more information about TWAIN, visit the following Web site:
www.twain.org

ENWW

Scanning system

TWAIN driver user interface

Software overview for
Windows
Figure 2-10 TWAIN driver user interface
The TWAIN user interface contains the following options:

■

New Scan. Use this control to rescan the image. Flatbed previews are always at 75 dpi and in color:

■

Accept. Use this control to rescan the image if the original is on a flatbed scanner and then to send
the image back to program with the specified settings.

■

Resize. Use this control to change the selection area for final scan. The final scan is performed
within this selection area.

■

Lighten/Darken. Use this control to lighten or darken the scanned image.

■

Color Adjustment. Use this control to adjust the color on the scanned image.

■

Resolution. Use this option to designate the final resolution for the image. The software interpolates
resolutions that are above 1200 dpi.

■

Mirror. Use this option to flip the scanned image horizontally.

■

Invert Colors. Use this control to invert the colors in the scanned image.

■

Descreen. Use this control to apply a special algorithm that detects and removes undesirable
patterns from the scanned image. Choosing this option automatically triggers a rescan because the
descreen operation must take place as the image data is flowing in from the scanner.

■

Rotate. Use this control to rotate the scanned image 90°.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

■

Zoom. Use this control to zoom in on the selected area of the scan. This automatically starts a
rescan if one is needed to obtain a clear image.

■

Reset Tools. Use this option to reset all the controls to their default values.

Software overview for
Windows

To set additional scan settings, on the Scan menu, click Scan preferences.

Figure 2-11 Scan Preferences – Web Page Dialog
The Scan Preferences dialog box contains three tabs: Automatic, Quality vs. Speed, and Preview.
However, the HP LaserJet Scan software supports only the options on the Automatic tab. The following
options are available on the Automatic tab.
■

Automatically straighten scanned images

■

Automatically adjust exposure

■

Automatically adjust color

■

Use enhanced color

■

Prompt for additional scans from glass/TMA.

■

Restore Defaults

WIA driver
Use any of the following methods to open the Windows Image Acquisition (WIA) scanning feature for
Windows XP.

ENWW

■

Start WIA scanning through a WIA-compliant software program.

■

Right-click on the scanner icon in the My Computer folder, and click Scan.

■

Right-click on the scanner icon in the My Computer folder, and click Scanner Wizard.

■

Right-click on the scanner icon in the Scanners and Cameras folder in the Control Panel, and
click Scan.

■

Right-click on the scanner icon in the Scanners and Cameras folder in the Control Panel, and
click Scanner Wizard.

Scanning system

WIA has its own user interface. It is relatively simple and does not contain the wide range of imagequality options that are available in the TWAIN driver user interface.
When you use the WIA scan driver, you must modify the brightness and contrast after you perform the
scan. Contrast or brightness modifications cannot be set on the device. Only native device resolutions
are supported and software interpolation is not performed. The WIA scan driver supports these scan
types:ADF or Flatbed, but It does not support duplex scanning. The WIA scan driver supports the
following compression types:

Software overview for
Windows
44

■

None

■

.JPG

■

.GIF

■

.TIFF

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

HP Send Fax software
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 2820 all-in-one product does not support faxing.

Software overview for
Windows

Use the HP Send Fax software to send faxes from your computer. To use the HP Send Fax software,
click Start, click Programs, click HP, select the name of your HP LaserJet all-in-one product, and then
click Send Fax.

Figure 2-12 hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – user interface
NOTE The HP Send Fax software works together with the HP Toolbox. If you turn off the
HP Toolbox, you cannot use some of the HP Send Fax software features, such as using the fax
phone book or editing your personal data. Cover pages are completed with the your name,
company name, phone number, and fax number as you typed them when they were last edited.
However, you can still preview and send faxes.

ENWW

HP Send Fax software

In some cases, faxing from the computer is more convenient than faxing from the HP LaserJet all-inone control panel, such as in the following examples.
■

Faxing to multiple recipients

■

Creating a cover page

■

Faxing without first printing and scanning the document

Faxing to multiple recipients
Software overview for
Windows

If you need to send a fax to multiple recipients, use the HP Send Fax software to type the names and
fax numbers of each recipient easily. The hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box is shown in the following
illustration.

Figure 2-13 hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – multiple recipients
If you have stored entries in the fax phone book in the HP Toolbox software, you can click Phone
Book on the Send Fax screen to select the recipients for the fax quickly. Or you can type in the entries
at your keyboard and click Add To List. To add new entries to the fax phone book in the HP Toolbox,
click Edit to open the HP Toolbox.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Creating a cover page

Software overview for
Windows

If you want to create a cover page to accompany your fax, click Cover Page.

Figure 2-14 hp LaserJet Send Fax dialog box – cover page
After you run the HP Toolbox Fax Setup Wizard (you need to do this only once for the life of the software),
your name, company name, phone number, and fax number are entered automatically into the coverpage template. The recipient’s data is automatically filled in, too. When you click Cover Page, the
Notes section appears. To view a filled-in cover page template, select one from the drop-down menu
and click Preview.

Faxing without first printing and scanning the document
One of the most useful features of the Send Fax software is the ability to fax documents without first
printing and scanning them. For example, if you want to send a Microsoft Word document, open the

ENWW

HP Send Fax software

document, click File, click Print, and then select the Fax Printer Driver from the drop-down menu of
printers.
The HP Send Fax software starts with the document already attached. If you want to view the fax, click
Preview. You can add a scanned document by clicking Pages in Document Tray. You can add a cover
page by clicking Cover Page.

Software overview for
Windows
48

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Available product configurations
■

Software features by connection type

■

Supported configurations

■

Configuration options

■

Multi-tasking capabilities by connection type

■

Differences between network and direct connection configurations

Software features by connection type
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products can function in one of three installations:
■

As a standalone fax and copier not connected to a computer. (The HP Color LaserJet 2820 product
does not offer fax capability.)

■

Directly connected to a computer. (If the product is connected to a computer running
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, or Windows XP, you can share the product with
other network users [for printing].)

■

Connected to a network.

The product works in any of these situations, but some features are not available. The following table
shows which features are available depending on how you connect the product.
Table 2-7 Software features by connection type

ENWW

Feature or Function

Connected directly to
computer (local user)1

Connected directly to
computer, but shared with
other users2

Connected to network

Printing from the computer to
the product

Faxing electronic documents X
from the computer (PC faxing)

Combining paper and PC fax
documents in a fax

Scan to e-mail

OCR software for converting
scanned images to text
documents that can be edited

Access through the software
to the fax options

Available product configurations

Software overview for
Windows

This section contains information about the following topics:

Table 2-7 Software features by connection type (continued)
Feature or Function

Connected directly to
computer (local user)1

Access through the software
to the product setup options
and setup for speed-dial
numbers

1
2

Connected directly to
computer, but shared with
other users2

Connected to network

Software overview for
Windows

Available to the user of the computer that is directly connected to the product.
Available to the other users who are using the network when Microsoft Windows sharing is enabled from the computer that is
directly connected to the product. When the computer that is directly connected to the product is on a local area network (LAN),
the product can be shared with other computers on the network. Users of the shared computers can only print from their
computers to the product.

Supported configurations
This section includes information about the following topics:
■

Direct connection

■

Network connections

Direct connection
In the direct (or local) configuration, the HP LaserJet all-in-one product is connected directly to the host
computer with a USB cable. In this configuration, the product is not shared. A single user has complete
physical control over the product. Most users are familiar with using peripherals that are directly
connected to their computers. In this configuration, you have access to all of the product features.

Network connection options
The following networking options are available for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one
products:
●

Local connection that uses Microsoft peer-to-peer networking (Windows only)

●

Networking requirements

Local connection that uses Microsoft peer-to-peer networking (Windows only)
Use Microsoft Windows to share a local printer over the network. The operating system handles all of
the networking issues. The product prints in this configuration, but only the local computer can use the
faxing and scanning functionality; network faxing and scanning are not supported in this configuration.
Also, because Microsoft peer-to-peer networking is unidirectional, network users do not receive printerstatus messages when they print to the product.
NOTE HP does not support vending drivers across operating systems that have different printdriver architectures, such as HP Traditional drivers and HP Unidrivers. To use a mix of operating
systems, you must install an alternate print driver and download the driver for the specific
operating system.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Networking requirements
The following are required for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product to work on a network connection.
■

An installed network that uses the TCP/IP network protocol.

■

A cable for your type of network connections (not included).

The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products are designed to carry out multiple tasks
simultaneously. You can initiate tasks when they are needed, without waiting.
The HP LaserJet all-in-one products perform multiple tasks such as printing, scanning, copying, faxing,
and sending faxes directly from a computer (PC faxing). Depending on which functions are in use, the
HP LaserJet all-in-one product can perform many functions at the same time. This high level of
multitasking is made possible by the two separate paper paths (a print paper path and a scan paper
path) in the HP LaserJet all-in-one products. Additionally, these products feature at least 96 MB of
memory that can efficiently manage multiple tasks, and a scan-ahead feature that quickly clears the
scan paper path for subsequent jobs.
The following table shows which tasks the HP LaserJet all-in-one products can perform while another
function is already in use.
NOTE The HP LaserJet all-in-one products can perform multiple tasks when directly connected
to a computer or when connected to a network. The fax and scan functions are not available
when using a Windows sharing (peer-to-peer) connection.
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 2820 all-in-one product does not support faxing.
Table 2-8 Multitasking capabilities

ENWW

If the
product is:

You can:
Send a print
job

Receive a
paper fax

Send a paper
fax

Receive a PC Send a PC
fax
fax

Scan to the
PC

Copy

Printing a file

Yes. Prints
when the first
print job
ends.

Yes

Printing a
paper fax

Yes. Prints
when fax
printing ends.

Yes. Prints
when the first
job ends.

Yes

Ye.

Yes. Copies
scan and
print when fax
printing ends.

Receiving a
paper fax

Yes. Prints
when fax
printing ends.

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

Yes

Sending a
paper fax

Yes

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

Yes, if the
Yes, if the
scanner is not scanner is not
in use.
in use.

Copying

Yes. Prints
when copying
ends.

Yes
Yes, if the
scanner is not
in use.

Yes

Yes. Second
Yes, if the
scanner is not copy begins
when the first
in use.

Available product configurations

Software overview for
Windows

Multitasking capabilities

Table 2-8 Multitasking capabilities (continued)
copy job
ends.

Software overview for
Windows

Sending a PC
fax

Yes

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

Yes, if the
scanner is not
in use.

Yes

Receiving a
PC fax

Yes

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

No.
Telephone
line is in use.

Yes. Sends
when the first
fax job ends.

Yes

Scanning

Yes

No. The
scanner is in
use.

Yes

No. The
scanner is in
use.

Differences between the network-connected and direct-connected
configurations
When using a network, you can perform nearly all of the product functions just as if your HP LaserJet
all-in-one product were directly connected to your computer. The following are a few exceptions:

■

One-touch scanning with the Start Scan button on the control panel of the HP LaserJet all-in-one
product is not supported on networked HP LaserJet all-in-one products. The Start Scan button on
the control panel of the HP LaserJet all-in-one product starts the HP LaserJet Scan software on the
computer in direct connections.

■

The Scan to e-mail or folder functionality is turned off by default for network connections. You
must turn on this function in the HP Toolbox for networked computers.

■

The Scan to e-mail or folder entries will be prefixed with a host name abbreviation for networked
computers in order to differentiate among computers on the network.

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Supported third-party software
This section describes third-party software programs that are supported by your HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one software.

The HP all-in-one product software has an integrated text-recognition feature. This feature is also known
as optical character recognition, or OCR. Text-recognition capability is also provided by the third-party
software program ReadIRIS, which is included on a separate CD that comes with the HP LaserJet allin-one product.

About text-recognition reliability
Text-recognition software turns an image into computer-editable text by analyzing the image and
defining the characters. The accuracy obtained through text-recognition software depends on the
quality, size, and structure of the original document, and on the quality of the scan itself. To obtain the
best possible results when using text-recognition software, use the following guidelines:
■

Process only pages that contain 9-point text or larger.

■

Limit pages that contain underlining, forms, graphics, rotated text, photographs, and handwriting.

■

Scan images squarely.

■

Make sure that the pages are free of extraneous marks.

■

Maximize the scanning resolution.

■

Process only pages that have crisp, clear text. Letters that have gaps, that "bleed" along their edges,
or that touch other letters do not work well. Text that is aligned closely to nontext items, such as
graphics, might also degrade text-recognition results.

■

Fine-tune the amount of black and white on scanned images. See the user guide for information.

■

Avoid scanning from thin media that has information printed on the back side. The information on
the back can bleed through.

Even if you follow these recommendations, you might still get less-than-perfect results. This is because
text-recognition technology itself is evolving and is still less than perfect.

Other PC fax programs
The PC fax program that came with the product is the only PC fax program that works with the product.
If you want to continue to use your PC fax program, you must use it with the modem you already have
connected to your computer, rather than with the product. Using two PC fax programs can cause both
programs to work incorrectly.

ENWW

Supported third-party software

Software overview for
Windows

Text-recognition software

Software overview for
Windows
54

Chapter 2

Software overview for Windows

ENWW

Windows HP unidriver features

Introduction
This chapter includes the following information.
●

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

NOTE A PCL 5e driver is not included on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 printingsystem software CD. However, the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver is supported through the
printer's firmware.

ENWW

Introduction

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for
Windows 2000 and Windows XP)
This section contains the following information.
●

Access to drivers

●

Help system

●

HP postscript level 3 emulation support

●

Driver tab features

Access to drivers
To gain access to driver settings from within most software programs, click File, click Print, and then
click Properties. The appearance and names of the driver tabs that appear can vary, depending on the
operating system. These settings apply only while the software program is open.
You can also control the drivers directly from the Printers folder. These settings change the default
settings used across all software programs.

Windows HP unidriver
features

■

In Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings, click Printers, right-click the printer name, and then
click Printing Preferences to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that the software program
controls.

■

In Windows XP, click Start, click Printers and Faxes (Windows XP Professional) or Printers and
Other Hardware Devices (Windows XP Home) to gain access to the same set of driver tabs that
the software program controls.

If, after right-clicking the printer name, you click Properties, you gain access to a different set of tabs
that control the driver behavior and driver connections. For information about the Properties tabs that
are described in this chapter, see the following sections.
■

Printer Properties tab set for the HP PCL 6 Unidriver and PS Emulation Unidriver (for Windows 2000
and Windows XP)

■

Configure tab features for the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (for Windows 98 SE or Windows Me)

■

Device Options tab features for the PS Emulation Driver (for Windows 98 SE or Windows Me)

Help system
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidrivers include a full-featured
Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. The following Help options
are available.

■

What's this? Help

■

Context-sensitive Help

■

Constraint messages

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

What's this? Help
"What's this?" Help is supported in Windows 2000 and Windows XP. You can gain access to "What's
this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
■

Right-click a control and click What's this?, and a pop-up Help window appears.

■

Click the ? button at the upper-right corner of the frame, next to the X, to change the cursor to an
arrow with a question mark. Use this special cursor to select a control, and the pop-up Help window
for that feature appears.

■

Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help
Press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, and context-sensitive Help appears.

Constraint messages

Windows HP unidriver
features

Constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions you take.
These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the printer
or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then change
the paper type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.

Figure 3-1 A typical constraint message
Whenever a constraint message appears with Restore my previous settings or Keep this setting,
and I will change it later buttons, the action of the buttons is as follows:
■

ClickRestore my previous settings and then click OK to reject the change that was just made,
returning the control to its previous value.

■

Click Keep this setting, and I will change it later and then click OK to accept the change that was
just made, allowing you to go back into the driver settings to resolve the conflict.

HP postscript level 3 emulation support
The HP postscript level 3 emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PS Level 3 when PS Level
3 soft fonts are purchased from Adobe.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

A set of 92 PS Level 3 soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently
install the fonts in the printer, HP postscript level 3 emulation fonts are also available from HP in an
optional font DIMM.
Users of Adobe-licensed applications might also have the right to use the Adobe PS level 3 print drivers
from Adobe with the HP LaserJet printer postscript level 3 emulation PPD, available on the HP LaserJet
printer software CD or from the HP Web site. When using the Adobe PS Level 3 print driver, users must
comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated on the Adobe Web site at www.adobe.com/
support/downloads/license.html.

Driver tab features
This section describes the options available on each tab of the HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver
interfaces:
■

Printing Preferences tab set

■

Printer Properties tab set

Printing Preferences tab set

Windows HP unidriver
features

The printer Printing Preferences tabs contain information for formatting documents for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. You can gain access to the Printing Preferences tabs either
through your software program or through the Windows Printers folder. For more information, see the
Access to drivers section for Windows 2000 and Windows XP.
The following tabs are included in Printing Preferences tab set:
■

Advanced tab features

■

Paper/Quality tab features

■

Effects tab features

■

Finishing tab features

■

Color tab features

Advanced tab features
You can use the Advanced tab to change the layout of printed pages. Use this tab to configure special
controls that are not commonly used, as well as features such as paper size and copies, in the driver.
The following illustration shows the Advanced tab.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-2 Advanced tab – HP PCL 6 Unidriver

Figure 3-3 Advanced tab – PS Emulation Unidriver

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

The Advanced tab contains the following controls:
■

Paper/Output settings

■

Graphic settings

■

Document Options settings

Paper/Output settings
The Paper/Output settings contain the following options:
■

Copy Count setting

Copy Count setting
This driver setting is useful for software programs that do not provide a copy count. If a copy count is
available in the software program, set the copy count in the software program.Copy Count specifies
the number of copies to print.

Windows HP unidriver
features

The number of copies that you request appears in the Copy Count option. You can select the number
by typing in the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the text box. For the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product, valid entries are numbers from 1 to 9999. The copies value
will not advance from the maximum number (9999) to 1 when the up arrow is used, or change from 1
to the maximum number (9999) when the down arrow is used. When you click another group box or
leave the Advanced tab, invalid entries into the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less
than 1, or numbers greater than the maximum allowed) change to the last valid value that appeared in
the box. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts can
arise between the software program that you are using and the driver. In most cases, the software
program and the driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the
program) will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not
happen, and the copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the
program and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is
recommended that you set the number of copies in the program, wherever possible.
Graphic settings
The Graphic settings contain the following options.
■

Image Color Management settings.

■

TrueType Font settings.

Image Color Management settings
This control lists the available Image Color Management (ICM) options used for printing color graphics.
ICM, a set of calculations for color matching, makes it possible for programs to adjust colors before

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

printing so that the color of images displayed on the screen more closely match the color of images
when printed. The following options are available:

■

ICM Method. The ICM Method setting specifies how to print your color graphics. To enable Image
Color Management, click ICM Method. The drop-down menu beside this setting becomes
highlighted.
■

If you want the calculations for color matching to be performed on the host computer before it
sends the document to the printer, click ICM Handled by Host System.

■

If you want the calculations for color matching to be performed on your printer, click ICM
Handled by Printer. In this case, a set of rules for mapping the colors will be created and
downloaded to the printer (which must be PostScript language level 2 or higher). The printer
will use these rules to adjust colors in the document.

ICM Intent. The ICM Intent setting specifies how color images are created to produce the bestlooking image on the printed page.
■

If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated, bright colors, click Graphics to achieve the
best quality.

■

For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together, click Pictures to maximize the
contrast.

■

If your document uses a color that you need to match exactly, and you are sending the document
to a printer that has that specific color of ink, click Proof.

■

If you want to preview the color settings from another printer, click Match.

TrueType Font settings
This option specifies the TrueType font settings. The following settings are available.
■

Substitute with Device Font. This setting causes the printer to use equivalent fonts for printing
documents that contain TrueType fonts. This permits faster printing; however, you might lose special
characters that the printer font does not support. This is the default setting.

■

Download as Softfont. This setting causes TrueType fonts to be downloaded and used for printing,
instead of using printer fonts.

Document Options
The Document Options settings contain the following controls:

ENWW

■

Advanced Printing Features

■

Color Printing Mode (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

Print Optimizations (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

PostScript Options (PS Emulation Unidriver only)

■

Printer Features

■

Layout Options

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

■

Advanced Printing Features
When the Advanced Printing Features setting is Enabled, metafile spooling is turned on and
Finishing tab options such as Page Order, Booklet Layout, and Pages per Sheet are available,
depending on your product. For normal printing, leave the Advanced Printing Features setting at the
default (Enabled). If compatibility problems occur, you can disable the feature. However, some
advanced printing features might still be available in the print driver, even though they have been
disabled. If you select an advanced printing feature in the print driver that has been disabled on the
Advanced tab, the feature is automatically turned on again.
Color Printing Mode (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)
The Color Printing Mode specifies whether to print in color or black and white. The default setting is
True Color (24 bpp). Use the Monochrome mode to sharpen details in graphics or to speed up the
printing of your color document.
Print Optimizations (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)
The default setting for Print Optimizations is Enabled. When this feature is enabled and your document
contains overlapping text and graphics, text placed on top of a graphic might not print correctly. If the
printed output is not correct, you can disable this feature. When disabled, print optimization features,
such as substituting device fonts for TrueType fonts and scanning for horizontal and vertical rules, are
turned off.

Windows HP unidriver
features

PostScript Options (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
The following PostScript options appear in the PS Emulation Unidriver:

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-4 Advanced tab - PS Emulation Unidriver - PostScript Options
■

PostScript Output Option

■

TrueType Font Download Option

■

PostScript Language Level

■

Send PostScript Error Handler

■

Mirrored Output

PostScript Output option
The PostScript Output Option specifies the output format for PS files. Generally, you use the default
setting, Optimize for Speed, to print your documents.
To create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC), click Optimize
for Portability. Each page of the document will be a self-contained object. This is useful if you want to
create a PS file and print it on a different product. If you want to include the file as an image in another
document that is printed from a different software program, click Encapsulated PostScript (EPS). The
Archive Format creates a PS file that you can use later.
TrueType Font Download option
The TrueType Font Download Option specifies how TrueType fonts are downloaded. The default
setting of Automatic allows the PS driver to decide which format is best. If you want to download the
TrueType font as a scalable outline font, click Outline. To download the TrueType font as a bitmap font,

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

click Bitmap. If your printer is a TrueType rasterizer printer, click Native TrueType to download the
TrueType font as an outline font.
PostScript Language Level
The PostScript Language Level option specifies which PS language level to use, from 1 to 3. The
highest level supported by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one is 3, and this is the default
setting. Some printers support multiple levels.
It is usually best to select the highest number available, because a higher language level provides more
features. In some instances you should use level 1, such as when you are printing a file to disk, and
that file will be printed by someone who uses a level-1 printer.
Send PostScript Error Handler
The Send PostScript Error Handler setting specifies whether a PS error-handler message is sent. If
you want the printer to print an error page when an error occurs in the print job, click Yes. The default
setting is Yes.
Mirrored Output
This control specifies mirrored output. Click Yes to print a mirror image of your document by reversing
the horizontal coordinates. The default setting is No.

Windows HP unidriver
features

Printer Features
The following Printer Features are available:
■

Print All Text as Black

■

Send True Type as Bitmap (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

Raster Compression (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

Print All Text as Black
The Print All Text as Black feature is Disabled by default. When Enabled is selected, the driver prints
all text as black regardless of the original document text color. Color text is printed as black, except for
white text, which remains white. (White text is a reliable method of printing reverse typeface against a
dark background.) This setting does not affect graphic images on the page, nor does it affect any text
that is part of a graphic.Print All Text as Black remains enabled only for the current print job. When
the current print job is completed, Print All Text as Black is automatically disabled.
Alternatively, to print all text as black, use the black and white HP PCL 6 Unidriver This driver is installed
by default, together with the color HP PCL 6 Unidriver, during a Typical Installation.
Send TrueType as Bitmap (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)
Send True Type as Bitmap provides an alternative for those software programs that encounter
problems when using TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes such as shading, rotation, or slanting.
The setting is Disabled (off) by default. The TrueType fonts are first converted to bitmap soft fonts before
downloading. The Enabled setting causes the driver to send TrueType fonts to the printer as outlines,
which retains the standard format (outline) of the fonts.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Raster Compression (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)
Use the Raster Compression feature to select the graphics compression method:
■

Automatic. The software determines the best compression method to use.

■

Best Quality. Forces the software to use a lossless compression method. (Lossless means that no
data is lost during compression.)

■

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, requires the software to always use a lossy
compression method (some data is lost). Choosing this option increases the print speed
performance, but does decrease print image quality.

Layout Options
The Layout Options section includes the following option:
■

Page Order

Page Order specifies the order in which the pages of your document are printed. Front to Back prints
the document so that page 1 prints first. Back to Front prints the document so that page 1 prints last.
The Back to Front setting is useful if you are printing to a face-up output bin to achieve output in the
correct order.
NOTE The page-ordering operation works on whole sheets of paper rather than on individual
logical pages. Accordingly, if you set Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) to be greater than
one, the ordering of logical pages on a physical sheet of paper does not change.
Paper/Quality tab features
Use the Paper/Quality tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media for your HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. You can also use this tab to indicate different paper-selection
choices for the first page, other pages, and back cover of the document. The following illustration shows
the Paper/Quality tab.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

Page Order

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-5 Paper/Quality tab
The Paper/Quality tab contains the following controls:
■

Print Task Quick Sets group box

■

Paper Options group box

■

Document preview image

Print Task Quick Sets
The first group box in the upper portion of the Paper/Quality tab is Print Task Quick Sets. Any change
to the Print Task Quick Sets group box that is made on the Paper/Quality tab affects most of the
Printing Preferences driver tabs (the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing, and Job Storage tabs)
because they are all the same control.
Use Print Task Quick Sets to store the current combination of driver settings (except the settings on
the Advanced tab). Print Task Quick Sets are either preset by network-administrator settings or userdefined printing specifications (such as media size, pages per sheet, and so on). The Print Task Quick
Sets setting does not appear on the driver Properties tabs.
The following selections are available in the Print Task Quick Sets drop-down menu:

■

Default Print Settings

■

User Guide Print Settings

■

Type a new Quick Set name here

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Default Print Settings
When you select Default Print Settings, nearly all of the settings are restored to the combination that
existed after the driver was installed (the original settings). However, if the attribute combinations that
are associated with watermark definitions, custom paper sizes, or the User Guide Print Settings quick
set have been changed or deleted, the original settings are not restored.
Type a new Quick Set name here appears in the Print Task Quick Sets menu automatically if no
other driver settings have been changed since the driver was installed, or if all of the driver settings
match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print Task Quick Sets menu is the same label
that appeared when you last closed the printing Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
User Guide Print Settings
The User Guide Print Settings option provides a Print Task Quick Sets for optimal printing of the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide.

By default, the Print Task Quick Sets menu is set to Type new Quick Set name here. When you
change any of the default settings on any of the Printing Preferences driver tabs and you want to save
the configuration as a Print Task Quick Set, highlight the words Type new Quick Set name here, type
the name you want for your new Print Task Quick Set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry. To delete a Print Task Quick Set, select it from the drop-down menu and
click Delete.
NOTE Administrators can predefine Print Task Quick Sets for their users. These administrator
Print Task Quick Sets are defined on the server and are available to users, but usually cannot
be modified by users. Users can also define Print Task Quick Sets for their own use. User-defined
Print Task Quick Sets are described later in this section.
You can store a maximum of 25 Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you attempt to save
too many, a message box appears that reads, "There are too many Print Task Quick Sets defined.
Please delete some before adding new ones."
Paper Options group box
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper/Quality tab apply to all of the
pages of the document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the selections
available by default.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

Type new Quick Set name here

Figure 3-6 Paper Options group box
The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. The following settings in the Paper Options group box are available:

Windows HP unidriver
features

■

Size is:

■

Source Is: drop-down menu

■

Type is: drop-down menu

■

Use Different Paper/Covers options

Size is:
The Size is: setting is a drop-down menu that lists all of the supported media sizes.
You can specify size for all the settings in the Paper Options group box. You must use the same size
of media for the entire print job. That is, if the print job uses Letter-size media, any option that you select
from the available Use Different Paper options must also use Letter-size media.
NOTE Certain software programs can override the size command and specify different media
sizes within a single document.
For the Other Pages and Back Cover settings, you can select a source (tray) and media type that differ
from the settings selected for First Page. If a conflict exists among media source, media size, and/or
media type, and you choose to keep the conflicting settings, the settings are processed in the following
order: media size, media type, and then media source.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally
best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such
as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE When you use a software program with a media-size setting, you can specify different
media sizes within a single document by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options. For
more information, see Use Different Paper/Covers options.
For information about media sizes, see the Media types and sizes section of this guide.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

To create a custom paper size, click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or
Printers and Faxes (Windows XP or Windows Server 2003). Click the File menu, click Server
Properties, and then select the Create a new form check box. Specify a name and dimensions for your
paper size, and then click the Save Form button. This new paper size will be included in any list of paper
sizes in the driver and application tabs. The print dialogs for various software programs also often have
settings that allow you to create custom paper sizes.
Use Different Paper/Covers check box
When the Use Different Paper check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is:,
Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options. For more information, see Use
Different Paper/Covers check box.
Source Is: drop-down menu
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the Device
Settings tab also appear here.

■

Automatically select

■

Printer Auto Select

■

Manual Feed in Tray 1

■

Tray 1 (125-sheet multipurpose tray)

■

Tray 2 (250-sheet tray; optional for the HP Color LaserJet 2820 and HP Color LaserJet 2830 all-inone products)

The default setting is Automatically Select. When this setting is selected, the printer uses the source
tray that supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than
Automatically select, make sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For information about media sources, see the Media types and sizes section of this guide.
Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
series printer supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default
media type, which is usually Plain.
The following standard paper types appear in the lists.
Table 3-1 Standard paper types and engine speeds
Paper type

Engine speed

Plain

Full

Preprinted

Full

Letterhead

Full

Transparency

Black and white: full
Color: 1/4 speed

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:

Table 3-1 Standard paper types and engine speeds (continued)
Paper type

Engine speed

Prepunched

Full

Labels

1/2 speed

Bond

Full

Recycled

Full

Color

Full

Light (< 70 g/m2)

Full

Heavy (91 to 105 g/m2)

Full

Cardstock (106 to 163 g/m2)

1/2 speed

Gloss (75 to 105 g/m2)

Full

Heavy Gloss (106 to 163 g/m2)

Black and white: 1/2 speed
Color: 1/4 speed

Tough Paper (Gloss Film)

1/2 speed

Envelope

1/2 speed

Windows HP unidriver
features

The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure the correct media type is loaded in the tray that you selected in the Source is: setting.
For more information about media types, see the Media types and sizes section of this guide.
Use Different Paper/Covers options
You can print books that include different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with associated options:
■

Front Cover

■

First Page

■

Other Pages

■

Last Page

■

Back Cover

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

To configure the Use Different Paper/Covers options for a print job
For each option, you can set a different tray using the Source Is: drop-down menu. For some options,
the Type is: drop-down menu is also available.
1

To use different paper or cover stock, select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. A list of
options appears in the dialog box. The full set of selections is visible when you use the down arrow
button to the right of the list to scroll.

To use different media for the pages within the print job, select the appropriate option (Front Cover,
First Page, Other Pages, Last Page, or Back Cover) in the dialog box. A check mark appears to
the left of the option when you change a setting using the Source is: or Type is: drop-down menus.

Click OK to print.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All options that you select
from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options use the size selected in the First
Page settings.

Windows HP unidriver
features

When you change the type and source of the paper and covers, the settings you select remain
configured until you close the application software.
Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections, in the
order they appear in the pane below the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Front Cover and Back Cover options
Use these options to include a blank or preprinted front cover or back cover on a document.
The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options. These options are the same for
the Back Cover setting.

Figure 3-7 Front Cover setting

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

The Front Cover and Back Cover options are as follows:
■

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

■

Source is: drop-down menu

■

Type is: drop-down menu

When you select Front Cover or Back Cover, you must also select the Add a Blank or Preprinted
Cover check box to enable the setting. When you select this check box, the Source is: and Type is:
drop-down menus become available and a check mark appears next to the Back Cover option.
NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Layout setting is enabled
on the Finishing tab. For two-page-per-sheet (2-up) booklet printing, you can obtain a cover by
selecting different media for the first page only. The back cover setting is unavailable, because
this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see
the Source Is: drop-down menu section of this chapter.

Windows HP unidriver
features

The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is: drop-down
menu section of this chapter.
First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options
Use these options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page, other pages, or
last page of a document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group
box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.

Figure 3-8 First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options
The First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options are as follows:

■

Size is: drop-down menu

■

Source is: drop-down menu

■

Type is: drop-down menu

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.
Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of the Finishing, Effects, Paper/Quality,
and Color tabs.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the image.
Effects tab features

Windows HP unidriver
features

Use the Effects tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks. The following
illustration shows the Effects tab.

Figure 3-9 Effects tab
The Effects tab contains the following controls:

ENWW

■

Print Task Quick Sets group box

■

Resizing Options group box

■

Document preview image

■

Watermarks group box

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that are found
on all other Printing Preferences driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined
printing specifications, such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Print Task
Quick Sets in the Paper/Quality tab section of this guide.
Resizing options group box
The Resizing Options group box consists of the following controls:
■

Actual Size (default)

■

Print Document On setting

■

Scale to Fit option

■

% of Normal Size setting

Actual Size setting
Actual Size is the default setting. It prints the document without changing the document size.

Windows HP unidriver
features

Print Document On setting
Select the Print Document On option button to format the document for one paper size and then print
the document on a different paper size, with or without scaling the image to fit the new paper size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■

The % of Normal Size value is not 100.

■

The Pages per Sheet value (on the Finishing tab) is not 1.

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. The list contains all of the standard media sizes that are supported by the selected media source
and any custom sizes that you have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is
automatically selected.
Scale to Fit option
The Scale to Fit option box specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the
target paper size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting
is turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size
on the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document image
is clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper. The following illustration shows
preview images for a document that is formatted for legal-size paper and where the Print Document
On check box is selected, and the target size is specified as Letter.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Figure 3-10 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the
target page size.

The % of Normal Size option provides a slider bar to use for scaling the percentage setting. The default
setting in the entry box is 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the paper size that is selected
within the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the software program does
not negotiate the paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and
sends it to the product.
The limits of the range are from 25% to 400%, and any values outside the range are adjusted to those
limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the Tab key is pressed or another
control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the scroll bar indicator
is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the scroll bar arrows
increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the scroll bar indicator at the default Windows resolution;
use the scroll bar indicator to approximate the appropriate value, and then use the scroll bar arrows to
refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
■

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is selected

■

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1

Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality, Finishing, Effects and Color tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

% of Normal Size option

to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the
document preview image.
Watermarks group box
Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or
edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:
■

(none)

■

Confidential

■

Draft

■

SAMPLE

The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system,
plus the string "(none)", which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any
watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When the First Page Only check box is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the
document. The First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is "(none)".

Windows HP unidriver
features

Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to "4" and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.

Figure 3-11 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Click OK to accept all of the changes that are made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However,
clicking Cancel does not cancel all of the changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select
a different watermark or click New, all of the changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and
only the current, unsaved changes can be canceled.
Current watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created.
To create a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list
and in the Watermark Message edit box as "Untitled" until you name it. The name that you type in the
Watermark Message field appears in the Current Watermarks group box in the Watermark Details
dialog box and in the Watermarks group box on the Effects tab.
To name the new watermark, type the selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box.
To delete a watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete. A warning
appears asking whether you are sure you want to delete the selected item. Click Cancel if you want to
keep the watermark. Click OK to delete the selected watermark.

To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different typeface or font size. When
this occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2).
When a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then
the number increases until the name is unique (Draft #3, Draft #4, and so on).
Message angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in different orientations in
relation to the page's text. The settings are Diagonal, Horizontal, or Angle (custom). The default is
Diagonal. All three settings automatically center the watermark string within the page; the selection of
a particular setting affects only the angle of the string placement.Diagonal places the text along a line
that spans the lower-left to upper-right corners of the page.Horizontal places the text along a line that
spans the mid-left and mid-right edges of the page. Angle places the text at the specified angle across
the page.
Font attributes
Use the controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the shading, size, and style
of the font.
The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:

ENWW

■

Name drop-down menu

■

Color drop-down menu

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When you reach the limit of 30 watermarks, the New button is disabled. The (none) setting is
one of the 30 definable watermarks; you can customize names for the other 29 watermarks.

■

Shading drop-down menu

■

Size spin box

■

Style drop-down menu

Name
The Name drop-down menu lists fonts that are currently installed on the system. The default is languagedependent.
Color
The Color drop-down menu provides a fixed, unalterable set of color choices, in palette/color namepair form, for the watermark. The triplet values for these colors are shown in the following table.
Table 3-2 Watermark color values

Windows HP unidriver
features

Setting

Gray

Red

Yellow

Green

Cyan

Blue

Magenta

Lightest

255

232

255

232

255

232

255

232

2552

255

224

255

224

255

224

255

224

255

192

255

192

255

192

255

192

255

160

255

160

255

160

255

160

255

128

255

128

255

128

255

128

255

Very Light

Light

Med Light

Medium

Med Dark

Dark

Very Dark

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Table 3-2 Watermark color values (continued)
Setting

Gray

Red

Yellow

Green

Cyan

Blue

Magenta

255

32
Darkest

Shading

■

Lightest

■

Very Light (default)

■

Light

■

Medium Light

■

Medium

■

Medium Dark

■

Dark

■

Very Dark

■

Darkest

Windows HP unidriver
features

The default Shading setting for new and preset watermarks is Very Light. The following range of shades
is available from the Shading drop-down menu.

These values represent the intensity of the gray that is used. A choice of Light produces a lightly
saturated gray watermark. A choice of Lightest produces the lightest shade of watermark; Darkest
produces a black watermark.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down
menu.
Style
The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down menu. The
default Style setting for new and preset watermarks is Regular.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 80 points, and
Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Very Light shading, and
Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and varies.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows
the Finishing tab.

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-12 Finishing tab - HP PCL 6 Unidriver
The Finishing tab contains the following controls:
■

Print Task Quick Sets group box

■

Document Options group box

■

Document preview image

■

Orientation group box

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Document Options
The Document Options group box contains the following controls.
■

Correct Order for Straight Paper Path

■

Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

Flip Pages Up option (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

Booklet Layout drop-down menu (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

Pages per Sheet drop-down menu

■

Print Page Borders check box

■

Page Order drop-down menu

Correct Order for Straight Paper Path check box

Print on Both Sides (Manually) check box
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides (Manually) option is off (not selected). Selecting Print
on Both Sides (Manually) makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options available.
Manually printing on both sides
Follow these steps to manually print on both sides.
1

Print all the even-numbered pages in your document. Some software programs have a selection in
the Print dialog box that you can use to specify printing even or odd pages.

If your finished document has an odd number of pages, add a blank page to the bottom of the stack
of even-numbered pages (behind the last even-numbered page).

Open the print driver and click the Paper/Quality tab. Click Manual Feed from Tray 1 from the
Source is: drop-down menu.

For the second half of the job, place the printed side face-down for tray 1 or face-up for tray 2.

Flip Pages Up
Select the Flip Pages Up check box, which is enabled only when Print on Both Sides is selected, to
specify the duplex-binding option. By default, the Flip Pages Up check box is not selected. The following
table demonstrates the results of selecting this box, depending on the paper orientation that you select
on the Finishing tab.
Table 3-3 Page orientation
Orientation (Finishing tab)

ENWW

Flip Pages Up selected

Flip Pages Up not selected

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

When you print on heavier media such as cardstock, select the Correct Order for Straight Paper
Path check box to minimize curl and avoid paper jams. Open the back cover on the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 to allow the paper to exit the product in a straight path. For best results, feed
the media into the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 from tray 1.

Table 3-3 Page orientation (continued)
Orientation (Finishing tab)

Flip Pages Up selected

Flip Pages Up not selected

Portrait

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Landscape

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

When Print on Both Sides is selected, the document preview image changes to show a spiral binding
along either the left edge or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears in the
lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing occurs on the back side. An arrow on
the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound together.
Short-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by flipping over like the pages of a calendar.
Long-side binding is for print jobs with pages that read by turning like the pages of a book.
Booklet layout
The Booklet Layout drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides is selected, offers choices
that are based on the current paper size. The default setting for the Booklet Printing drop-down menu
is Off.

Windows HP unidriver
features

■

Left Edge Binding

■

Right Edge Binding

When you select Left Edge Binding or Right Edge Binding, the document preview image changes to
show the location of the binding. If the Pages per Sheet setting is on the default setting of 1, it
automatically changes to 2 pages per sheet. If you change the Pages per Sheet setting manually to
4, 6, 9, or 16 pages per sheet, the booklet setting is disabled. See the Printing a Booklet section of this
chapter for more information.
The Booklet Layout setting is disabled when A6 or B6 (JIS) is selected as the media size, and an
incompatibility error message appears when you click OK to close the driver.
Book and booklet printing
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one supports book and booklet printing.
A book is a print job consisting of at least two pages that can have a different media type for the front
cover, first page, other pages, last page, or back cover. Use the Front Cover, First Page, Other Pages,
Last Page, and Back Cover settings on the Paper/Quality tab (available when you select the Use
Different Paper/Covers check box) to select different media for these pages.
A booklet is a print job that places two pages on each side of a sheet that can be folded into a booklet
that is half the size of the media type. Use the Booklet Layout drop-down menu on the Finishing tab
to control booklet settings.
Printing a Booklet
Complete the following steps to print a booklet.

Click File, click Print, and then click Properties.

Click the Finishing tab and select the Print on Both Sides check box.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

In the Booklet Layout drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing that you want (for
example, Right Edge Binding).

Click OK in the print driver.

Click OK in the Print dialog box to print.

Printing a book
You can print a book in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover are
printed on different media types. For more information, see the Paper/Quality tab features section of
this chapter.
Pages per Sheet

■

1 page per sheet (this is the default)

■

2 pages per sheet

■

4 pages per sheet

■

6 pages per sheet

■

9 pages per sheet

■

16 pages per sheet
NOTE When you select an option other than 2 pages per sheet, booklet printing is unavailable.

Print Page Borders
Related controls indented beneath the Pages per Sheet edit box are Print Page Borders and Page
Order, which become active when Pages per Sheet is greater than 1.
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
Page Order
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:

ENWW

■

Right, then Down

■

Down, then Right

■

Left, then Down

■

Down, then Left

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

Use the Pages per Sheet option to select the number of pages that you want to print on a single sheet
of media. If you choose to print more than one page per sheet, the pages appear smaller and are
arranged on the sheet in the order that they would otherwise be printed. The Pages per Sheet dropdown menu provides six settings:

The preview document image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following illustration.

Figure 3-13 Page-order preview images
■

2 pages per sheet

■

4 pages per sheet

■

6 pages per sheet

■

9 pages per sheet

■

16 pages per sheet

Windows HP unidriver
features

Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn image of a page that represents graphics and text. The
document preview image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The
document preview image appears in the upper-right corner of most Printing Preferences driver tabs
(the Paper/Quality, Effects, Finishing, and Color tabs).
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the document preview image.
When you move the mouse over the document preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow
to a gloved hand. You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking the
document preview image.
Orientation group box
The Orientation group box contains the following options:
■

Portrait option button

■

Landscape option button

■

Rotate 180 degrees check box

Portrait option button
Select this feature to print your document in Portrait orientation. This is the default setting.
Landscape option button
Select this feature to print your document in Landscape orientation.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Rotate by 180 degrees check box
Select this feature to rotate the document image on the paper 180°. For example: If the return address
on an envelope is smudged, try using this setting and feed the envelope so that the return address area
is fed into the product first.
Color tab
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and
half-toning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following
illustration.

Windows HP unidriver
features

NOTE The Color tab does not appear in the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (Black and White) version.

Figure 3-14 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following controls:

ENWW

■

Print Task Quick Sets group box

■

Color Options group box

■

CMYK Inkset Emulation group box (HP PS Emulation Unidriver only)

■

Document preview image

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Print Task Quick Sets
The Print Task Quick Sets control is available on each Printing Preference tab, and is used to store
the current combination of driver settings found on all of the other tabs.Print Task Quick Sets are either
preset or user-defined printing specifications, such as paper size and pagers per sheet. For more
information, see Print Task Quick Sets in the Paper/Quality tab section of this guide.
Color options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the print
job color rendering and print quality. The Color Options group box contains the following controls:
■

Automatic option (default)

■

Manual option

■

Settings button (opens the Color Settingsdialog box)

■

Print in Grayscalecheck box

Automatic color settings

Windows HP unidriver
features

Use the Automatic option for default coloration settings that automatically fine-tune your color printer
output. The HP Automatic default color settings provide high-quality output for most color printing
needs.
Manual color settings
To change the default coloration settings, select the Manual option, and then click the Settings button.
The Color Settings dialog box appears.
To change the settings, make your selections using the drop-down menus in the Color Settings dialog
box, and then click OK. The following illustration shows the Color Settings dialog box:

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-15 Color Settings dialog box
The Color Settings dialog box gives you independent control of the following settings:
■

Text

■

Graphics

■

Photographs

■

General

Text, Graphics, and Photographs sections
Use these sections to adjust the Neutral Grays setting for each control.
Neutral Grays
The Neutral Grays drop-down menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is
embedded in the printer firmware. The options are Black Only or 4-Color. You can adjust the Neutral
Grays setting independently for Text, Graphics, or Photographs.

ENWW

■

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and black) by using only black toner. This
option guarantees that neutral colors do not have a color cast. Black Only is the default setting for
the Text and Graphics components.

■

4-Color. This option generates neutral colors by combining all four colors of toner, which produces
smoother gradients and transitions to non-neutral colors. It also produces the darkest possible black.
4-Color is the default setting for Photographs.

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

General
Use the General setting group to control the Edge Control, Halftone, and RGB settings for all color
printing.
Edge Control
Edge Control determines how edges are rendered. Edge Control consists of these components:
Adaptive Halftoning and Trapping. Adaptive Halftoning increases the edge sharpness. Trapping reduces
the effect of color-plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects.
The Edge Control option offers four settings:
■

Off. The Off setting turns off Trapping and Adaptive Halftoning.

■

Light. The Light setting provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On .

■

Normal. The Normal setting provides the default trapping settings. Adaptive Halftoning is set to
On.

■

Maximum. The Maximum setting provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.

Halftone

Windows HP unidriver
features

■

Smooth. This option provides better results for large, solid-filled print areas. It also enhances
photographs by smoothing out fine color gradations. Select this option for uniform and smooth area
fills.
■

Cyan - 134 lines per inch (lpi)

■

Magenta - 134 lpi

■

Yellow - 150 lpi

■

Black - 141 lpi

Detail. This option is useful for text and graphics that require sharp distinctions among lines or
colors, or for images that contain a pattern or high level of detail. Select this option for sharp edges
and detail.
■

Cyan - 166 lpi

■

Magenta - 166 lpi

■

Yellow - 150 lpi

■

Black - 166 lpi

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

RGB Color
The RGB Color settings affect the color treatment for object types and determines how colors are
rendered. The options are Default (sRGB), Vivid, and Device.
■

Default (sRGB). This option interprets RGB color space (sRGB), which is the accepted standard
for many software companies and organizations such as Microsoft and the World Wide Web
Consortium. Default (sRGB) is the default setting for all components.

■

Vivid. This option sets the printer to increase the color saturation in the midtones. Less colorful
objects are rendered more colorfully. This value is recommended for printing business graphics.
NOTE This setting uses the SRGB color table for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
product.

■

Device. This option sets the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render photographs
correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program in which you
are working or in the operating system.

Print in Grayscale
Select Print in Grayscale to print a color document in black and white. This option is useful for
previewing preliminary copies of slides and hardcopy output quickly or for color documents that will be
photocopied or faxed.

Printer Properties tab set
The printer Properties tab set contain information about and options for configuring the printer. To gain
access to the printer Properties tabs, click Start on the Windows task bar, click Settings, and then click
Printers for Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes for Windows XP. Right-click the printer name, and
then click Properties.
The following HP print driver tabs are included in the printer Properties tab set.
■

Device Settings tab features

■

About tab features
NOTE Windows also has tabs in the printer Properties tab set. For information about those
tabs, see the documentation that came with your computer.

Device Settings
The Device Settings tab contains controls for media-handling devices and controls for managing the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one.
Various options are available on the Device Settings tab depending on whether you are using the
HP PCL 6 Unidriver or the PS Emulation Unidriver. The following illustrations show the Device
Settings tab for each of these drivers.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

NOTE If your software program converts text and graphics to raster, the Photographs settings
also control the Text and Graphics settings.

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-16 Device Settings tab - HP PCL 6 Unidriver

Figure 3-17 Device Settings tab - PS Emulation Unidriver

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

The Device Settings tab contains the following controls:
■

Form to Tray Assignment options

■

Font Substitution Table options

■

External Fonts option (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)

■

Installable Options options

Form to Tray Assignment
A network administrator can use Form to Tray Assignment to specify the media size in each input tray.

Network administrators can use the Form to Tray Assignment setting to specify, in the driver, the
media size that is loaded into each available input tray. The use of forms constrains the choices that
are available in the media-size list on the Advanced tab in the Printing Preferences driver tab set.
This constraint prevents (or reduces the likelihood of) tying up the printer with paper-mount messages
that occur when users request sizes or types that are not available.
The trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting include standard trays and optional accessory
trays. Generally, items that are installed separately have a separate Installable Options setting. For
example, for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, tray 2 is listed in both the Form to Tray
Assignment setting and the Installable Options setting.
The input trays listed in the Form to Tray Assignment setting are also listed as media sources on the
Paper/Quality tab.
Configuring the trays
1

Select the appropriate tray in the Form to Tray Assignment list.

Use the drop-down menu to select the media size (form) that is loaded in that tray.

Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the remaining trays.

Click OK to enable your settings, or, if necessary, click the Cancel button to reconfigure all the trays,
and remove the size and type constraints that you have specified on the Paper/Quality tab.

Font Substitution Table
Clicking this option opens the Font Substitution Table and makes available the options for changing
the TrueType-to-PostScript font mapping. The following illustration shows the Device Settings tab with
the Font Substitution Table open.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one supports more than one source of media. You can
assign a form (which defines the media size and margins) to each of your printer media sources. When
a form is matched to a source, you can select the form when you print. The printer prints from the tray
to which that form is assigned.

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-18 Font Substitution Table
External Fonts (HP PCL 6 Unidriver only)
Use the External Fonts option to install and remove external fonts for the printer. External fonts can be
soft fonts or DIMM fonts.
Clicking the External Fonts option causes the Properties button to appear. Clicking the Properties
button opens the Font Installer dialog box, which is shown in the following illustration.

Figure 3-19 Font Installer dialog box

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Installing external fonts

Click Start, click Settings, click Printers in Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes in Windows XP,
right-click the name of the printer, and then click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

Click the Properties button. The Font Installer dialog box appears.

Type the name and path of the font metric file in the Printer Font File Location text box, or click
Browse to locate the file on your computer. The font file names appear in the Font(s) to be
Added window.

Select the fonts that you want to add, and then click Add. The fonts are installed and the file names
appear in the Installed Font(s) window.

Click OK to close the Font Installer dialog box.

Removing external fonts
1

Click Start, click Settings, click Printers in Windows 2000 or Printers and Faxes in Windows XP,
right-click the name of the printer, and then click Properties.

Click the Device Settings tab.

Click the External Fonts option. The Properties button appears.

Click the Properties button. The Font Installer dialog box appears.

The external fonts that are installed appear in the Installed Fonts window. Select the fonts that you
want to remove, and then click Remove. The fonts are removed.

Click OK to close the Font Installer dialog box.

Installable Options
This section provides information to configure the printing options that you can install for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. The following controls are available:

ENWW

■

Tray 2

■

Allow Manual Duplexing

■

Printer Memory

■

PostScript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

Follow these steps to install external fonts.

Tray 2
This control specifies whether you have an additional 250-sheet Tray 2 installed on your printer. The
default setting is Not Installed. In order to use Tray 2, you must change this setting to Installed.
Allow Manual Duplexing
Use this setting to allow printing on both sides of a page using manual two-sided printing.
Printer Memory
This option matches the setting to the amount of memory that is installed in the printer. The driver
generates ranges of memory that can be selected, up to the maximum that the printer can accept. The
driver can use this information to manage how the print driver uses the printer memory.
PostScript Passthrough (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
PostScript Passthrough is enabled by default, and must be enabled for most print jobs. This option
provides additional capabilities for some software programs when printing to a PostScript driver.

Windows HP unidriver
features

Options such as watermarks, n-up printing, and booklet printing might not print correctly from some
software programs when PostScript Passthrough is enabled because such programs send PostScript
information to the printer that the driver cannot control. Other software programs might print using these
options without problems.
If you encounter problems while printing, select Disabled and print your document again. In some cases,
disabling PostScript Passthrough might cause unexpected behavior in the software program.
Additional Device Settings options (PS Emulation Unidriver only)
In addition to these options, the Device Settings tab for the PS Emulation Unidriver also includes the
following options.

■

Available PostScript Memory options

■

Output Protocol options

■

Send CTRL-D Before Each Job options

■

Send CTRL-D After Each Job options

■

Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray options

■

Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray options

■

Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts options

■

Job Timeout options

■

Wait Timeout options

■

Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline options

■

Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline options

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Available PostScript Memory
This option specifies the amount of available PS memory and provides a spin box for changing this
value. The available PS memory is a subset of the printer's total physical memory. The default PS
memory setting for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one is 2048 KB. It is usually best to
set the PS memory to match what is shown on the configuration page. To print a configuration page
from the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one control panel, follow these steps:
1

At the product control panel, press MENU.

Press the < or > button to scroll to Reports and press ENTER.

Press the < or > button to scroll to Config Report and press ENTER.

Output Protocol
This option specifies the protocol that the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one uses for print
jobs. The following options are available.
■

ASCII (default)

■

TBCP

■

Binary

Windows HP unidriver
features

When you click ASCII, data is sent in ASCII format (7-bit), which might take longer to print but can be
sent through any I/O channel, such as a USB or network port.
When you click TBCP (Tagged Binary Communications Protocol), all data except special control
characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The binary formats can be sent over USB or serial
communications ports at a faster rate than by sending data in ASCII format.
When you click Binary, all data except special control characters is sent in binary (8-bit) format. The
binary formats can be sent over USB communications ports at a faster rate than by sending data in
ASCII format.
Send CTRL-D Before Each Job
This option specifies whether the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one will be reset at the
beginning of every .PS document. The default setting is No. Ctrl-D resets the printer to its default setting
to ensure that previous print jobs do not affect the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail
if the printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a printer
connected through a USB port, change No to Yes.
Send CTRL-D After Each Job
This option specifies whether the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one will be reset at the end
of every .PS document. The default setting is Yes. Ctrl-D resets the printer to its default setting to ensure
that future print jobs are not affected by the current print job. Ctrl-D might cause a print job to fail if the
printer is connected through a network. If your document fails to print when sent to a network printer,
change Yes to No.
Convert Gray Text to PostScript Gray
This option specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in text to the gray that the
PS Emulation Unidriver provides. The default setting is No.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Convert Gray Graphics to PostScript Gray
This option specifies whether to convert the true gray (RGB value) in graphics to the gray that the
PS Emulation Unidriver provides. The default setting is No.
Add Euro Currency Symbol to PostScript Fonts
This option specifies whether to augment the device fonts with the euro character. The default setting
is Yes.
Job Timeout
This option specifies how long the document can take to get from the computer to the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one before the printer stops trying to print the document. If you specify
0 seconds, the printer continues trying to print indefinitely. The default setting is 0 seconds. You can
use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Wait Timeout

Windows HP unidriver
features

This option specifies how long the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one waits to get more PS
information from the computer. After the specified time passes, the printer stops trying to print the
document and prints an error message. If you are trying to print a very complicated document, you might
want to increase this value. If you specify 0 seconds, the printer waits indefinitely. The default setting
is 300 seconds. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 seconds.
Minimum Font Size to Download as Outline
This option specifies the minimum font size (in pixels) for which the HP PCL 6 Unidriver downloads
TrueType fonts as outline (Type 1) fonts. A font smaller than the minimum setting is downloaded as a
bitmap (Type 3) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font
Download option on the Advanced tab on the Printing Preferences tab set. The default setting is 100
pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
Maximum Font Size to Download as Outline
This option specifies the maximum font size (in pixels) for which the HP PCL 6 Unidriver will download
TrueType fonts as bitmap (Type 3) fonts. A font larger than the maximum setting will be downloaded as
an outline (Type 1) font. Use this option to fine-tune the Automatic setting for the TrueType Font
Download option on the Advanced tab on the Printing Preferences tab set. The default setting is 600
pixels. You can use the spin box to change this value to a maximum of 32,767 pixels.
About tab features
The About tab provides detailed information about the driver. It contains an overall build number (in
parentheses after the model name) along with specific information about each of the components. The
information varies according to the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one model number, driver,
date, and version numbers. The About tab is shown in the following illustration.

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

The About tab lists driver installation file names and their version numbers. The About tab also indicates
whether the driver was autoconfigured, whether administrator preferences were set, the date the driver
was last configured, and whether the configuration is default or user-defined.

ENWW

HP PCL 6 and PS emulation unidriver features (for Windows 2000 and Windows XP)

Windows HP unidriver
features

Figure 3-20 About tab

Windows HP unidriver
features
98

Chapter 3

Windows HP unidriver features

ENWW

Windows HP traditional driver features

This chapter includes the following information.
●

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

●

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

Windows HP traditional
driver features

NOTE A PCL 5e driver is not included on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 printingsystem software CD. However, the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver is supported through the printer
firmware.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE
and Windows Me)
This section describes the options available on each tab of the HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver interface.
The following information is included.
●

Help system

●

Finishing tab features

●

Effects tab features

●

Paper tab features

●

Basics tab features

●

Color tab features

●

Configure tab features
NOTE The black and white PCL 6 print driver, which is installed automatically when you select
a Typical Installation in Windows 2000 or Windows XP, is not available in Windows 98 SE,
Windows Me, or Windows NT 4.0.

Help system
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver includes a full-featured
Help system to provide assistance with printing and configuration options. The following Help options
are available.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

■

What's this? Help

■

Context-sensitive Help

■

Constraint messages

■

Bubble Help

What's this? Help
"What's this?" Help is supported in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me. You can gain access to "What's
this?" Help messages in any of the following ways:
■

Right-click a control and click What's this?, and a pop-up Help window appears.

■

Press the F1 key, and the Help window for the currently selected control appears.

Context-sensitive Help
Press the Help button on a driver tab or in a dialog box, and context-sensitive Help appears.

100

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Constraint messages
Constraint messages are unsolicited messages that appear in response to specific actions you take.
These messages alert you to selections that are illogical or impossible given the capabilities of the
product or the current settings of other controls. For example, if you click Print on Both Sides and then
change the paper type to Transparency, a message appears asking you to resolve this conflict.

Figure 4-1 A typical constraint message
Whenever a constraint message appears with OK or Cancel buttons, the interpretation of the buttons
is as follows:
■

Clicking OK accepts the change that was just made, and the driver then resets the conflicting control
to a setting that is compatible with the new value.

■

Clicking Cancel rejects the change that was just made, returning the control to its previous value.

Bubble Help

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Bubble Help features a graphical icon resembling a cartoon speech bubble with a small i in it,
representing the international symbol for information. The following illustration shows Bubble Help icons
on a driver tab.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

101

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-2 A property page with a Bubble Help icon
The bubble typically appears next to a disabled control, although it can also accompany an enabled
control if there is an important note concerning its use. Moving the pointer over the bubble changes the
arrow to a gloved hand, which indicates that the area underneath the pointer is selectable. When the
bubble is selected by using either the mouse or the keyboard, a message box appears with a brief
explanation about why the control is disabled and what can be done to enable it. If the control is not
disabled, the message is a tip or a precaution to be aware of when using that particular feature.
The following table lists Bubble Help messages and the conditions that cause them to appear.
Table 4-1 Bubble Help messages
Condition/Cause

Effect

Message

Finishing tab:

To use this feature, set Pages per
Sheet to 1 (see Finishing tab).

The Pages per Sheetsetting is greater
than 1

Booklet Printing is not available if Print
on Both Sides check box is selected.

Finishing tab:

Effects tab:

To use this feature, set Pages per
Sheet to 1 (see Finishing tab).

Print Document On is not available.

102

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Table 4-1 Bubble Help messages (continued)
Condition/Cause

Effect

Message

Finishing tab:

Effects tab:

To use this feature, set Pages per
Sheet to 1 (see Finishing tab).

The Pages per Sheetsetting is greater
than 1

% of Normal Size is not available.

Finishing tab:

The Booklet Printing setting is On.

Pages per Sheet is not available.

Finishing tab:

Effects tab:

The Booklet Printing setting is On.

Print Document On is not available.

Finishing tab:

Effects tab:

The Booklet Printing setting is On.

% of Normal Size is not available.

Effects tab:

The Print Document On check box is
selected.

% of Normal Size is not available.

Effects tab:

Finishing tab:

The Print Document On check box is
selected.

Pages per Sheet is not available.

Effects tab:

The % of Normal Size setting is any
value except 100%.

Print Document On is not available.

Effects tab:

Finishing tab:

The % of Normal Size setting is any
value except 100%.

Booklet Printing is not available.

Effects tab:

Finishing tab:

The % of Normal Size setting is any
value except 100%.

Pages per Sheet is not available.

Paper tab:

Finishing tab:

The Type Is setting is Transparency,
Labels, or Envelope.

The Bubble Help points to the Print on
Both Sides check box.

Paper tab:

Finishing tab:

The Size Is setting is anything except
Letter, Legal, or A4.

The Bubble Help points to the Booklet
Printing drop-down menu, which is not
available.

Paper tab:

The Source Is tray selected for Other
Pages is the same as the one selected
for First Page.

The Bubble Help points to Type Is dropdown menu.

Effects tab:

Watermarks exceed 30.

The Bubble Help points to Watermarks.

The Pages per Sheetsetting is greater
than 1

ENWW

To use this feature, set the Booklet
Printing option to Off (see Finishing
tab).
To use this feature, set the Booklet
Printing option to Off (see Finishing
tab).
To use this feature, set the Booklet
Printing option to Off (see Finishing
tab).
To use this feature, turn off the Print
Document On option (see Effects tab).

To use this feature, turn off the Print
Document On option (see Effects tab).

To use this feature, set % of Normal
Size to 100 (see Effects tab ).

This feature is not available with the
currently selected paper type (see
Paper tab).
To use this feature, set the paper size to
Letter, Legal, or A4 (see Paper tab).

In order to use this feature, select a
source tray different from the tray that
you selected for the first page.

You cannot add a new watermark
because the list is full. You can edit

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

103

Windows HP traditional
driver features

To use this feature, set % of Normal
Size to 100 (see Effects tab ).

Table 4-1 Bubble Help messages (continued)
Condition/Cause

Effect

Message
existing watermarks, or you can delete
one or more to make more room.

Finishing tab:

Paper tab, Back Cover option:

The Booklet Printing option is not set to
Off.

The Bubble Help points to the No back
Cover option button.

To use this feature, set the Booklet
Printing option to Off (see Finishing
tab).

Finishing tab features
Use the Finishing tab to print booklets and control the media output. The following illustration shows
the Finishing tab.

Windows HP traditional
driver features
Figure 4-3 Finishing tab - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

104

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

The Finishing tab contains the following options.
■

Print Task Quick Sets

■

Document Options

■

Document preview image

■

Print Quality

Print Task Quick Sets
This group box appears on each of the print driver tabs.Print Task Quick Sets are either preset or userdefined printing specifications (such as paper size, pages per sheet, and so on).
Default Print Settings
The default setting is Default Print Settings. Other settings are User Guide Print Settings and Type
new Quick Set name here. When Defaults is selected, nearly all settings are restored to the
combination that existed after the driver was installed. However, if the attribute combinations that are
associated with watermark definitions, custom paper sizes, or the User Guide Print Settings quick set
have been changed or deleted, the original settings are not restored.
Default Print Settings appears automatically if no other driver settings have been changed since the
driver was installed, or if all driver settings match the original settings. Otherwise, the setting in the Print
Task Quick Sets menu will be the same label that appeared when you last closed the printing
Properties dialog box by clicking OK.
User Guide Print Settings
This setting provides a quick set for optimal printing of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User
Guide.

When you change any of the default settings on the Finishing tab or any of the other tabs, the name
in the Print Task Quick Set drop-down menu dynamically changes to Type new Quick Set name
here. If you want to save this configuration as a quick set, highlight the word Type new Quick Set name
here, type the name you want for your new quick set, and then click Save. Print Task Quick Sets are
saved in the system registry.
To delete a quick set, select it from the drop-down menu and click Delete.
You can store a maximum of ten user-defined Print Task Quick Sets on a particular system. If you
attempt to save too many, a message box appears: There are too many Print Task Quick Sets
defined. Please delete some before adding new ones.
NOTE Do not save more than 10 Print Task Quit Sets. The print driver, when closed and reopened, might not retain any of the new Print Task Quick Sets that you saved.

Document Options
Use the Document Options group box, shown in the following illustration, to select options for printing
on both sides and for changing the number of pages that are printed on each sheet.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

105

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Custom Print Task Quick Sets

Figure 4-4 Document Options group box
The Document Options group box contains the following controls.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

■

Correct Order for Straight Paper Path.

■

Print on Both Sides (Manually). This setting is available only when the Allow Manual
Duplexing check box on the Configure tab is selected. The Allow Manual Duplexing check box
is selected by default.

■

Flip Pages Up

■

Booklet Printing

■

Pages per Sheet

■

Print Page Borders

■

Page Order

Correct Order for Straight Paper Path
Select Correct Order for Straight Paper Path to send print jobs to the rear output bin rather than to
the top output bin. (Make sure the rear output door is open.) This setting reverses the order of pages to
maintain proper page sequence. See the product user guide for additional settings that might need to
be made on the product.
Print on Both Sides (Manually)
The default setting for the Print on Both Sides (Manually) option is not selected. Print on Both Sides
(Manually) is not available in the following configuration:
■

Type is is set to Envelope, Transparency, or Labels

Clicking Print on Both Sides (Manually) makes the Flip Pages Up and Booklet Printing options
available. In the default setting, neither of these options is selected.

106

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Manually printing on both sides
To manually print on both sides of the paper, you must send the paper through the printer twice. You
can print by using the media output bin or the straight-through output path. HP recommends that you
use the media output bin for lightweight paper and use the straight-through output path for any heavy
media or media that curls excessively when printed.
Follow these steps to print on both sides manually:
1

Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of these ways.
●

For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side down, and the bottom edge leading into
the printer first.

●

For optional tray 2, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, and the top edge toward
the back of the tray.

in the print driver, select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) option and send the job to print.

After the job finishes printing, remove any blank paper from tray 1. Insert the printed stack, with the
blank side up, and the top edge leading into the printer. Print the second side from tray 1.

Press ENTER to continue printing.
NOTE The PS Emulation Driver does not support manual duplexing. For Mac OS 9, you must
perform a custom driver installation and select the plug-in for manual duplexing. Mac OS X does
not support manual duplexing.

Flip Pages Up

Table 4-2 Page orientation
Orientation (Basics tab)

Flip Pages Up selected

Flip Pages Up not selected

Portrait

Short-edge binding

Long-edge binding

Landscape

Long-edge binding

Short-edge binding

When Print on Both Sides (Manually) is selected, the document preview image changes to show a
spiral binding along either the left or the top edge of the page. In addition, a folded-over corner appears
in the lower-right portion of the preview image, indicating that printing will occur on the back side. An
arrow on the folded-over corner points in the direction that the pages would be flipped if they were bound
together.
Manually printing on both sides
To manually print on both sides of the paper, you must send the paper through the printer twice. You
can print by using the media output bin or the straight-through output path. HP recommends that you

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

107

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Flip Pages Up check box, enabled only when Print on Both Sides (Manually) is selected, is used
to specify the duplex-binding option. The following table demonstrates the results of selecting this box,
depending upon the paper orientation selected on the Basics tab.

use the media output bin for lightweight paper and use the straight-through output path for any heavy
media or media that curls excessively when printed.
Follow these steps to print on both sides manually:
1

Insert enough paper into one of the trays to accommodate the print job. If you are loading special
paper such as letterhead, load it in one of these ways.
●

For tray 1, load the letterhead paper with the front side down, and the bottom edge leading into
the printer first.

●

For optional tray 2, load the letterhead paper with the front side up, and the top edge toward
the back of the tray.

in the print driver, select the Print on Both Sides (Manually) option and send the job to print.

After the job finishes printing, remove any blank paper from tray 1. Insert the printed stack, with the
blank side up, and the top edge leading into the printer. Print the second side from tray 1.

Booklet Printing
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu, visible when Print on Both Sides (Manually) is selected, offers
five choices, two of which are based on the current paper size. The list contains the items with the
following structure:

Windows HP traditional
driver features

■

Off

■

[paper size] (Left Binding)

■

[paper size] (Right Binding)

where [paper size] depends on the paper size set on the Paper tab. The following table shows the
appropriate entries in the Booklet Printing drop-down menu for each selected paper size.
Table 4-3 Selected paper size
Paper size selected

Entries in Booklet Printing Drop-down
menu

Letter

Off
Letter (Left Binding)
Letter (Right Binding)
Letter (Left Binding)
Letter (Right Binding)

Legal

108

Chapter 4

Off

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Table 4-3 Selected paper size (continued)
Paper size selected

Entries in Booklet Printing Drop-down
menu
Legal (Left Binding)
Legal (Right Binding)

Off
A4 (Left Binding)
A4 (Right Binding)

Booklet printing is disabled when the following paper sizes are selected: Executive, A5, and B5, and
envelopes and postcards of any size.
The Booklet Printing drop-down menu appears only when the following conditions exist:
■

Print on Both Sides (Manually) is selected.

■

% of Normal Size (on the Effects tab) is 100.

■

Pages per Sheet is 1.

■

Size Is (on the Paper tab) is set to Letter, Legal, or A4.

■

Print Document On (on the Effects tab) is not selected.

If any except the first of these conditions is not met, a Bubble Help appears next to Booklet Printing
to tell you why it is disabled.
Activating booklet printing

In the software program, click File, click Print, and then click Properties.

Click the Finishing tab.

Select Print on Both Sides (Manually)
.

In the Booklet Printing drop-down menu, select the type of booklet printing you want. The booklet
printing type consists of the media size and the location of the binding (for example, Letter (Left
binding))..

Click OK in the print driver.

Click OK in the software program print dialog box to print.

Printing a booklet cover
You can print a booklet in which the front cover, first page, other pages, last page, and back cover have
different media types. For more information, see Use Different Paper/Covers options in the Paper tab
features section of this chapter.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

109

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Complete the following steps to print a booklet in most software programs.

Pages per Sheet
The Pages per Sheet drop-down menu provides six settings: 1 (default), 2, 4, 6, 9, and 16. If you type
another value into the box (for example, 3), the control will round the value to the nearest valid value (in
this example, 4).
Print Page Borders sets a line around each page image on a printed sheet to help visually define the
borders of each logical page.
The Page Order drop-down menu contains four selections:
■

Right, then Down

■

Down, then Right

■

Left, then Down

■

Down, then Left

The document preview image changes to reflect alterations in these settings, as shown by the examples
in the following illustration.

Figure 4-5 Page-order preview images

Windows HP traditional
driver features

2 pages per sheet

4 pages per sheet

6 pages per sheet

9 pages per sheet

16 pages per sheet

Document preview image
The preview image is a line-drawn color image of a page that represents graphics and text. The image
is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The document preview image
appears in the upper-right corner of all properties tabs except for the Configure tab.
Switching between tabs does not change the location or appearance of the preview image. When you
move the mouse over the preview image, the mouse cursor changes from an arrow to a gloved hand.
You can toggle between portrait and landscape page orientation by clicking on the image.
The light-yellow dimensions label that appears below the preview image indicates the selected page
size. The horizontal dimension is always first, so the order of the numbers reverses when the orientation
changes. Click on the label to toggle between English and metric units.

110

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Print Quality
The Print Quality group box provides options that control resolution, graphics settings, and font settings.
The group box includes the following options:
■

Default

■

Custom

The Print Quality group box also includes a Details button. Clicking this button opens the Print Quality
Details dialog box, which provides options for various print-quality settings.
The following illustration shows default Print Quality Details settings for the HP Traditional
PCL 6 Driver.

Figure 4-6 Print Quality Details dialog box - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver

For the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver, the Current
Setting group box contains one of the following options, depending on the selection of the Print
Quality group box on the Finishing tab (Default or Custom):
■

This is the “Default” setting

■

This is a “Custom” setting

Graphics Settings group box
The Raster Compression settings on the Graphics Settings group box support adaptive compression
modes for Joint Photographic Experts Group (JPEG) data. The following settings are available:

ENWW

■

Automatic (default). When this setting is used, the print driver determines and applies the best
compression method.

■

Best Quality. This setting forces the driver to use a compression method that results in no loss of
data.

■

Maximum Compression. Where applicable, this setting requires the print driver to use JPEG
compression. Selecting this option increases the print speed performance, but does decrease the
image quality.

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

111

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Current Setting

Output Settings group box
The Output Settings group box contains the following options:
■

Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG). Select the Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG) This feature is implemented
to address the moiré effect created when certain software programs encounter certain patterns. Use
this feature to turn off the pattern scaling. What you lose is WYSIWYG with patterns, but the printed
result might look better. The feature works only with programs that use vector hatch patterns. This
option is on by default.

■

Print all Text as Black. The Print all Text as Black check box is not selected, by default. When
selected, this option causes the driver to print all text as black regardless of the original document
text color. By design, however, white text remains white, as a fail-safe method of printing reverse
typeface against a dark background. This setting does not affect graphic images on the page. The
Print all Text as Black check box remains selected only for the current print job.

Font Settings group box
In the Font Settings group box, the only available option is Send TrueType as Bitmaps, which provides
a safety net for software programs that cannot easily use TrueType fonts for special graphic purposes,
such as shading, rotation, or slanting.

Effects tab features
Use the Effects tab to create unique paper effects such as scaling and watermarks.

Windows HP traditional
driver features
112

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-7 Effects tab - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Effects tab contains the following options:
■

Print Task Quick Sets

■

Document preview image

■

Fit To Page

■

Watermarks

Print Task Quick Sets
Use Print Task Quick Sets to store the current combination of driver settings . Print Task Quick Sets
are either preset by network-administrator settings or user-defined printing specifications (such as media
size, pages per sheet, and so on). For more information, see Print Task Quick Sets in the Finishing tab
section of this chapter.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

113

Document preview image
The document preview image is a line-drawn color image of a page that represents graphics and text.
The image is always oriented so that the contents of the page are right-side-up. The preview image
appears in the upper-right corner of all properties tabs except for the Configure tab. For more
information, see the Document preview image section in the Finishing tab featuressection of this chapter.

Fit To Page
The Fit to Page group box includes features that scale the image on the page, either by specifying a
numeric percentage or by specifying a scale change to a different paper size. TheFit to Page setting
handles scale transformations.
Print Document On
Use Print Document On to format the document for one paper size and then print the document on a
different paper size, with or without scaling the page image to fit the new paper size.
The Print Document On control is disabled by either of the following conditions:
■

Percent of Normal Size is not 100.

■

Pages per Sheet (on the Finishing tab) is not 1

When Print Document On is selected, the drop-down menu shows the media sizes on which you can
print. If the currently selected media source is manual, auto, or any tray, the list contains all standard
media sizes that the selected media source supports. The list also contains any custom sizes that you
have created. When Print Document On is selected, Scale to Fit is automatically selected.
Scale to Fit

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Scale to Fit option specifies whether each formatted document page image is scaled to fit the target
paper size. By default, Scale to Fit is selected when Print Document On is selected. If the setting is
turned off, then the document page images will not be scaled, and are instead centered at full size on
the target paper. If the document size is larger than the target paper size, then the document image is
clipped. If it is smaller, then it is centered within the target paper. The following illustration shows preview
images for a document that is formatted for Legal paper, and where the Print Document On check box
is selected and the target size specified as Letter.

Figure 4-8 Preview images - Legal on Letter; Scale to Fit off (left) and on (right)
When the size for which the document is formatted (that is, the logical size) differs from the target size,
the preview image uses a dashed gray line to show the boundaries of the logical page in relation to the
target page size.

114

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

% of Normal Size
The % of Normal Size setting provides a slider bar for scaling the percentage setting. The default setting
in the entry box is 100, or 100% of normal size. Normal size is defined as the paper size selected within
the driver or what the driver receives from the software program (if the program does not negotiate the
paper size with the driver). The driver scales the page by the appropriate factor and send it to the printer.
The limits of the range are from 25 to 400, or 25% to 400% of normal size, and any values outside the
range are adjusted to those limits as soon as the focus is removed from the control (that is, when the
Tab key is pressed or another control is selected).
Any change to the scale also changes the page preview, which increases or decreases from the upperleft corner of the preview.
The slider bar controls the scale directly. The value in the edit box changes as the slider bar indicator
is dragged, and the preview image is updated to the new image scale. Each click on the slider bar arrows
increases or decreases the scale by 1%. Each click on the slider bar affects the scale by 10%.
You cannot achieve an exact value by dragging the slider bar indicator at the default Windows resolution;
use the slider bar indicator to approximate the appropriate value, and then use the slider bar arrows to
refine the value.
The following settings disable % of Normal Size:
■

Print Document On is selected

■

Pages per Sheet is not 1

■

Booklet Printing is ON

Watermarks

■

(none)

■

Confidential

■

Draft

■

SAMPLE

The drop-down menu shows alphabetically sorted watermarks that are currently available on the system,
plus the string (none), which indicates that no watermark is selected. This is the default setting. Any
watermark selected from this list appears in the preview image.
When First Page Only is selected, the watermark is printed only on the first page of the document. The
First Page Only check box is disabled when the current watermark selection is (none).
Watermarks are applied to logical pages. For example, when Pages per Sheet is set to 4 and First
Page Only is turned off, four watermarks appear on the physical page (one on each logical page).
Click Edit, and the Watermark Details dialog box appears.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

115

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Use the Watermarks feature to select a watermark, create your own custom watermarks (text only), or
edit an existing watermark. The following watermarks are preset in the driver:

Figure 4-9 Watermark Details dialog box
The dialog box shows a preview image and provides options for creating a new watermark and
controlling the message angle and font attributes.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Click OK to accept all changes made in the Watermark Details dialog box. However, clicking Cancel
does not cancel all changes. If you make changes to a watermark and then select a different watermark
or click New, all changes made to the previous watermark are saved, and only the current, unsaved
changes can be canceled.
Current Watermarks
The Current Watermarks group box contains a list of available watermarks, both predefined
watermarks that are available in the driver and any new watermarks that you have created. To create
a new watermark, click New. The new watermark appears in the Current Watermarks list and in the
Watermark Message edit box as Untitled until you name it. To name the new watermark, type the
selected watermark text in the Watermark Message edit box. To delete a watermark, select the
watermark in the Current Watermarks list and click Delete.
NOTE You can have no more that 30 watermarks in the Current Watermarks list at one time.
When the limit of 30 watermarks is reached, the New button is disabled, and a Bubble Help
appears that explains why the button is disabled and how to enable it. The (none) setting is one
of the 30 definable watermarks; you can customize names for the other 29 watermarks.

116

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

To edit an existing watermark, select the watermark in the Current Watermarks list. If you change the
Watermark Message for that watermark, you are, in effect, creating a new watermark.
Watermark Message
The Watermark Message is also the name that identifies the watermark in the Current Watermarks
list, except when more than one watermark has the same message. For example, you might want
several different watermarks with the message DRAFT, each with a different font or size. When this
occurs, the string is appended with a space, a pound sign, and a number (for example, Draft #2). When
a number is added, the number two is used first, but if the resulting name is also in the list, then the
number increases until the name is unique.
Message Angle
Use the controls in the Message Angle group box to print the watermark in a Diagonal, Horizontal, or
Angle (custom) orientation to the page's text. The default is Diagonal. All three settings automatically
center the watermark string within the page; the selection of a particular setting affects only the angle
of the string placement. Diagonal places the text along a line that spans the lower-left to upper-right
corners of the page.
Font Attributes
Use controls in the Font Attributes group box to change the font and the color, shading, size, and style
of the font.

■

Name drop-down menu

■

Color drop-down menu

■

Shading drop-down menu

■

Size spin box

■

Style drop-down menu

Name
The Name drop-down menu lists TrueType fonts that are currently installed on the system.
Color
The color selection combo box provides a fixed, unalterable set of color choices, in palette/color namepair form, for the watermark. The triplet values for these colors are shown in the following table.
Table 4-4 Watermark color values
Setting

Gray

Red

Yellow

Green

Cyan

Blue

Magenta

Lightest

255

232

255

232

255

232

255

232

2552

255

224

255

224

255

224

255

224

Very Light

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

117

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Font Attributes group box contains the following controls:

Table 4-4 Watermark color values (continued)
Setting

Gray

Red

Yellow

Green

Cyan

Blue

Magenta

224

255

192

255

192

255

192

255

192

255

160

255

160

255

160

255

160

255

128

255

128

255

128

255

128

255

224
Light

Med Light

Medium

Med Dark

Dark

Very Dark

Darkest

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Shading
The Shading values represent the intensity of the color selected in the Color attribute. The following
range of shades is available from the Shading drop-down menu:

118

■

Lightest

■

Very Light

■

Light

■

Medium Light

■

Medium

■

Medium Dark

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

■

Dark

■

Very Dark

■

Darkest

These values represent the intensity of the color selected in the Color attribute.
For example, a choice of Light plus Yellow (from the Color attribute) produces a lightly saturated yellow
watermark. Very Dark plus Yellow produces a strongly saturated, deep-yellow watermark. Likewise,
the various shading choices from Lightest to Darkest plus Gray produce shades of gray ranging from
white to black.
Size
Font sizes from 1 to 999 points are available from the Size menu. The default point size is languagedependent. The choice of Regular, Bold, Italic, and Bold Italic is available from the Style drop-down
menu.
Default settings
The default settings for new watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light shading, 150 points,
and Regular style. The default settings for preset watermarks are Arial font, Gray color, Very Light
shading, and Bold style. The default point size for preset watermarks is language-dependent, and
varies.

Paper tab features

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Use the Paper tab to specify the size, type, and source of the media, as well as to define a custom paper
size. If you want to, you can indicate different paper-selection choices for the first page and back cover
of the document.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

119

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-10 Paper tab - HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Paper tab contains the following options.
■

Print Task Quick Sets

■

Paper Options

■

Document preview image

■

Printer image

Print Task Quick Sets
Use the Print Task Quick Sets control to store the current combination of driver settings that are found
on all other driver tabs. Print task quick sets are either preset or user-defined printing specifications,
such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Print Task Quick Sets in the
Finishing tab section of this guide.

120

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Paper Options group box
The settings specified in the Paper Options group box on the Paper tab apply to all of the pages of the
document. The following illustration shows the Paper Options group box and the selections that are
available by default.

Figure 4-11 Paper Options group box

●

Size is:

●

Custom Paper Size

●

Use Different Paper/Covers check box

●

Use Different Paper/Covers options

●

Source Is: drop-down menu

●

Type is: drop-down menu

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

121

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The appearance of the Paper Options group box changes when the Use Different Paper/Covers
check box is selected. In this section of this guide, the settings in the Paper Options group box are
described below in the following order:

media type, and you choose to keep the conflicting settings, the settings are processed in the following
order: media size, media type, and then media source.
Because driver settings are overridden by media-size settings in most software programs, it is generally
best to use the driver to set media size only for software programs that lack a media-size setting, such
as NotePad, or when you are producing a book or a booklet that does not require different media sizes.
NOTE When you use a software program with a media-size setting, you can specify different
media sizes within a single document by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options. For
more information, see the Size is: section of this chapter.
For information about media sizes, see the Media types and sizes section of this guide.
Custom Paper Size
The Custom Paper Size dialog box appears when you click the Custom button on the Paper tab. The
following illustration shows the initial appearance of the Custom Paper Size dialog box.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-12 Custom Paper Size dialog box
When the Custom Paper Size dialog box appears, the drop-down menu in the Name group contains
one of two things, depending upon the current paper size selection in the Paper tab:
■

If the paper size selection is a previously defined custom size, then the drop-down menu contains
the name of that custom size.

■

If the paper size selection is a standard paper size, then the drop-down menu shows the default
name Untitled for a custom paper size.
NOTE Two names for the same size media can coexist (for example, "big" and "BIG" can both
be used as names for custom-size paper measuring 213.4 mm x 279.4 mm (8.4 inches x 11
inches).

122

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

The new name is compared only against the list of user-defined custom paper-size names, and not
against the standard paper-size names.
The complete set of titles for this button and the specific characteristics that determine its title and
capabilities are discussed in the Dynamic command buttondynamic command button section of this
guide.
Name drop-down menu
The Name drop-down menu shows the name of the most recently last selected custom paper size. Use
the Name drop-down menu to type new names for custom paper sizes and to select from the list of
currently defined custom paper sizes.
The name that appears in the Name drop-down menu is one of three things, depending upon the
following conditions.
■

If a saved custom paper size has been selected from the drop-down menu and the other controls
in the dialog box have not been changed since then, the Name drop-down menu shows the name
of the most recently selected custom paper size.

■

If the width or height controls have been changed since a custom size was selected or saved, or if
a saved paper size has just been deleted, then the Name drop-down menu shows the default name
of Untitled.

■

If a new name has been typed into the Name drop-down menu for the purpose of saving a new size
or renaming an existing size, then the new name will remain in the drop-down menu display until a
saved custom paper size has been selected from that menu.

If you type a new name into the Name drop-down menu, but then do not click the Save button, you
should be able to change the width and height values without losing the name. However, if a saved
paper-size name is selected from the drop-down menu, any unsaved name or size values are lost
without warning and are replaced by the values of the selected custom paper size.

The button located to the right of the Name drop-down menu has three possible labels: Save, Delete,
and Rename.

ENWW

■

Save is the button title whenever the height and width values have been changed since the last
save or since the selection of an existing custom paper size. Clicking the button causes the name
in the Name drop-down menu to be compared against each of the saved names. If a duplicate is
found, a dialog box appears, asking if it is okay to replace the existing item. If you click Yes, then
the old item is updated with the new values. If you click No, then the driver returns to the Custom
Paper Size dialog box, where you can type a different name. The new name is compared only
against the list of user-defined custom paper names, and not against the standard paper-size
names. Whenever the command button has the Save title, it is the default button.

■

Delete is the button title whenever the name of an existing (previously saved) custom paper size
appears in the Name drop-down menu, such as immediately after selecting an item from the dropdown menu or clicking the Save button. Clicking the Delete button causes the saved custom paper
size to be deleted, after which the Name drop-down menu changes to Untitled, the height and width
controls are unchanged, and the button title changes to Save.

■

Rename is the button title when you type something into the Name drop-down menu after selecting
an existing custom paper size from the drop-down menu. If no duplicate is found, then the name of
the stored custom paper size changes to match the contents of the Name drop-down menu.
Whenever the command button has the Rename title, it is also the default button.

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

123

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Dynamic command button

The following table illustrates the relationships between the Name drop-down menu, the command
button, and the actions that take users from one state to another.
State

Drop-down menu
contents

Button label

Action

Next state

Untitled

Save

Click Save.

Type something into
the Name drop-down
menu.

Change the width or
height values.

Select a saved item
from the drop-down
menu.

Click Save.

Type something into
the Name drop-down
menu.

Change the width or
height values.

Select a saved item
from the drop-down
menu.

Click Delete.

Type something into
the Name drop-down
menu.

Change the width or
height values.

Select a saved item
from the drop-down
menu.

Click Rename (when
the name is unique).

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Save

Delete

Rename

Click Rename (when
the name is unique).
Type something into
the Name drop-down
menu.
Change the width or
height values.
Select a saved item
from the drop-down
menu.

124

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Width and height controls
The width and height values can be changed either by typing numeric strings into the edit boxes or by
selecting the up and down arrows.
Any entry that is greater than the maximum limits of the width and height control is rounded down to the
maximum valid entry, while any entry that is smaller than the minimum limits of the width and height
control is rounded up to the minimum valid entry. See the Custom width and height control limits section
of this guide.
If units are in millimeters, then the custom paper-size range minimum is the limit rounded up to the
nearest whole millimeter. The custom paper-size range maximum is the limit rounded down to the
nearest whole millimeter. Any non-numerical entry reverts to the last valid entry. Width and height entries
are validated when the focus has changed.
The resolution of each control is one millimeter or one-tenth of an inch, depending upon the current
measurement units. Clicking the up and down arrows increases or decreases the current value by the
increment amount (within the allowed range of values). The computer determines the rate at which the
values change.
Unit indicator labels change dynamically to indicate inches or millimeters, depending upon the
measurement units the driver is currently using. To change measurement units, click the Measurement
Units button.
Custom width and height control limits
The minimum paper size for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 series printer is 76 mm x 127 mm
(5.0 inches x 5.0 inches) and the maximum is 216 mm x 356 mm (8.5 inches x 14.0 inches). The following
table summarizes paper size limits for each paper-handling device.

Tray

Dimensions

Minimum

Maximum

Tray 1 (multipurpose)

Width

76 mm (3 inches)

216 mm (8.5 inches)

Height

127 mm (5 inches)

356 mm (14 inches)

Width

76 mm (3 inches)

216 mm (8.5 inches)

Height

127 mm (5 inches)

356 mm (14 inches)

Width

76 mm (3 inches)

216 mm (8.5 inches)

Height

127 mm (5 inches)

356 mm (14 inches)

Tray 2 (500-sheet)

ADF unit

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Table 4-5 Custom media sizes

Paper and envelope icons
The paper and envelope icons visually define width and height.
Measurement Units button
Like the dynamic command button for saving, deleting, and renaming custom paper sizes, the title of
the measurement-units button changes. Use it to toggle the unit of measurement between standard
(inches) and metric (millimeters) units of measurement. The button titles are:

ENWW

■

Use Millimeters

■

Use Inches

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

125

Close button
The Close button closes the Custom Paper Size dialog box according to the logic described in the
following table. In all cases, any custom paper sizes successfully saved (and not renamed or deleted)
while the dialog box is open will remain in the paper-size list on the Paper tab. The following table lists
options that appear when you click the Close button.
Table 4-6 Close dialog box text strings
If the drop-down menu contains ...

And the button says ...

Then this happens when the Close
button is clicked

Untitled

Save

The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same
as it was when you clicked the Custom
button.

Save

The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same
as it was when you clicked the Custom
button.

Delete

The dialog box closes, and the current
paper size is set to what last appeared in
the drop-down menu.

Rename

The dialog box closes, but you lose the
changes that were not saved.
The current paper size remains the same
as it was when you clicked the Custom
button.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Use Different Paper/Covers check box
When the Use Different Paper check box is selected and different options are configured, the Size is:,
Source is:, and Type is: menus change, offering a variety of options.
Use Different Paper/Covers options
You can print books with different media types by using the Use Different Paper/Covers options.
When you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box, the following settings can appear in the
group box, along with their associated options:

126

■

Front Cover

■

First Page

■

Other Pages

■

Last Page

■

Back Cover

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

To use Use Different Paper/Covers options, you must configure the setting for the print job. Each option
for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the sections that follow this procedure. Use
the following instructions to configure the setting.
To configure the Use Different Paper/Covers options for a print job
For each option, you can set a different tray by using the Source Is: drop-down menu. For some options,
the Type is: drop-down menu is also available.
1

To use different paper or cover stock, select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box. A list of
options appears in the dialog box. The full set of selections is visible when you scroll using the down
arrow button to the right of the list.

Click OK to print.
NOTE You must use the same size of media for the entire print job. All options that you select
from the available Use Different Paper/Covers options use the size that you selected in the
First Page settings.
When you change the type and source of the paper and covers, the settings you select remain
configured until you close the application software.

Each option for the Use Different Paper/Covers setting is described in the following sections, in the
order they appear in the pane below the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.
Front Cover and Back Cover options

The following illustration shows the Front Cover setting and options. These options are the same for
the Back Cover setting.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

127

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Use these options to include a blank or preprinted front cover or back cover on a document.

Figure 4-13 Front Cover setting
The Front Cover and Back Cover options are as follows:
■

Add a Blank or Preprinted Cover check box

■

Source is: drop-down menu

■

Type is: drop-down menu

Windows HP traditional
driver features

NOTE The Back Cover options are not available when the Booklet Layout setting is enabled
on the Finishing tab. For two-page-per-sheet (2-up) booklet printing, you can obtain a cover by
selecting different media for the first page only. The back cover setting is unavailable, because
this page would otherwise be printed in the middle of a booklet.
The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for adding a back cover to the document. The
list of source trays depends on the printer accessories. Any optional media trays that are installed
through the Configure tab also appear here. For more information about the Source is: setting, see
the Source Is: drop-down menu section of this chapter.
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all of the media types that the printer supports. For more
information about the Type is: drop-down menu settings, see the Type is: in the Type is: drop-down
menu section of this chapter.
First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options
Use these options to select an alternative media size, type, or source for the first page, other pages, or
last page of a document. The following illustration shows the appearance of the Paper Options group
box when you select the Use Different Paper/Covers check box.

128

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Figure 4-14 First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options
The First Page, Other Pages, and Last Page options are as follows:
■

Size is: drop-down menu

■

Source is: drop-down menu

■

Type is: drop-down menu

The Size is: driver setting for the first page applies to the entire print job. When this is set, the setting
becomes unavailable for all the other Use Different Paper/Covers options.

The Source is: setting specifies the source tray to use for printing a document. The list of source trays
depends on the printer accessories. Any optional source trays that are installed through the
Configure tab also appear here.
The Source is: drop-down menu can contain the following options:
■

Auto select

■

Manual Feed in Tray 1

■

Tray 1 (125-sheet multipurpose tray)

■

Tray 2 (250-sheet tray; optional for the HP Color LaserJet 2820 and HP Color LaserJet 2830)

The default setting is Auto select. When this setting is selected, the printer uses the source tray that
supports the media size that you have selected. If you select a source tray other than Auto select, make
sure that the correct media size is loaded in the source tray.
For information about media sources, see the Media attributes section of this guide.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

129

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Source Is: drop-down menu

Type is: drop-down menu
The Type is: drop-down menu shows all the paper types that the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
all-in-one supports. When you use the default setting, Unspecified, the printer uses the default media
type, which is usually Plain.
No mechanism exists for manually adding custom media types through the driver. Custom types can
be added only by using the bidirectional communication mechanism, so they must already exist in the
printer when the bidirectional query occurs. If bidirectional communication is enabled, then the
information returned is an updated list of media types. If bidirectional communication is not enabled,
then the driver looks for custom media types saved from a previous bidirectional communication query,
and uses those. Otherwise, no custom media types are available through the driver.
The following standard paper types appear in the lists.
Table 4-7 Standard paper types and engine speeds

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Paper type

Engine speed

Plain

Full

Preprinted

Full

Letterhead

Full

Transparency

1/4 speed

Prepunched

Full

Labels

1/2 speed

Bond

Full

Recycled

Full

Color

Full

Cardstock (106 to 163 g/m2 or 43 to 53 lb.)

1/2 speed

Heavy (91 to 105 g/m2)

Full

Envelope

Full

Glossy (75 to 105 g/m2)

1/2 speed

Light (< 70 g/m2)

Full

Heavy Glossy (106 to 163 g/m2)

1/4 speed

Tough Paper

1/2 speed

The default setting is Unspecified, and the program selects the media type. If you select a different
setting, make sure that the correct media type is loaded in the tray you selected in the Source is: setting.
For more information about media types, see the Media types and sizes section of this guide.

130

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab screen represents the current physical
configuration of the printer according to the driver configuration data (obtained automatically through
bidirectional communication, or configured manually through the driver). It should have the same
appearance as the image in the same location on the Configure tab.
On the Paper tab, the printer image contains hot spots for selecting a media source. When the pointer
moves over a hot spot, the arrow reverts to the gloved hand used in the Bubble Help, the preview image,
and other areas. The current media source is highlighted in a bright green color on the printer bitmap.

Basics tab features

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Basics tab provides options for setting the number of copies to be printed and for the orientation
of the print job. It also lets you retrieve information about the driver.

Figure 4-15 Basics tab – HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver
The Basics tab contains the following options:
●

ENWW

Print Task Quick Sets

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

131

●

Copies

●

Orientation

●

Document preview image

●

About

Copies
Use the Copies group box to specify the number of copies to print.
The number of copies you request appears in the Copies box. You can select the number by typing in
the box or by using the up and down arrows to the right of the edit box. Valid entries are numbers from
1 to 999. The copies value will not advance from the maximum number (999) to 1 when the up arrow is
used, or change from 1 to the maximum number (999) when the down arrow is used. Invalid entries into
the edit box (such as non-numerical input, numbers less than 1 or greater than the maximum allowed)
change to the last valid value that appeared in the box when you click another group box or leave the
Basics tab. The default number of copies is 1.
Because you can set the desired number of copies that you want from some software programs, conflicts
can arise between the software program and the driver. In most cases, the software program and the
driver communicate, so that the number of copies set in one location (such as the software program)
will appear in the other (such as the driver). For some programs, this communication does not happen,
and the Copies values are treated independently. For these programs, setting 10 copies in the program
and then setting 10 copies in the driver will result in 100 copies (10 x 10) being printed. It is recommended
to set the number of copies in the software program, wherever possible.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Orientation
Orientation refers to the layout of the image on the page, and does not affect the manner in which
media feeds into the printer. You can specify the orientation of the print job.
You can toggle between portrait and landscape orientation by left-clicking the preview image. If you
select Rotate by 180 degrees, no change is evident in the preview image.
The Orientation group box contains the following options:
■

Portrait option button

■

Landscape option button

■

Rotate 180 degrees check box

Portrait
Select this option to print your document in Portrait orientation. This is the default setting.

132

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Landscape
Select this option to print your document in Landscape orientation.
Rotate by 180 degrees
Select the Rotate by 180 degrees check box to rotate the document image on the paper 180°. For
example: If the return address on an envelope is smudged, try using this setting and feed the envelope
so that the return address area is fed into the printer first.

About

Windows HP traditional
driver features

By clicking the About button on the Basics tab or the HP logo on any of the driver property pages, the
About box appears. To close the About box, click OK, press Esc, press Alt + F4, or press Enter. The
following figure shows the About box. The information varies according to HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one model number, driver, date, and version numbers.

Figure 4-16 About This Driver dialog box

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

133

Color tab features
Use the Color tab to specify predefined color-option settings or to fine-tune the color treatments and
half-toning. Color output can also be converted to grayscale. The Color tab is shown in the following
illustration.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-17 Color tab
The Color tab contains the following options:
●

Print Task Quick Sets

●

Color Options

●

Manual Color Options

●

Document preview image

134

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

such as paper size and pages per sheet. For more information, see Print Task Quick Sets in the
Finishing tab section in this chapter.

Color Options
Use the Color Options group box to adjust the independent color controls. The settings affect the color
rendering and print quality.
To use default coloration settings, click the Automatic option button. To change the default coloration
settings, click the Manual option button and then click the Settings button. To convert color information
to grayscale and print the document in black and shades of gray, select the Print in Grayscale check
box.

Manual Color Options

Windows HP traditional
driver features

When you click the Settings option button, the Manual Color Options dialog box appears. The default
settings are shown in the following illustration. To change the settings, make your selections from the
drop-down menus in the Manual Color Options dialog box, and then click OK. You are then prompted
to save your selections as a Custom setting.

Figure 4-18 Manual Color Options dialog box
The Manual Color Options dialog box gives you independent control of neutral grays and halftone for
the three major page components: text, graphics, and photographs. The Neutral Grays drop-down

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

135

menu controls the selection of a device-dependent color table that is embedded in the printer firmware.
The options are Black Only or 4-Color.
■

Black Only. This option generates neutral colors (grays and blacks) by using only black toner which
ensures that neutral colors do not have a color cast.

■

The Halftone setting controls the selection of a device-dependent halftone algorithm that is embedded
in the printer firmware. The Halftone options, Smooth and Detail, affect the resolution and clarity of
your color output. You cannot independently adjust halftone settings for text, graphics, and photos. For
example, if you select the Smooth setting for Text, you also set Photos and Graphics to Smooth.
■

■

Cyan – 134 lines per inch (lpi)

■

Magenta – 134 lpi

■

Yellow – 150 lpi

■

Black – 141 lpi

Cyan – 166 lpi

■

Magenta – 166 lpi

■

Yellow – 150 lpi

■

Black – 166 lpi

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Color Options settings are Edge Control and RGB Color. Edge Control, which determines how
edges are rendered, consists of two components: adaptive halftoning and trapping. Adaptive halftoning
increases the edge sharpness of text and graphics while maintaining the quality of area fills. Trapping
reduces the effect of color-plane misregistration by slightly overlapping the edges of adjacent objects.
The following options are available:

136

■

Off, which sets Trapping and Adaptive Halftoning to Off.

■

Light, which provides minimal trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.

■

Normal, which provides the default Trapping setting. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.

■

Maximum, which provides the most trapping. Adaptive Halftoning is set to On.

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

RGB Color settings affect the color treatment for all objects and determines how colors are rendered.
The options are Default (sRGB), Vivid, and Device.
■

Default. This option interprets RGB color as standard default RGB color space (sRGB), which is
the accepted standard for many software companies and organizations, such as Microsoft and the
World Wide Web Consortium.

■

Device (sRGB). This option sets the printer to print RGB data in raw device mode. To render
photographs correctly when this option is selected, you must manage color in the software program
in which you are working or in the operating system.
NOTE Note: If your software program converts text and graphics to raster, the Photographs
settings also control the Text and Graphics settings.

Configure tab features
The Configure tab is available when you click Properties and open the Printers folder. When you open
the driver from within a software program, the Configure tab is not visible, with a few exceptions, such
as when using Excel 5.0 or Corel® Chart 4.0. When opened from the Printers folder, the Configure
tab looks like the following illustration.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

137

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Use the Configure tab to tell the driver about the product hardware configuration.

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-19 Configure tab
The printer image in the lower-right portion of the Configure tab represents the current physical
configuration of the product and corresponds to its configuration data, which is either obtained
automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually. It should look the same as
the image that appears in the same location on the Paper tab. For more information, see Paper tab
features.
The Configure tab contains the following options:
●

Paper-handling options

●

Other Options

●

Printer image

Paper-handling options
The Paper Handling Options group box provides options for configuring most of the paper-handling
device features.

138

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

For the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, the following paper-handling options are
available.
■

Allow Manual Duplexing (selected by default)

■

Allow Scaling from Large Paper (cleared by default)

Optional Paper Sources
The Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu lists optional media sources for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. The list of available media sources varies, depending on your
product, its input accessories, and the product configuration settings on the Configure tab.
For the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, two optional media sources are available. The
settings in the Optional Paper Sources drop-down menu are as follow:
■

(None) (the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 2820 and 2830 models)

■

HP 250-Sheet Paper Tray (the default setting for the HP Color LaserJet 2840 model)

Other Options

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Other Options group box contains a single More button. Clicking the More button opens the More
Configuration Options dialog box.

Figure 4-20 More Configuration Options dialog box
The More Configuration Options dialog box contains the following options:

ENWW

■

Fonts group box

■

Printer Memory group box

■

Include Types in Application Source List selection
HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

139

Fonts
The Fonts group box contains a Font DIMM check box and a corresponding Configure button.
Selecting the Font DIMM check box tells the driver that a Font DIMM is installed, and that stored data
about the fonts on the DIMM is available. When the check box is selected, the Configure button is
enabled. Click the Configure button to open the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box. If the Font
DIMM check box was not selected when you opened the More Configuration Options dialog box,
selecting that check box automatically opens the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box.

Figure 4-21 Configure Font DIMMs dialog box

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Use the Configure Font DIMMs dialog box to perform the following tasks:
■

Add up to two font DIMMs by clicking the Add button.

■

Specify a unique font DIMM name.

■

Select specific font DIMM data files that contain lists of fonts on specified DIMMs.

■

Select one or more installed DIMMs in the Installed DIMMs list, and based on the selected DIMM
(s). The list to the right (Fonts on DIMM) will display all of the fonts available on the selected DIMM
(s).

■

Enable or disable one or more of the selected font(s).

Use the following procedure to configure a font DIMM:

140

Make sure that the font DIMM is correctly installed.

Click Add. The Add Font DIMM dialog box appears.

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Click Browse. The Font DIMM Files dialog box appears.

Find and select the appropriate Printer Cartridge Metrics (.PCM) file that came with the font DIMM.

Click Open.

If you want to, specify a Font DIMM Name in the Add Font DIMM dialog box.

Click OK. The selected printer cartridge metrics (.PCM) file appears in the Installed DIMMs list.
Select the .PCM file to see a list of available fonts in the Fonts on DIMM list.

Click OK to close the Add Font DIMM dialog box. The fonts on the DIMM should now be available
on the system.
NOTE To install screen fonts that match the font DIMM, use the .HPB file that is specifically
designed to work with that DIMM. If no screen fonts are available for the DIMM, use the .PCM
file that is specifically designed to work with that DIMM.

Printer Memory

■

Total Memory. This shows the total amount of memory that is physically installed in the printer.
Total Printer Memory updates after a successful bidirectional query.

■

Driver Work Space. Use the Driver Work Space (DWS) option to specify the amount of work-space
memory available to the printer. In environments that support bidirectional communication, this
option is configured automatically. To set DWS manually, print a configuration page and find the
DWS value in the Memory section of the configuration page. The DWS value might change if you
switch printer-model settings. Then, type that value in the DWS box in the More Configuration
Options dialog box. An accurate DWS value optimizes driver performance.

Include Types in Application Source List selection
When the Include Types in Applications Source List check box is selected, all paper types (such as
envelopes and transparencies) that are supported by the printer are available from a software program’s
paper source list in the Page Setup dialog.
When you are in a software program, you can open the Page Setup dialog by clicking the File menu,
and then clicking the Page Setup button.

Printer image
The bitmap image in the lower-right portion of the Paper tab screen represents the current physical
configuration of the product and corresponds to the driver configuration data, which is either obtained
automatically through bidirectional communication or configured manually through the driver. It should
have the same appearance as the image in the same location on the Paper tab. For more information,
see the Printer image section of this chapter.

ENWW

HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

141

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Printer Memory group box contains the following information:

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for
Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)
This section provides information about the features of the HP PS traditional driver. The following
information is provided:
●

HP postscript level 3 emulation support

●

Paper tab features

●

Graphics tab features

●

Device Options tab features

●

PostScript tab features

HP postscript level 3 emulation support
A set of 92 PS Level 3 soft fonts is included with the printing-system software. If you want to permanently
install the fonts in the printer, HP postscript level 3 emulation fonts are also available from HP in an
optional font DIMM. The HP postscript level 3 emulation maintains full compatibility with Adobe PS Level
3 when PS Level 3 soft fonts are purchased from Adobe.
Users of Adobe-licensed software might also have the right to use the Adobe PS level 3 print drivers
from Adobe with the HP LaserJet printer postscript level 3 emulation PPD, which is available on the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 printing-system software CD or from the HP Web site. When using
the Adobe PS Level 3 print driver, users must comply with all Adobe licensing agreements, as stated
on the Adobe Web site at www.adobe.com/support/downloads/license.html.

Paper tab features
Use the Paper tab options to make changes to your document layout, size, and orientation. The
Paper tab is shown in the following illustration.

Windows HP traditional
driver features
142

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Figure 4-22 Paper tab - HP PS traditional driver

●

Paper size

●

Layout

●

Orientation

●

Paper source

●

Copies

●

Custom button

●

Unprintable Area button

●

About button

●

Restore Defaults button

Windows HP traditional
driver features

The Paper tab contains controls for the following options:

Paper size
Displays the paper or envelope sizes supported by your printer. Click the size you want to use. If your
printer supports custom paper sizes, a Custom icon appears. Click the Custom icon, and then click
Custom to specify a paper size. A red circle with a line through one of the paper icons means that you
can choose that paper size, but there is a setting you must change before your printer can print on that
ENWW

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

143

size of paper. The setting may be in this dialog box, such as the Paper source setting, or it may be a
setting on the product.

Layout
Specifies how many pages of your document to print on one piece of paper. For example, 1 up prints
one page of your document per piece of paper; 2 up prints two pages on one piece of paper, dividing
the paper in half. This option is ignored if you print an EPS file.

Orientation
Determines how the document is positioned on the page. Click Portrait or Landscape to see an
example. In Landscape mode, you also have the option of rotating the image. Select the Rotated check
box to see an example. To see the current dimensions of the page (the paper size and the unprintable
margins), point to the page icon, and then press and hold down the mouse button.

Paper source
Specifies where the paper you want to use is located in the printer. Different printer models support
different paper sources, such as upper tray, envelope feed, mixed bins, and manual feed. If you click
AutoSelect Tray, the printer uses the paper tray that supports the paper size you have chosen.

Copies
Sets the number of copies you want printed. You can print from 1 to 999 copies. If you print an EPS file,
this option is ignored. Some software programs override this setting.

Custom button
Click the Custom button to specify a custom paper size. You can define up to three custom sizes at a
time, if your printer supports it. If this button is unavailable, click a custom paper icon in the Paper
size section.

Unprintable Area button

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Click the Unprintable Area button to view the page margins (the area of the page that is unavailable
for printing). If you change these settings, be sure to check your printer manual. Some printers have
built-in margins. If the built-in margins are greater than the margins you specify here, the text in your
document could be cut off.

About button
Click the About button to display copyright information.

Restore Defaults button
Click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings in this dialog box to their original values.

Graphics tab features
The Graphics tab contains controls for the following options:

144

●

Resolution

●

Color Control

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Halftoning

●

Special

●

Scaling

●

Restore Defaults button

Figure 4-23 Graphics tab

Resolution
Specifies the resolution you want for printing, in dots per inch (dpi). Higher-resolution settings produce
higher-quality printing; however, your documents may take longer to print. The resolutions available
depend on the product capabilities.

Color Control
Specifies whether you want the colors in your document to be adjusted before printing so that the printed
page more closely matches the colors you see on your screen. No Image Color Management
(faster) is selected by default.
If you choose to use this feature, select Use Image Color Management on the host (slower) and then
click the Choose Rendering Intent button to specify exactly how you want the colors adjusted.

ENWW

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

145

Windows HP traditional
driver features

●

Choose Rendering Intent button
Click the Choose Rendering Intent button to specify how you want your color images created to
produce the best-looking image on the printed page. If you are printing a chart or using fully saturated,
bright colors, it's best to click Saturation. For photographs or pictures where the colors blend together,
click Contrast. If your document has a color for which you need an exact match, and you are sending
the document to a printer that has that specific color of ink, click Colormetric.

Figure 4-24 Image Color Management dialog

Halftoning
Specifies values for the number of lines per inch (frequency) and angle of the pattern that you want to
use for halftone screens. If you are getting a moiré pattern when you print graphics such as photographs
or detailed images, you may want to adjust these settings. However, the default printer settings should
work in most cases. Do not change these settings unless you have experience using halftones. To return
to the default settings after you have made changes, click Use printer's settings.

Special

Windows HP traditional
driver features

■

Print as a negative image: Prints a negative of the image by complementing the RGB values or
reversing the black and white values. Click this option to see an example.

■

Print as a mirror image: Prints a mirror image of your document by reversing the horizontal
coordinates. Click this option to see an example.

Scaling
Specifies the size of the image to print. You can specify from 25 to 400, or 25% to 400% of normal size.
Print jobs at 400% produce an image four times larger than the original.

Restore Defaults button
Click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings in this dialog box to their original values.

Device Options tab features
The Device Options tab contains the following options:

146

●

Available printer memory (in KB)

●

Printer features

●

Installable options

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

●

Restore Defaults button

Figure 4-25 Device Options tab

Specifies the amount of memory in your printer. If the value here does not match the amount of memory
on your printer, you may need to change it if you have problems printing.

Printer features
Displays settings specific to your printer. You can change the settings by clicking the setting and then
specifying a new value in the Change Setting for list.

Installable options
Lists the options that you can install in your printer. For more information, see your printer manual.

Restore Defaults button
Click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings in this dialog box to their original values.

PostScript tab features
The PostScript tab contains the following options:

ENWW

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

147

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Available printer memory (in KB)

●

PostScript Output Format

●

PostScript header

●

PostScript error info

●

Advanced

●

Restore Defaults

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Figure 4-26 PostScript tab

PostScript Output Format
Specifies the format for PostScript files.
In general, use PostScript (optimize for speed) for printing a document.
To create a file that conforms to the Adobe Document Structuring Conventions (ADSC), click PostScript
(optimize for portability - ADSC). Each page of the document will be a fully self-contained object. This
is useful if you want to create the PostScript file and print it on a different printer.
If you want to include this file as an image in another document that will be printed from a different
program, click Encapsulated PostScript (EPS).
The Archive format creates a PostScript data stream that gets stored in a file that you can use later.
This does not take advantage of any printer device features.

148

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

If you have an HP printer that supports both PostScript and another printer language, you may need to
click PJL archive format. This notifies the printer that the document is being printed in a different printer
language.

PostScript header
Specifies whether to send header information to the printer each time you print a document.
If you print to a local printer, you can save printing time by sending the header information to your printer
only once. However, sending header information each time you print a document is sufficient for most
types of printing, and is especially recommended if you print to a shared network printer or to a file on
a disk.
This setting is ignored for EPS and Archive formats.

PostScript error info
Specifies whether to print PostScript error messages after your document has been printed. The
PostScript print driver can detect certain errors that Windows cannot. If you are having printing problems,
click this option. This information may help you, a system administrator, or a product-support
representative determine what caused the problem.
The error message information is not included in EPS format.

Advanced

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Click the Advanced button for advanced PostScript options:

ENWW

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

149

Figure 4-27 Advanced PostScript options
■

PostScript language level specifies which level of PostScript language to use. Some printers
support both level 1 and 2. If your printer supports level 2, it is probably best to use level 2.

■

Bitmap compression specifies whether to compress graphics before sending your document to
the printer. If you are using PostScript level 2, or if you are using PostScript level 1 and a printer
connected to a serial port, click Compress bitmap images. For PostScript level 1 and a printer
connected to a parallel port or a network printer, click No bitmap compression.

■

Data format
■

Windows HP traditional
driver features

ACSII data sends data in ASCII format (7-bit), which may take longer to print but can be sent
through any I/O channel, such as a serial, parallel, or network port.
If you select this option and you see a Send Mode button, click it to switch your printer to ASCII
for future print jobs.

150

■

Binary communication protocol sends all data except special control characters in binary (8bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and is faster
than sending data in ASCII format. If you select this option, click Send Mode to switch your
printer to Binary Communications Protocol (BCP) for future print jobs.

■

Tagged binary communications protocol sends all data except special control characters in
binary (8-bit) format. This format can be sent over parallel or serial communications ports and
is faster than sending data in ASCII format.

■

Pure binary data sends all data in pure binary format, which is the fastest format to print but
can be sent only over network cables or AppleTalk.

■

Send CTRL+D before job sends a CTRL+D to notify the printer that the current job has finished
printing and to reset the printer. If you are printing over a UNIX-based network, such as Banyan
VINES, AT&T StarGROUP, or Sun, you may need to clear these settings.

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

■

Send CTRL+D after job sends a CTRL+D to notify the printer that the current job has finished
printing and to reset the printer. If you are printing over a UNIX-based network, such as Banyan
VINES, AT&T StarGROUP, or Sun, you may need to clear these settings.

Restore Defaults

Windows HP traditional
driver features

Click the Restore Defaults button to restore the settings in this dialog box to their original values.

ENWW

Windows PS Emulation Driver features (for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me)

151

Windows HP traditional
driver features
152

Chapter 4

Windows HP traditional driver features

ENWW

Macintosh software overview

This chapter provides information about the following topics:
Supported Macintosh operating systems

●

Supported e-mail programs

●

All-in-one software for Macintosh

●

System requirements for a direct connection (Macintosh)

●

Installation overview

●

Installation options

●

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

●

HP LaserJet all-in-one uninstall instructions for Macintosh

Macintosh software
overview

●

ENWW

153

Supported Macintosh operating systems
The Macintosh all-in-one software for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products
supports the following operating systems:
■

Apple Mac OS 9.2.2

■

Apple Mac OS X (V10.2.8 and V10.3.x)

Macintosh software
overview
154

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Supported e-mail programs
The following table lists some examples of supported e-mail programs for Macintosh.

ENWW

Program Name

Macintosh OS

Apple Mail

Mac OS 9 and Mac OS X

Microsoft Entourage

Mac OS X

Microsoft Outlook Express

Mac OS 9

Supported e-mail programs

155

Macintosh software
overview

Table 5-1 Supported e-mail programs

All-in-one software for Macintosh
This section provides information about the following topics:
●

Software components for Macintosh

●

Software features not available on Macintosh operating systems

●

Software component availability for Macintosh

●

Software component localization

●

Ordering software for Macintosh

●

HP EWS Device Configuration

Software components for Macintosh
The following table lists the software components for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one
products that are available for computers running the Macintosh operating system .
Table 5-2 Software components for Macintosh
Component

Description

Installer software

Installs all the HP all-in-one software.

Driver software

Allows you to print, copy, and scan with the computer and the
HP all-in-one products. This software includes the following
components:
■

The PostScript Printer Description (PPD) file for printing
through PostScript Level 3 emulation

■

The HP LaserJet Fax driver

■

The HP LaserJet Scan driver (TWAIN scan driver )

Configure Device

Provides a user interface that you use to configure your HP
LaserJet all-in-one product.

HP LaserJet Director

Your HP all-in-one product automatically senses when a
document is inserted into the automatic document feeder
(ADF) and signals the computer to open the HP Director
interface on the computer screen. This "pop-up" feature
provides immediate access to the fax, copy, scan, and scanto-e-mail functions.

Macintosh software
overview

NOTE In network configurations where your
HP LaserJet all-in-one product is shared, the
HP Director "pop-up" feature is turned off by default,
so that the HP Director interface does not open on all
network users' screens when one person inserts a
document into the ADF. Also, peer-to-peer sharing of
the product is not available on Mac OS systems.
HP LaserJet Send Fax program
NOTE This feature is not supported on the HP Color
LaserJet 2820.

156

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

Allows you to send faxes from the computer through the fax
modem. HP Send Fax also provides tools for managing hardcopy faxing from the product. You can gain access to the fax
software from the HP LaserJet Director.

ENWW

Table 5-2 Software components for Macintosh (continued)
Component

Description
NOTE On Macintosh operating systems that use the
HP LaserJet all-in-one product software, you can
send faxes from the computer, but you cannot receive
faxes to the computer.

HP LaserJet Scanner program

Allows you to select scan options and then store the image to
a file. Open the scanning software from either the HP LaserJet
Director.
The default file format for the Scan-to-Email feature is .PDF;
other supported formats include .JPG, .PICT, and .TIFF.
You can also scan directly to TWAIN-compliant programs.

ReadIRIS Professional 9.0 text-recognition software by IRIS

Convert scanned images into text that can be edited in wordprocessing programs.
NOTE The ReadIRIS software comes on a separate
CD.

Scan to e-mail

During installation, your HP LaserJet all-in-one product
software detects supported e-mail program on your system
and integrates them into the HP LaserJet Scan software. In
addition, each time you start the computer, the software
updates the list of e-mail programs that are available for linking.
For more information, see Table 5-1 Supported e-mail
programs.

Online Help

Provides help for using the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one software .
The user documentation for these products is included on the
installation CD in Adobe Acrobat .PDF format. You must have
Adobe Acrobat Reader installed on your computer to read
the .PDF files. The HP Director also provides a link to this
documentation after you install the software.

Software features not available on Macintosh operating systems

■

HP PCL 6 print drivers

■

Some customized settings and features for the "start scan" functionality

■

The ability to receive faxes to this computer (the HP Color LaserJet 2820 all-in-one does not provide
any fax functionality)

■

HP Image Zone

■

HP Document Viewer

Software component availability for Macintosh
The following table lists the availability of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software components for Macintosh.
ENWW

All-in-one software for Macintosh

157

Macintosh software
overview

A number of features and functions that are available in the Windows operating system (OS) version of
the HP all-in-one software are not available in the Macintosh OS version of the software. The following
software features are not available:

Table 5-3 Software component availability for Macintosh
Component

Macintosh

Drivers
Mac PostScript Printer Description PPD

Fax driver

Scan driver

Installers
Macintosh Installer for OS 9

Macintosh Installer for OS X

Bidirectional communication
Network Bidirectional Communications

Direct Connect Bidirectional Communications

HP Aio Setup Assistant

Online Documentation
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide

HP LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Readme

Help systems

Other
HP Director

Configure Device utility

Software component localization
The Macintosh all-in-one software components for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 are localized
in the following languages:

Macintosh software
overview

■

Dutch

■

English

■

French

■

German

■

Italian

■

Spanish

Ordering software for Macintosh
To order the software if the CD is damaged or missing, contact HP Support at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/cposupport/software.html

158

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

To request the software CD by phone, see the following Web site for the correct contact number for your
country/region.
welcome.hp.com/country/us/en/wwcontact.html
The following table lists the part numbers and language groups of the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one software CDs.
Table 5-4 CD part numbers for the HP LaserJet all-in-one software
Part Number

Contents

Languages Included on CD

Q3948–60182

Macintosh software CD for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products

■

Dutch

■

English

■

French

■

Italian

■

German

■

Spanish

NOTE If you need a replacement CD or newer version of the software than what came with the
product, go to the product Web site and click CD-ROM Order Page to order. Or click Download
drivers and software to get the software update. You can download the software directly from
the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

HP EWS Device Configuration
The HP EWS Device Configuration is a utility that allows you to control your printer from your computer.
This section contains information about the following topics:
●

Access

●

HP EWS Device Configuration screens

Access
1

Open the HP Director.

Click Settings.

Click Configure Device. This opens the default web browser whether your computer is connected
over the network or through a USB connection.

HP EWS Device Configuration screens
The following tabs are available when you open the HP EWS Device configuration utility:
●

ENWW

Status

All-in-one software for Macintosh

159

Macintosh software
overview

To gain access to the HP EWS Device Configuration utility, follow these steps:

●

System

●

Fax

●

Networking
NOTE If you are not using the most recent version of your browser, you might need to click the
refresh button to gain access to the full feature set.

Status
The Status tab allows you to access and print out detailed information regarding device and supply
status, device configuration, network configuration, and usage.

Macintosh software
overview

Figure 5-1 HP EWS Device Configuration – Status tab
System
The System tab allows you to view and change settings for device information, paper handling, print
quality/density, print modes, system setup, volumes, and device service.

160

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Figure 5-2 HP EWS Device Configuration – System tab
Print
The Print tab allows you to view and change settings for print jobs, memory cards, PCL5e fonts, and
PostScript error reaction.

Figure 5-3 HP EWS Device Configuration – Print tab
Fax

ENWW

All-in-one software for Macintosh

161

Macintosh software
overview

The Fax tab allows you to view and change settings for fax sending, fax reception, error correction, and
creation of various logs and reports.

Figure 5-4 HP EWS Device Configuration – Fax tab
Networking
The Networking tab allows you to view and change settings for your device’s network connection and
communication.

Macintosh software
overview
162

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

All-in-one software for Macintosh

163

Macintosh software
overview

Figure 5-5 HP EWS Device Configuration – Networking tab

System requirements for a direct connection (Macintosh)
The HP all-in-one software has the following minimum system requirements:
■

Mac OS 9.2.2 or Mac OS X, V10.2.8 and V10.3.x

■

Macintosh computer (Power PC processor), such as an iMac, Power Macintosh G3, Power
Macintosh G4 233 MHz, Power Mac G5, or higher

■

RAM: Mac OS 9 - minimum system memory 64 MB; Mac OS X (V10.2.8 and V10.3.x - minimum
system memory 128 MB. These are minimum system requirements for memory. An additional 32
MB of free memory is optimum for installation.

■

100 MB or more of free hard disk space

■

A USB port

■

A CD-ROM drive (required for installation)

Macintosh software
overview
164

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Installation overview
The software for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products comes on a single CD. On
Macintosh operating systems, the HP all-in-one Installer installs the HP LaserJet all-in-one software for
your product from the CD onto the hard disk.
During installation, you are presented with two options:
■

Typical installation (installs all of the basic components in the default locations)

■

Minimum installation (installs only the printing-system software for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840)

ENWW

Installation overview

165

Macintosh software
overview

On Macintosh operating systems, the HP all-in-one product uses the HP all-in-one Installer. This
Installer provides an Easy Install option, which installs only the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software
on the current system startup drive that contains the active System folder. By default, the HP All-In-One
Software folder and the ReadIRIS folder are installed in the Applications folder.

Installation options
The HP all-in-one software can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products
in the following configurations:
■

A computer is directly connected to the product through a USB port and the HP all-in-one software
is loaded on the computer. (This provides the most product functionality.)

■

The product is connected to a network and you install the HP all-in-one software on a computer that
has access to the network.

Installation instructions for all Macintosh OSs — Animated Getting
Started Guide
Use the following instructions to set up your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 in Mac OS 9.2.2 or
Mac OS X V10.2.8 or V10.3.x
1

Insert the product software CD into your CD-ROM hard drive.

Double-click the icon for your operating system.

Macintosh software
overview
166

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Double-click the Start Here icon.

Figure 5-6 Start Here icon
The Animated Getting Started Guide opens.
NOTE The following graphic shows the Mac OS X version of the Animated Getting Started
Guide Screen.

ENWW

Installation options

167

Macintosh software
overview

Figure 5-7 Macintosh install – Animated Getting Started Guide

If you have not set up your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840, click Begin Setup and follow the
setup sequence to the end. The following screen appears when setup is complete.

Figure 5-8 Congratulations! Your all-in-one setup is complete screen
5

Click Install Software.

Macintosh installation instructions for direct connections
This section provides information about the following topics:
■

Installation instructions for Mac OS 9.2.2

■

Installation instructions for Mac OS X V10.2.8 and V10.3.x

Installation instructions for Mac OS 9.2.2
Use the following instructions to install the software on a Macintosh computer running Mac OS 9.2.2.
Insert the product software CD into your CD-ROM hard drive.

Macintosh software
overview
168

Follow the instructions in the Installation instructions for all Macintosh OSs — Animated Getting
Started Guidesection of this guide.

The software license agreement appears. Click Accept. The installation begins. During the
installation, you might be prompted again to provide a user name and password.

Click the HP LaserJet All-in-One icon.

Follow the onscreen instructions and click Install.

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

When prompted, restart the computer. After the computer restarts, the HP Setup Assistant starts
automatically.

Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the installation.

Installation instructions for Mac OS X
Use the following instructions to install the software on a Macintosh computer running Mac OS X.
1

Follow the instructions in the Installation instructions for all Macintosh OSs — Animated Getting
Started Guidesection of this guide.

If prompted to do so, enter a user name and password that have administrator privileges.

The software license agreement appears. Click Accept. The installation begins. During the
installation, you might be prompted again to provide a user name and password that have
administrator privileges.

When the installation is completed, a message appears stating that the installation was successful.
Click Restart.

The HP Setup Assistant starts automatically. Follow the onscreen instructions.
NOTE If the HP Setup Assistant does not start automatically, click Macintosh HD, click
Applications, click hp laserjet aio, and then double-click hp all-in-one Setup Assistant.

Macintosh installation instructions for networked computers
Use the following instructions to install the HP all-in-one software on networked Macintosh operating
systems:
1

Connect and install your HP LaserJet all-in-one product to the network.

Insert the product software CD into the CD-ROM drive. In the CD browser window, double-click the
HP all-in-one Installer icon.

ENWW

Click Install, and then follow the onscreen instructions to complete the software installation.

When the software installation is complete, click Restart. After the computer restarts, the HP setup
assistant starts automatically.

In the Setup Assistant welcome screen, click Next.

Installation options

169

Macintosh software
overview

NOTE If the CD browser window does not open automatically, double-click the CD icon on
the desktop to open the CD browser window.

Under Select Device, click the TCP/IP option, and then click Create. Type the HP LaserJet all-inone product TCP/IP address, and then click OK.

Follow the onscreen instructions to complete the setup and then click Done.

Macintosh software
overview
170

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh
The following sequence describes the dialog-box options that appear during the HP all-in-one software
installation on Macintosh systems.
NOTE In the following installation sequence, the product name HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 represents the specific HP all-in-one product that you are installing.

Figure 5-9 Authenticate dialog box
Type your user name and password, and then click OK to continue.

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

171

Macintosh software
overview

Click Cancel to close the installer.

Figure 5-10 License dialog box – HP Software License Agreement
Click Accept to initiate the installation process.
Click Printto open the Page Setup dialog box for your default printer and then print a copy of the license
agreement.
Click the language list to change the language of the License Agreement and the user interface.
Click Save As to open the system Save dialog box and then save the text of the software license
agreement to disk.
Click Decline to exit the installer.

Figure 5-11 Installing dialog box – progress indicator

Macintosh software
overview

The Installing dialog shows the number of items that remain to be installed and the name of the software
component currently being installed.
If you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 over a USB connection, the following dialog
box appears, instructing you to connect your USB cable.

172

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Figure 5-12 If you are using a USB cable... dialog box
After you have connected the USB cable, click OK.
When software installation is complete, the Restart alert appears.

Figure 5-13 Restart alert
Click Restart to close the installer and restart the computer. After the computer restarts, you must log
in to the computer, and then the HP All-in-One Setup Assistant starts automatically.
NOTE If the HP Setup Assistant does not start automatically, follow these steps:
1. Click Macintosh Hard Drive.
2. Click Applications.
3. Click hp laserjet aio.

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

173

Macintosh software
overview

4. Double-click hp all-in-one Setup Assistant.

Figure 5-14 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Introduction
Click Next to go to the Select Device dialog box.

Macintosh software
overview
174

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Figure 5-15 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Select Device
NOTE If you have not yet connected the product to your computer, the No devices found
message appears instead of a list of HP all-in-one products. Connect the product to the computer
with the USB cable, turn on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840, and then click Rescan
USB. The HP LaserJet all-in-one product appears in the list box.
When you click USB, the HP Color LaserJet 2820, HP Color LaserJet 2830, or HP Color LaserJet 2840
all-in-one product name appears in the list box. Click the product name, and then clickNext to the open
the User Identification dialog box.

Click Back to return to the Introduction dialog box.
Click the Rescan button to scan the system again and locate the designated product connection.

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

175

Macintosh software
overview

When you click TCP/IP and then click, Create, a text-entry dialog box opens and you can type the
network address or name for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product.

Figure 5-16 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – User Identification
NOTE This step occurs only when you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 2830 or the
HP Color LaserJet 2840.
Type the required information in the red fields.
Click Next to go to the Phone Line dialog box.
Click Back to return to the Select Device dialog box.

Macintosh software
overview
176

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Figure 5-17 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Phone Line
NOTE This step occurs only when you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 2830 or the
HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one products.
Select the appropriate options.

Whether you select Yes (separate fax line) or No (shared line), click Nextto go to the Outside Line
dialog box.
Click Back to return to the User Identification dialog box.

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

177

Macintosh software
overview

If you have a separate (dedicated) phone line for fax calls, click the Yes, I will have separate fax and
voice lines. option. Also, be sure to type your fax number in the Incoming Fax Number text box. If you
are using a single telephone line for both phone calls and faxes, click the No, I will use one line for
both. option.

Figure 5-18 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Outside Line
NOTE This step occurs only when you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 2830 or the
HP Color LaserJet 2840.
Select the appropriate option.
If you do not need to dial a number to get to an outside line, click the No, I don't use a dial prefix option.
If you do need to dial a number to get an outside line, click the Yes, my dial prefix is: option and type
the number into the text box.
If you have separate voice and phone lines, clickNext to go to the Finish dialog box.

Macintosh software
overview

If you have a single phone line for both voice and fax, click Nextto go to the Distinctive Ring dialog
box.
Click Back to return to the Phone Line dialog box.

178

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Figure 5-19 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Distinctive Ring
NOTE This step occurs only when you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 2830 or the
HP Color LaserJet 2840.
Select the appropriate option.
If you have a distinctive ring service, click Yes, and then select the type of ring from the drop-down
menu. If you do not have a distinctive ring service, click No.
If you clicked Yes, click Next to go to the Finish dialog box.

Click Back to return to the Outside Line dialog box.

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

179

Macintosh software
overview

If you clicked No, click Nextto go to the Answering Machine dialog box.

Figure 5-20 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Answering Machine
NOTE This step occurs only when you are installing the HP Color LaserJet 2830 or the
HP Color LaserJet 2840.
Select the appropriate option.
If you have an answering machine that answers calls at the specified number, click Yes, I will. If you
do not have an answering machine that answers calls at the specified number, click No, I will not.
Click Next to go to the Finish dialog box.
Click Back to return to the Distinctive Ring dialog box.

Macintosh software
overview
180

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

Figure 5-21 hp all-in-one Setup Assist – Finish
The information you typed in previous dialog boxes appears in the Finish dialog box. If any items need
to be changed, click the Back button to return to the dialog boxes that you need to change.
If you have separate lines for your fax and voice calls, click Back to return to the Outside Line dialog
box.
If you have one line for your fax and voice calls, click Back to return to the Answering Machine dialog
box.

ENWW

Installation dialog-box options for Macintosh

181

Macintosh software
overview

Click Finish to go to the Congratulations dialog box.

Figure 5-22 hp all-in-one Setup Assistant – Congratulations
Click Done to close the HP All-in-One Setup Assistant.

Macintosh software
overview
182

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

HP LaserJet all-in-one uninstall instructions for Macintosh
Use the following instructions to uninstall the HP LaserJet all-in-one software from the computer:
1

Locate the HP All-in-One Uninstaller utility icon in the HP All-In-One Software folder by using the
following path:
/Applications/hplaserjetaio/HP Uninstaller

ENWW

Specify whether you want to perform an uninstall for all HP devices, or only for a specific device. If
you select Uninstall selected, you must then specify the devices you want to uninstall from the list.

Click Next.

Select the appropriate check boxes to uninstall any additional items.

Click Uninstall.

When the uninstall process is complete, click Restart.

HP LaserJet all-in-one uninstall instructions for Macintosh

183

Macintosh software
overview

Double-click the HP Uninstaller icon to start the utility.

Macintosh software
overview
184

Chapter 5

Macintosh software overview

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

This section provides information about the following topics:

ENWW

●

Overview of the HP Toolbox

●

System requirements

●

Key features

●

Configuration options

185

The HP Toolbox

Overview of the HP Toolbox
NOTE The HP Toolbox is available for Windows operating systems only.
NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products use V4.0 of the HP Toolbox.
Some differences may exist between this version of HP Toolbox and previous versions.
The HP Toolbox is a web application that allows end users to easily communicate and manage their
HP LaserJet all-in-one product. The HP Toolbox provides the following capabilities:
■

Monitor the status of the HP LaserJet all-in-one product

■

Examine and set the device settings for print, fax, copy, and scan

■

Provide access to Fax software functionality
■

Common Fax Tasks

■

Fax Phone book

■

Send/Receive logs

■

Fax reports

■

Provides scan-to-e-mail and scan-to-folder software functionality when using the SCAN-TO button
on the HP LaserJet all-in-one control panel

■

Provide Troubleshooting and "How do I" content

■

Provide access to online product documentation

■

Provide Device Alert functionality, notifying the end user when particular events or conditions occur
at the device.

Starting the HP Toolbox
You can start the HP Toolbox using any of the following methods.
■

Double-click the Status Client icon in your Windows system tray.

■

Click Start, click Programs, click HP, click HP Color LaserJet 2820, 2820, , 2840, and then
click HP LaserJet Toolbox.

■

Click the Utilities link or the Status link in the HP Director

Structure
The HP Toolbox is divided into two main sections: the HP Toolbox section and the Device Settings
section. Each of these sections has controls grouped into a set of tabs. In addition to these two sections,
the HP Toolbox has other pages that are accessible from various points within the HP Toolbox.

Opening screen
The opening screen that appears in the HP Toolbox section depends on the installed configuration of
the HP Toolbox. If you have installed the HP Toolbox for a single HP LaserJet all-in-one product, the

186

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Navigation
Every HP Toolbox screen that appears in the HP Toolbox section contains a Left Navigation section at
the left side of the window. This navigation section allows you to gain access to the following screens
from any screen that is displayed in the HP Toolbox section.
■

Device Select screen

■

Current Alerts screen

■

Text Only screen

The left navigation section contains a link to a text-only version of the screen that is being displayed.
Your Web browser’s Forward, Back, and History navigation buttons allow you to navigate between
pages that you have visited before. You can also set a bookmark for most pages that are displayed in
the HP Toolbox section.

ENWW

Overview of the HP Toolbox

187

The HP Toolbox

Device Content Page for that HP LaserJet all-in-one product appears when you open the program. If
you have installed the HP Toolbox for multiple products, the Device Select screen appears when you
open the program. On the Device Select screen, you can select the HP LaserJet all-in-one product you
want to manage with the HP Toolbox.

The HP Toolbox

System requirements
The following table describes the system requirements for the HP Toolbox.

Web browser requirements
The browser requirements presented in this section are not necessarily minimum standards; rather, they
are the minimum tested environments. Other current Web browsers, even if untested, might also provide
access to HP Toolbox screens.
Table 6-1 Browsers supported by HP Toolbox
Browser category

Description

Target browsers within this category

Optimal

All functionality operates as designed,
and graphical appearances are correct.
Minor cosmetic differences may exist
from browser to browser, but the overall
appearance, look-and-feel, and behavior
are consistent for all browsers in this
category.

■

Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) V5.5
or V6.0 and later

■

Netscape V6.2 or V7.0 and later

■

Opera V7.0 and later

You are able to access functionality and
view web content, but major formatting
and display issues might exist. For
example, tabs may not look like tabs, and
left navigation buttons may not look or
behave properly, but you are still able to
navigate between the various tabs and
buttons.

■

IE V5.0

■

Netscape V6.1

■

Opera V6.05

You are not able to gain access to some
of the functionality provided, or you are
unable to view certain portions of the web
content.

■

IE V4.0

■

Netscape V4.75

Functional

Not operational

Other requirements
The HP Toolbox runs on Windows operating systems with a minimum of 128 MB of RAM. However,
256 MB is recommended for best performance. The TCP/IP protocol must also be installed on the
computer.

188

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Key features
This section provides information about the following topics:
●

Scan to e-mail or a folder

●

Receive faxes to this computer

●

Receive Alert messages for device events

Scan to e-mail or a folder
In the Scan to e-mail or a folder feature, you can set up the HP LaserJet all-in-one product to later initiate
a scan directly from the HP LaserJet all-in-one product control panel. On the HP LaserJet all-in-one
product control panel, press the SCAN TO button. Use the < or the > button to select an e-mail recipient
or folder location, and then press the START SCAN button or the ENTER button. For e-mail, the scanned
item is attached to an e-mail message, which is then sent automatically to the e-mail recipient that you
selected. For a folder, the scanned item is saved to the specified folder.
NOTE You must program the SCAN TO button before you can use this method to scan to e-mail.
Go to the Scan to tab in the HP Toolbox. Click the Turn on scan to e-mail or a folder option,
and then click Apply.
To add an e-mail address, click the E-mail addresses option, type the e-mail address you want
to add in the text box. If you want the e-mail address to appear as a different name on the all-inone product control panel, type the new name in the Display at the device as text box, and then
click Add. The e-mail address (and it's display name, if any) appears in the E-mail addresses
and folders list toward the bottom of the page.
To add a folder destination, click the Folder option, type folder path in the text box, or click
Browse to locate the folder on your computer. If you want the folder to appear as a different name
on the all-in-one product control panel, type the new name (up to 14 characters) in the Display
at the device as text box, and then click Add. The folder (and its display name, if any) appears
in the E-mail addresses and folders list toward the bottom of the page.
The following destinations are set up automatically when a direct connection installation is performed
and appear on the HP LaserJet all-in-one product control panel: MY SCANS, ADD NEW E-MAIL, and
ADD NEW FOLDER. Selecting MY SCANS sends a copy of the scan to the MY SCANS folder in the
MY DOCUMENTS folder on your computer.
Selecting ADD NEW E-MAIL or ADD NEW FOLDER opens the Scan to E-mail or a Folder screen in
the HP Toolbox on the computer. Add e-mail addresses or folders by typing them into the E-mail
addresses text box or the Folder text box, and then clicking Add. These new entries appear on the HP
LaserJet all-in-one product SCAN TO list.
To use this feature on a network installation, go to the Scan-to tab in the HP Toolbox. Click the Turn
on scan to e-mail or a folder option, and then click Apply.
NOTE If you change the scan preferences on the Scan to tab in the HP Toolbox, the new
settings affect only the scanning that is initiated by pressing the SCAN TO button on the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one control panel. The HP Toolbox settings do not affect
scanning that is initiated at the computer or by pressing the START SCAN button on the control
panel.

ENWW

Key features

189

The HP Toolbox

Receive faxes to this computer
This feature of the HP Toolbox allows you to receive incoming faxes to the computer, rather than printing
them or forwarding them to another fax number.
NOTE If the host computer is turned off or disconnected from the HP LaserJet all-in-one product
when a fax is received, the fax is stored on the all-in-one product until the host computer is turned
on or reconnected to the HP LaserJet all-in-one product.
Laptop users must shut down and disconnect the computer instead of undocking from a docking
station. Laptop users cannot receive faxes when the laptop is undocked or not connected to the
device. The device stores the received faxes until the laptop is docked.
Follow these steps to enable the Receive faxes to this computer feature.
NOTE The Receive faxes to this computer option is available only on direct-connect
installations. For network installations, the Receive faxes to this computer option is disabled
and cannot be selected.
1

Open the HP Toolbox.

Click the Fax tab.

On the Fax Tasks screen, click the Receive faxes to this computer option, and then click OK.

Incoming faxes are uploaded to the computer where you can view them from the Fax Receive
Log screen. If your computer is turned off when faxes arrive, they are stored in the HP LaserJet allin-one product memory and are automatically uploaded to your computer when you turn it on again.
You can view only the faxes that are received by your computer, not those received by the HP
LaserJet all-in-one.
NOTE The Receive faxes to this computer option is not available with a network
installation.

Receive Alert messages for device events
By using HP Toolbox, you can be alerted when certain events occur at the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one. You can receive pop-up dialogs (Status Alerts) or automatically
generated e-mail messages (E-mail Alerts) for certain events. In addition, alerts are shown as a taskbar
icon. Some of the alert events include:

190

■

Cartridge or imaging drum low

■

Replace cartridge or imaging drum

■

Non-HP or unauthorized supply installed

■

Close door

■

Paper out

■

Paper jam

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Manual feed

■

Device errors (such as insufficient memory)

The HP Toolbox

■

The following alert messages are available:
●

HP Device pop-up alert messages

●

System-tray icon alert

●

E-mail alert

HP Device pop-up alert messages
Pop-up alert messages notify you immediately when an error or print-cartridge warning occurs in the
device. An error, such as a paper jam, halts device operation and requires correction before the device
continues operation. The alert condition can be corrected at any time. Alerts are sent only to the specific
computer that is used to print to the device.
A group of errors or a group of print-cartridge warnings can be selected, but not specific items within
those groups. To configure alerts, use the Set up Status Alerts screen on the Status tab in HP Toolbox.

Figure 6-1 HP Device Alert – LOAD PAPER

System-tray icon alert
The system-tray icon feature displays information about all current alert conditions in the device. An HP
Device Alert icon appears in the Windows system tray when an alert condition occurs. This feature is
provided through HP Toolbox and is turned on by default.

E-mail alert
E-mail alert messages notify up to two users when a specific alert condition occurs in the device. The
alert condition can be a specific error alert or print-cartridge warning. This feature can be used to alert
administrators or service providers that the device requires attention. For instance, when the toner low
alert occurs, the person in charge of ordering print cartridges can be notified by e-mail.
This feature, available through the HP Toolbox, is turned off by default. To use this feature, you must
set up your e-mail address, select the events for which you want notification, configure the SNMP email server, and enable the feature in HP Toolbox.

ENWW

Key features

191

The HP Toolbox

Configuration options
The HP Toolbox is divided into two main sections: the HP Toolbox section and the Device Settings
section. Each of these sections has controls grouped into a set of tabs. In addition to these two sections,
the HP Toolbox has other screens that are accessible from various points within the HP Toolbox. The
following lists describe the basic layout of these sections and the configuration options available on each
tab.
This section provides information about the following topics:
■

HP Toolbox section

■

Device Settings section

■

Network Settings

■

Other pages

HP Toolbox section
The HP Toolbox section describes the following tabs.
■

Status tab

■

Fax tab

■

Scan to tab

■

Troubleshooting tab

■

Documentation tab

Status tab
●

Device Status

●

Supplies Status

●

Setup Status Alerts

●

Set up E-mail Alerts

●

Device Configuration

●

Network Configuration

●

Print Info Pages

●

Event Log

The Status tab contains the following screens.

192

■

Device Status screen

■

Set up Status Alerts screen

■

Device Configuration screen

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Print Info Pages screen

Device Status
The Device Status screen shows device status messages from the device. The Device Status screen
also displays some pertinent product information and device settings.

ENWW

Configuration options

193

The HP Toolbox

■

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-2 Device Status screen
Supplies Status
Use this screen to view the status of various product supplies, such as the amount of toner in the print
cartridge.
194

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-3 Supplies Status screen
Setup Status Alerts
Use this screen to set up on the Status Alerts for the HP LaserJet all-in-one product. Select the Turn
on alerts option and click the Apply button to turn on alerts.
ENWW

Configuration options

195

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-4 Set up Status Alerts screen
By selecting the options under Show an alert, you can receive the alerts like those listed in the following
table.
Table 6-2 Alerts
Setting

Alerts

When the device cannot print

■

Close Door

■

Manual Feed

■

Paper Out

■

Paper Jam

■

Device errors (for example, insufficient memory)

■

Cartridge Low

■

Replace Cartridge

■

Non-HP cartridge installed

■

Imaging Drum Low

■

Replace Imaging Drum

■

Unauthorized Supply Installed

■

ADF Door Open

■

ADF Jam

When the HP print cartridge is low or a non-HP cartridge is
installed

When the device cannot scan

196

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

■

As a pop-up message

■

As a system tray icon

Set up E-mail Alerts
The following illustration shows the Set up E-mail Alerts screen.

Figure 6-5 Set up E-mail Alerts screen – 1 of 2

ENWW

Configuration options

197

The HP Toolbox

By selecting the options under Show the alert, you can receive the alerts in either or both of two forms:

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-6 Set up E-mail Alerts screen – 2 of 2
E-mail messages can be sent to you when certain events occur at the device. You can select the specific
events about which you want to be notified.
To use this feature, you must use a valid e-mail address, select the events for which you want notification,
configure the SNMP e-mail server that will be used to send the e-mail message, and click Apply to save
the settings.
Up to two e-mail addresses can be configured to receive separate e-mail messages for separate events,
if desired.

198

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Device Configuration
The Device Configuration screen displays the values of all of the settings available to be set in the
device, and also other configuration items such as installed DIMMs, Personalities, and page counts.
The contents of this screen should be consistent with the configuration page generated by the device.

Figure 6-7 Device Configuration screen – 1 of 4

ENWW

Configuration options

199

The HP Toolbox

To ensure that the proper e-mail addresses have been used and that the SNMP server information is
valid, you can click the Test E-mail Settings button.

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-8 Device Configuration screen – 2 of 4

200

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-9 Device Configuration screen – 3 of 4

ENWW

Configuration options

201

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-10 Device Configuration screen – 4 of 4
Network Configuration
The following illustration shows the Network Configuration screen. Use this screen to configure various
network settings.

202

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-11 Network Configuration screen

ENWW

Configuration options

203

The HP Toolbox

Print Info Pages
The Print Info Pages screen provides users the ability to easily print out the internal special pages that
are generated by the device.

Figure 6-12 Print Information Pages screen
The contents of these reports are generated by the device firmware, and not by the HP Toolbox.
The screen also provides a link that you can click to go easily to the Fax Reports screen.
Event Log
Use this screen to monitor events for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product. Up to ten events can appear
on this screen. If this screen is empty, no events have occurred on your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

204

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-13 Event Log screen

Fax tab
The Fax tab contains the following screens.
■

Fax Tasks

■

Fax Phone Book
■

Phone Book - Edit Entry

■

Phone Book - Create Group

■

Phone Book - Edit Group

■

Phone Book - Import

■

Phone Book Import - Select Entries

■

Fax Send Log

■

Fax Receive Log
■

ENWW

Fax Viewer. This screen is available from the Fax Send Log and Fax Receive Log screens.
The Fax viewer screen is available only for faxes sent to the computer.)

■

Fax Data Properties

■

Fax Reports

■

Detailed Fax Settings

■

How do I...

Configuration options

205

The HP Toolbox

Fax Tasks
This screen provides access to common fax related functionality and settings.

Figure 6-14 Fax Tasks screen
The options in the Fax Functions section send commands to the HP LaserJet all-in-one product. The
following options are available.

206

■

Send Fax. The Send Fax button opens the Send Faxapplication.

■

Reprint Last Faxes. The Reprint Last Faxes function was designed because the HP Color
LaserJet 2830 and HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one products do not have a toner-low indicator.
Most fax machines will stop printing faxes when the toner is low. The HP LaserJet all-in-one products
do not have the capability to detect when the toner is low. When faxes start to print with streaks and
some blank pages, you should replace the toner cartridge and then click Reprint Last Faxes. The
HP LaserJet all-in-one product begins to reprint faxes, beginning with the last fax received. When
the product has reprinted the faxes you need, press the CANCEL button on the product control panel.

■

Clear Stored Faxes. The HP LaserJet all-in-one firmware does not differentiate between faxes that
have been printed and faxes that have been sent directly to the computer. The firmware manages
fax storage by trying to keep as many pages of received faxes as long as possible. After receiving
a fax and then printing the pages or sending the pages to the computer, the firmware marks the fax
as "ok to delete." When the firmware needs more room for fax storage, it will go through the faxes

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The Fax Receive Mode section lists options for receiving faxes. You can choose one of these options.
■

Print the Received Faxes. This is the default selection. If you choose this option, you also have
the option to receive a notification (pop-up) message when a fax is printed.

■

Receive faxes to this computer. If you choose this option, you also have the option to receive a
notification (pop-up) message when a fax is received.
NOTE This option is enabled only in direct-connect installations.

■

Forward received faxes to a different fax machine. If you choose this option, you also must enter
a fax number to which the fax is forwarded.

Fax Phone Book
Displays the phone book data from the device. The opening screen initially displays the first 25 entries
in the phone book.
You can add a new entry into the phone book by typing information in the Add the Contact
Information section, and clicking Add.
The maximum number of characters that a name can have in a phone book entry is 16. Only 12 of these
characters are displayed on the product control panel, because 4 characters are used to display the
phone-book entry number (for example, 001:).
The maximum number of characters that a telephone number can have is 50. This includes special
characters used to insert pauses in the dial sequence.

ENWW

Configuration options

207

The HP Toolbox

and delete enough marked fax jobs to free up the fax storage needed. The Clear Stored Faxes
removes all faxes stored in the product's memory. This includes faxes marked "ok to delete," faxes
which have not yet been printed or sent to the computer, any delayed-send faxes, and any pending
redial faxes.

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-15 Fax Phone Book screen
Fax Phone Book - Edit Entry
This screen opens after clicking Edit for an entry that corresponds to an individual phone book entry
(NOT a group entry).

208

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-16 Fax Phone Book – Edit Entry screen
Fax Phone Book - Create a New Group
This screen opens by clicking New Group on the Fax Phone Book screen. The Entry number field is
populated with the first available entry in the phone book.
The maximum number of characters that a name can have in a phone book entry is 16. Only 12 of these
characters are displayed on the product control panel, because 4 characters are used to display the
phone-book entry number (for example, 001:).

ENWW

Configuration options

209

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-17 Fax Phone Book - Create a New Group screen
Fax Phone Book - Edit a Group
This screen opens by clicking Edit for a Group entry on the Fax Phone Book screen. The behavior of
this screen is identical to the Create a New Group screen.

210

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-18 Fax Phone Book - Edit a Group screen
Import information into the Fax Phone Book
Use the Import information into the Fax Phone Book screen to import phone book data that has been
exported from external e-mail applications. You must select one of the following applications.

ENWW

■

Microsoft Outlook

■

Microsoft Outlook Express

■

Lotus notes

Configuration options

211

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-19 Import information into the Fax Phone Book screen
NOTE Phone book files that were created using the HP LaserJet 3300 series product software
cannot be imported into HP Toolbox for use with the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-inone products. Any phone numbers used with the HP LaserJet 3300 series product must be
reconfigured for use with the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products.
Before phone book entries can be imported into HP Toolbox, you must export the entries from your mail
application and save the file in .CSV format. Follow these steps to export your phone book entries from
an existing Microsoft Outlook address book.
1

In Microsoft Outlook, click File, and then click Import and Export.

Click Export to a file, and then click Next.

In the Create a file of type dialog box, click Comma Separated Values (Windows), and then click
Next.

Navigate to the folder that contains your address book (usually Contacts), click the folder name,
and then click Next.

In the Save exported file as text box, type a name for your file.

Click Browse to specify a location to save the file. Make sure the Save as type drop-down menu
specifies the file type as Comma Separated Values (Windows) (*.CSV), and then click OK.
NOTE Make a note of where you saved this file so that you can find it later.

212

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Click Finish.

Open the HP Toolbox and click the Fax tab.

From the left navigation bar, click Fax Phone Book.

The HP Toolbox

Your designated file name and path now appear in the text box. Click Next to continue.

10 Click Import Phone Book.
11 Click the phone book application option button from which you are importing.
12 Click Browse and navigate to the file you saved in step 6. Click the file name and then click
Open. The file name and path appear in the text box.
13 Click Continue.
14 Select entries from the list that you would like to import, and then click Save.
Fax Phone Book – Import – Select Entries
This screen displays all of the entries available in the imported file (selected on the Import screen) in
the Import List. Also, all of the currently stored phone book entries are displayed in the Phone Book
section of this screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

213

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-20 Fax Phone Book – Import – Select Entries screen
NOTE Although this illustration shows only the first 20 entries, you can import up to 120 entries.

Fax Send Log and Fax Receive Log
The Fax Send log and the Fax Receive log list the faxes that have been sent or received by the HP
LaserJet all-in-one product.

214

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-21 Fax Send Log screen

Figure 6-22 Fax Receive log screen

ENWW

Configuration options

215

The HP Toolbox

Clicking the Refresh button causes the HP Toolbox to pull new fax data from the HP LaserJet all-inone product. The following information is displayed about each fax in the log.
■

Date and time

■

Job number

■

Fax number

■

Pages

■

Result

The fax logs can be sorted by any of these columns by clicking on the column name that you want to
sort by. A triangle appears next to the column heading that designates ascending or descending order.
To change the order from ascending to descending or vice versa, click the column heading again. The
last sort column and sort order you use is saved when you exit the screen.
If the fax was sent or received at the computer (rather than at the HP LaserJet all-in-one product), each
fax entry also has a View option. Click View to see the fax in a new window. Faxes that have not yet
been viewed appear in bold type.
A maximum of 40 fax log entries are displayed. To enable the HP Toolbox to automatically check for
updates to the fax log, click Turn on automatic fax log updates and then click Apply.
Fax Viewer
For faxes that are sent from the Fax Send screen (on the Fax Settings tab of the HP Toolbox), or faxes
that are received to the computer, a View link appears for that fax entry on the Fax Send or Fax
Receive log. Click the link to view the fax.
The Fax Viewer screen allows you to see information about your fax, including a thumbnail image of
the fax, and allows you to open the fax to view it in Adobe Acrobat Reader.

216

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-23 Fax Viewer screen
Fax Data Properties
Use these settings to manage the space used to store faxes on your computer. You can save more
faxes if you specify a larger total data size.

ENWW

Configuration options

217

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-24 Fax Data Properties screen
These settings apply to faxes that have been sent from or received to your computer. These settings
apply only if you have chosen to send or receive faxes remotely from your computer.
If you select either the Delete fax data files older than: check box or the Limit total data storage
size: check box, you must type a corresponding value in the Days or MB field, and then click Apply to
save the settings. If you do not type a value in the Days or the MB field, an error message appears,
stating: Invalid entry. Please enter a valid value.
An entry will remain in the fax log even if the stored fax is deleted. When data files are deleted, only the
fax data is deleted.
Fax Reports screen
The Fax Reports screen allows you to easily print out the internal fax reports that are generated by the
HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

218

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-25 Fax Reports screen
Detailed Fax Settings
This screen provides navigational links to the Fax Settings tab and the Fax Set-up Wizard.

ENWW

Configuration options

219

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-26 Detailed Fax Settings screen
Fax: How do I... ?
The following illustration shows the Fax: How do I... ? screen.

Figure 6-27 Fax: How do I... ? screen

220

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Scan to tab
The Scan to tab contains the following screens:
●

Scan to E-mail or Folder

●

Preferences

●

How do I... ?

Scan to E-mail or Folder
Use this screen to add entries to the list that appears on the HP LaserJet all-in-one product control panel
when you press the SCAN-TO button on the control panel. Enter an e-mail address or a folder location
to which you can send scanned information directly from the HP LaserJet all-in-one product to your
computer. For e-mail, you can enter any e-mail address that you normally use to send e-mail messages.
Before the e-mail message is sent, the e-mail addresses are resolved through the address book of your
e-mail application. You can include single e-mail addresses or distribution lists on which the e-mail
addresses are separated by commas. To scan to e-mail or a folder, press the SCAN TO button on the
device. Use the < or > button to make a selection, and then press the START SCAN button or the ENTER
button.

Figure 6-28 Scan to E-mail or a Folder screen

ENWW

Configuration options

221

The HP Toolbox

Preferences
This screen allows you to make changes to the way the product scans documents.

Figure 6-29 Preferences for Scan to E-mail or a Folder screen
NOTE These preferences apply only to scans that you initiate by using the SCAN TO button on
the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one control panel.
The following table shows the scanning options available on this screen.
Table 6-3 Preferences for Scan to E-mail or a Folder
Option

Scan to e-mail settings

Scan to a folder settings

Resolution

■

75 dpi

■

75 dpi

■

100 dpi

■

100 dpi

■

150 dpi; default setting

■

150 dpi; default setting

■

200 dpi

■

200 dpi

■

300 dpi

■

300 dpi

■

600 dpi

■

600 dpi

■

1200 dpi

■

1200 dpi

■

Black and White (1 bit)

■

Black and White (1 bit)

■

Grayscale (8 bit); default setting

■

Grayscale (8 bit)

■

Color (24 bit)

■

Color (24 bit); default setting

Image type (bit depth)

222

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Option

Scan to e-mail settings

Scan to a folder settings

File type

■

Adobe PDF (*.pdf); default setting

■

Adobe PDF (*.pdf)

■

JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg)

■

JPEG (*.jpg, *.jpeg); default setting

■

GIF (*.gif)

■

GIF (*.gif)

■

Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

■

Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)

■

TIFF (*.tiff, *.tif)

■

TIFF (*.tiff, *.tif)

■

TIFF – compressed (*.tiff, *.tif)

■

TIFF – compressed (*.tiff, *.tif)

■

Default; default setting

■

Default; default setting

■

Letter

■

Letter

■

Legal

■

Legal

■

Executive

■

Executive

■

Envelope #10

■

Envelope #10

■

Envelope DL

■

Envelope DL

■

Envelope C5

■

Envelope C5

■

Envelope B5

■

Envelope B5

■

Envelope Monarch

■

Envelope Monarch

■

B5 (ISO)

■

B5 (ISO)

■

B5 (JIS)

■

B5 (JIS)

■

Double Postscard (JIS)

■

Double Postscard (JIS)

■

Postcard (JIS)

■

Postcard (JIS)

■

Postcard

■

Postcard

■

8.5x13

■

8.5x13

■

16K

■

16K

■

Business Card

■

Business Card

■

Photo: 3.5x5 in (9x13 cm)

■

Photo: 3.5x5 in (9x13 cm)

■

Photo: 5x3.5 in (13x9 cm)

■

Photo: 5x3.5 in (13x9 cm)

■

Photo: 4x6 in (10x15 cm)

■

Photo: 4x6 in (10x15 cm)

■

Photo: 6x4 in (15x10 cm)

■

Photo: 6x4 in (15x10 cm)

■

Photo: 5x7 in (13x18 cm)

■

Photo: 5x7 in (13x18 cm)

■

Photo: 7x5 in (18x13 cm)

■

Photo: 7x5 in (18x13 cm)

■

Photo: 6x8 in (15x24 cm)

■

Photo: 6x8 in (15x24 cm)

Size to scan

ENWW

Configuration options

The HP Toolbox

Table 6-3 Preferences for Scan to E-mail or a Folder (continued)

223

Table 6-3 Preferences for Scan to E-mail or a Folder (continued)

The HP Toolbox

Option

Scan to e-mail settings

Scan to a folder settings

■

Photo: 8x6 in (24x15 cm)

■

Photo: 8x6 in (24x15 cm)

■

Photo: 8x10 in (20x25 cm)

■

Photo: 8x10 in (20x25 cm)

The HP LaserJet all-in-one software converts scanned documents to a format that you specify and sends
them directly to an e-mail address or a folder that you have designated through the Scan to tab in the
HP Toolbox. You can enter a single e-mail address or you can send to a group of e-mail addresses.
The e-mail will be sent via the default e-mail client as specified in the computer E-mail Control.
NOTE If you specify an unsupported file format in the File Type option on this screen, an error
message appears asking you to reinstall the software for the file type you requested.
How do I... ?
The following illustration shows the Scan: How do I ... ? screen.

Figure 6-30 Scan: How do I... ? screen

Troubleshooting tab
With the exception of the Print Quality Tools screen, all of the content under the Troubleshooting tab
is static HTML content. This content contains hyperlinks, and Next and Previous buttons, which allows
users to navigate through the various sections of the Troubleshooting content.
The Troubleshooting tab contains the following screens:

224

■

Troubleshooting Process screen

■

Troubleshooting Information screen

■

Control Panel Messages screen

■

Clearing Jams screen

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Print Problems screen

■

Scan Problems screen

■

Copy Problems screen

■

Fax Problems screen

■

Memory Card Problems screen

■

Troubleshooting Tools screen

■

Animated Demonstrations screen

The HP Toolbox

■

Troubleshooting Process
The following illustration shows the Troubleshooting Process screen.

Figure 6-31 Troubleshooting Process screen
Troubleshooting Information
The following illustration shows the Troubleshooting tools screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

225

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-32 Troubleshooting tools screen
Control Panel Messages
The following illustration shows the Control Panel Messages screen.

226

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-33 Control panel messages screen
Clearing Jams
The following illustration shows the Clearing Jams screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

227

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-34 Clearing jams screen
Print Problems screen
Use this section to find tips for solving print problems with the HP LaserJet all-in-one product.
NOTE All of the Troubleshooting content provided from this screen is also provided in the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide.

228

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-35 Print problems screen

Scan Problems
Use this section to help you troubleshoot scan problems with your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

ENWW

Configuration options

229

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-36 Scan problems screen
NOTE All of the Troubleshooting content provided from this screen is also provided in the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide.

Copy Problems
Use this screen to help you troubleshoot copy problems with your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

230

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-37 Copy problems screen
NOTE All of the Troubleshooting content provided from this screen is also provided in the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide.

Fax Problems
Use the information in this section to troubleshoot general fax issues.
NOTE All of the Troubleshooting content provided from this screen is also provided in the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide.

ENWW

Configuration options

231

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-38 Fax problems screen

Memory Card Problems
The following illustration shows the Memory card problems screen.

232

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-39 Memory card problems screen
Troubleshooting Tools
The following illustration shows the Troubleshooting Tools screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

233

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-40 Troubleshooting Tools screen
Animated Demonstrations
The following illustration shows the Animated Demonstrations screen. Click the links on this screen
to view animated demonstrations about your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one.

234

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-41 Animated Demonstrations screen

Documentation tab
The Documentation tab contains the following screens.
●

How do I... ? screens

●

Print: How do I... ?

●

Fax: How do I... ?

●

Copy: How do I... ?

●

Scan: How do I... ?

●

Photo: How do I... ?

●

Network: How do I... ?

●

Other: How do I... ?

●

User Guide

How do I... ? screens
For each of the How do I...? screens (Print, Fax, Copy, Scan, Photo, Network, and Other), there is a set
of links on each screen. Each link corresponds to a particular task that a user can perform. Clicking on
these links causes a new window to open that provides content about the given task.

ENWW

Configuration options

235

The HP Toolbox

Print: How do I... ?
This screen provides links to information to help you perform print tasks.

Figure 6-42 Print: How do I... ? screen
Fax: How do I... ?
This screen provides links to information to help you perform fax tasks.

236

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-43 Fax: How do I? screen
Copy: How do I... ?
This screen provides links to information to help you perform copy tasks.

Figure 6-44 Copy: How do I... ? screen

ENWW

Configuration options

237

The HP Toolbox

Scan: How do I... ?
This screen provides links to information to help you perform scan tasks.

Figure 6-45 Scan: How do I... ? screen
Photo: How do I... ?
The following illustration shows the Photo: How do I... ? screen.

238

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-46 Photo: How do I... ? screen
Network: How do I... ?
The following illustration shows the Network: How do I... ? screen.

Figure 6-47 Network: How do I... ? screen

ENWW

Configuration options

239

The HP Toolbox

Other: How do I... ?
The following illustration shows the Other: How do I... ? screen.

Figure 6-48 Other: How do I... ? screen
User Guide
Use this screen to gain access to the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide.

240

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-49 User Guide screen

Device Settings section
The Device Settings section comprises the following tabs.
■

System Settings tab

■

Print Settings tab

■

Fax Settings tab

■

Copy Settings tab

■

Network Settings tab
NOTE Settings that are specified in the HP LaserJet all-in-one product driver override settings
made in the HP Toolbox.

ENWW

Configuration options

241

The HP Toolbox

System Settings tab
The System Settings tab contains the following screens:
■

Device Information

■

Paper Handling

■

Print Quality

■

Print Density

■

Print Modes

■

System Setup

■

Volumes

■

Date/Time

■

Service

■

Device Polling

■

Save/Restore

Device Information
Use this screen to add or change information about your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-50 Device Information screen

242

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Paper Handling
Use this screen to change the paper handling defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-51 Paper Handling screen
The following table shows the Paper Handling settings that are available.
Table 6-4 Paper Handling options and settings

ENWW

Option

Settings

Default paper size

■

Letter; default setting

■

Legal

■

Executive

■

B5 (ISO)

■

Envelope #10

■

Envelope Monarch

Configuration options

243

Table 6-4 Paper Handling options and settings (continued)

The HP Toolbox

Option

Settings

Default paper type

■

Envelope C5

■

Envelope DL

■

Envelope B5

■

Custom

■

B5 (JIS)

■

Postcard (JIS)

■

Double Postscard (JIS)

■

8.5x13 (Foolscap)

■

16K

■

Bond

■

Cardstock (106–163 g/m2)

■

Colored

■

Envelope

■

Glossy

■

Heavy Glossy

■

Heavy (90-105g/m2)

■

Manual feed

Tray 1 size

244

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

■

Labels

■

Letterhead

■

Light (<75gm2)

■

Plain; default setting

■

Preprinted

■

Prepunched

■

Recycled

■

Tough Paper

■

Transparency

■

Off; default setting

■

Any; default setting

■

Letter

■

Legal

ENWW

Option

Tray 1 type

The HP Toolbox

Table 6-4 Paper Handling options and settings (continued)
Settings
■

■

Executive

■

B5 (ISO)

■

Envelope #10

■

Envelope Monarch

■

Envelope C5

■

Envelope DL

■

Envelope B5

■

Custom

■

B5 (JIS)

■

Postcard (JIS)

■

Double Postscard (JIS)

■

8.5x13 (Foolscap)

■

16K

■

Any; default setting

■

Bond

■

Cardstock (106–163 g/m2)

■

Colored

■

Envelope

■

Glossy

■

Heavy Glossy

■

Heavy (90-105g/m2)

■

ENWW

■

Labels

■

Letterhead

■

Light (<75gm2)

■

Plain

■

Preprinted

■

Prepunched

■

Recycled

■

Tough Paper

■

Transparency

Configuration options

245

Table 6-4 Paper Handling options and settings (continued)

The HP Toolbox

Option

Settings

Tray 2 size

■

Any; default setting

■

Letter

■

Legal

■

Executive

■

B5 (ISO)

■

B5 (JIS)

■

8.5x13 (Foolscap)

■

Any; default setting

■

Bond

■

Colored

■

Heavy (90-105g/m2)

■

Letterhead

■

Light (<75gm2)

■

Plain

■

Preprinted

■

Prepunched

■

Recycled

Tray 2 type

Print Quality
Use this screen to change the print quality defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

246

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-52 Print Quality screen
The following table shows the options and settings for the Print Quality screen.
Table 6-5 Print Quality options and settings
Option

Settings

Color Calibration
Power On Calibration

ENWW

■

Never

■

Always

■

After 5 minutes

Configuration options

247

Table 6-5 Print Quality options and settings (continued)

The HP Toolbox

Option

Settings

Calibration Timing

Calibrate Now

■

After 15 minutes; default setting

■

After 30 minutes

■

After 60 minutes

■

Never

■

12 hours

■

24 hours

■

48 hours; default setting

■

96 hours

■

168 hours

Check box (select or clear)

Optimize
Cleaning Pass

More ITB Current

Less ITB Current

More T2 Current

Less T2 Current

24 Hour Rotation

Restore Optimize

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

■

Off; default setting

Grayscale Printing
Monochrome RET

248

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Print Density
The following illustration shows the Print Density screen

Figure 6-53 Print Density screen
The following table shows the options and settings for the Print Density screen.
Table 6-6 Print Density options and settings
Option

Settings

Contrasts

ENWW

Configuration options

249

Table 6-6 Print Density options and settings (continued)

The HP Toolbox

Option

Settings

Cyan density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Magenta density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Yellow density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Black density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Cyan density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Magenta density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Yellow density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Black density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Cyan density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Magenta density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Yellow density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Black density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Cyan density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Magenta density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Highlights

Midtones

Shadows

250

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Option

Settings

Yellow density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

Black density

■

-8, -7, -6, -5, -4, -3, -2, -1, 0, 1, 2, 3, 4. 5, 6, 7, 8; 0 is the
default setting

The HP Toolbox

Table 6-6 Print Density options and settings (continued)

Print Modes
Use this screen to change the print mode defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product. After you
change the Print Modes settings, click Apply to save the changes to your HP LaserJet all-in-one
product.

ENWW

Configuration options

251

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-54 Print Modes screen
A print mode is a special setting that controls the print speed and the fuser temperature of the HP
LaserJet all-in-one product. The product speed and fuser temperature are adjusted to match the print
mode that you select, which can result in better print quality when printing on certain media types. The
following list shows the print modes listed in the drop-down menu for each media type:

252

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

NOTE Not all of the print modes can be adjusted from the Print Modes screen.
■

Heavy Mode

■

Normal Mode

■

Light Mode

■

Cardstock Mode

■

Transparency Mode

■

Envelope Mode

■

Label Mode

■

Glossy Mode

■

Heavy Glossy Mode

■

Tough Paper Mode

■

Extra Heavy Mode

■

Toner Mode

■

Slow/Less Toner Mode

■

Dry Media Mode

■

Humid Mode

■

Heavy/Humid Mode

■

Dry/Light Mode

■

Dry/Less Toner Mode

■

Heavy Gloss Offset Mode

■

Heavy Gloss/Less Toner Mode

■

OHT High Mode

■

Light Media Waves Mode

■

Gloss Offset Mode

The following table shows the media types that the product supports and the default fuser mode for each
type.
Table 6-7 Print mode settings and default fuser modes

ENWW

Media type

Fuser mode default setting

Plain

Normal Mode

Preprinted

Normal Mode

Letterhead

Normal Mode

Configuration options

253

Table 6-7 Print mode settings and default fuser modes (continued)

The HP Toolbox

Media type

Fuser mode default setting

Transparency

Transparency Mode

Prepunched

Normal Mode

Labels

Label Mode

Bond

Heavy Mode

Recycled

Normal Mode

Color

Normal Mode

Light <75 g/m2

Light Mode

Heavy (90 to 105 g/m2)

Heavy Mode

Cardstock (105 to 163 g/m2)

Cardstock Mode

Glossy (75-105 g/m2

Glossy Mode

Heavy Glossy (106-163 g/m2

Heavy Glossy Mode

Tough Paper

Tough Paper Mode

Envelope

Envelope Mode

NOTE Narrow and heavy media can cause the printer to print more slowly.
Clicking Restore Modes and then clicking Apply causes the device to set all of the print modes to the
original factory defaults.
System Setup
Use this screen to change the system defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

254

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-55 System Setup screen
The following device languages are available for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840:

ENWW

■

Czech

■

Danish

■

German

■

English

■

Spanish

■

Finnish

■

French

■

Hungarian

■

Italian

■

Dutch

■

Norwegian

■

Polish

Configuration options

255

The HP Toolbox

■

Portuguese

■

Russian

■

Swedish

■

Turkish

The following Jam recovery settings are available:
■

Auto; default setting

■

Off

The following Auto continue settings are available:
■

■

Off; default setting

From this screen, you can apply percentage values from 1 to 20 for the Cartridge low threshold and
the Drum low threshold.
You can set the Connection time-out (I/O) setting to any value between 5 and 7200 seconds.
Volumes
Use this screen to change the volume levels for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-56 Volumes screen

256

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Date/Time
Use this screen to change the date and time settings for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-57 Date/Time screen
NOTE Automatic is selected by default, but the option will not be initiated until you click
Apply. The setting does not remain in place over time; you must click Automatic and Apply
each time you want to synchronize your HP LaserJet all-in-one product with your computer clock.

Service
Use this screen to change the service settings for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

ENWW

Configuration options

257

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-58 Service screen
If a password has been (for instance, to protect the memory-card or network settings) and lost, the
factory settings for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 must be restored and a new password
assigned. To restore factory settings, click the Restore button under Resets.
Performing an operation to restore factory settings returns all device settings to their original default
state.

258

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

■

If Error

■

At End of Call

■

Never; default setting

The HP Toolbox

Automatic trace print values are as follows:

Power save time settings are as follows:
■

2 hours

■

4 hours

■

8 hours; default setting

■

12 hours

Device Polling
The following illustration shows the Device Polling screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

259

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-59 Device Polling Settings screen
Clicking Turn off device polling on the Device Polling Settings screen does not turn off the
HP Toolbox, but acts like a master switch to turn off all polling. You can then go back into the HP Toolbox
and turn off individual components such as the Scan-to functionality or some fax functionality.
Save/Restore
Use this screen to save all of the device settings to a file on your computer. You can also load the settings
that have been saved into your HP LaserJet all-in-one product from this screen.

260

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-60 Save / Restore Settings screen
When you click Save, the Save as dialog box might be hidden. Look behind your browser window or
on the task bar.
You cannot restore settings that were saved from a previous HP product. You can restore only settings
that were saved from an HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product.
NOTE The HP Toolbox will not function until settings have been fully loaded and the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product control panel returns to the Ready state.

Print Settings tab
The Print Settings tab contains the following screens:
●

Printing

●

PCL5e

●

PostScript

●

Memory Card

Printing
Use this screen to change the printing defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

ENWW

Configuration options

261

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-61 Printing screen
The following table shows the options and settings available on the Printing screen.
Table 6-8 Printing options and settings
Option

Settings

Copies

Type a value from 1 to 999.

Wide A4

■

Yes

■

No; default setting

■

Dark

■

Regular; default setting

■

Landscape

■

Portrait; default setting

■

Auto; default setting

■

PCL5e

■

PostScript

Courier font

Orientation

Personality

PCL5e
Use this screen to change the PCL defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

262

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Figure 6-62 PCL5e screen
PostScript
Use this screen to change the PostScript defaults for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-63 PostScript screen
Memory Card
Use this screen to enable and disable the memory-card reader.

ENWW

Configuration options

263

The HP Toolbox

NOTE On some HP printers, the HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver is typically used for
monochrome (black and white) printers. The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, a
color printer, supports this driver as well, even though the driver is not included in the printingsystem software. The HP Traditional PCL 5c Driver is not supported.

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-64 Memory Card Printing Settings screen
NOTE The Memory Card Printing Settings screen is available only on the HP Color
LaserJet 2840.
On the Memory Card Printing Settings screen, you can change the settings associated with printing
photos that are stored on memory cards.
The Enable memory cards check box is selected by default. Clear it to disable the memory-card reader.
The settings on this screen can be password-protected by setting a password on the Password screen
of the Network Settings tab.
The following Photo image size settings are available:
■

Wallet (2.5x3.25 in.)

■

3x4 in.

■

3.5.5 in.

■

4x6 in.

■

5x7 in.

■

8x10 in.

■

Full Page

The Photo Number of Copies setting allows you to type in values from 1 to 99. The default setting is
1 copy.
The following values are available for the Photo output color option:

264

■

Color

■

Monochrome

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

NOTE Because the HP Color LaserJet 2820 does not have a fax component, the HP Toolbox
for the HP Color LaserJet 2820 does not have this tab.
The Fax Settings tab contains the following screens:
●

General

●

Fax Send

●

Fax Receive

●

Fax Setup Wizard

General
The General Settings screen allows you to configure general fax settings (common to both Send and
Receive) on your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-65 General Settings screen
Fax Send
Use this screen to configure the fax-send settings on your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.
Use the Fax header fields to print information in the fax header, including your company name, your fax
number, and your phone number.

ENWW

Configuration options

265

The HP Toolbox

Fax Settings tab

The HP Toolbox

Use the Reporting and Error Correction settings to receive reports about fax functions. The following
settings are available:
■

Error correction (ECM); enabled by default

■

V.34; enabled by default

■

Automatic log printing; enabled by default

■

Fax Call Report

The Fax Call Report option has the following settings:

266

■

Every fax error; default setting

■

Send fax error

■

Receive fax error

■

Every fax

■

Send fax only

■

Never

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-66 Send screen
Fax Receive
Use this screen to configure the fax receive settings on your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.
The Resolution option has the following settings:
■

Standard

■

Fine; default setting

■

Super fine

■

Photo

The Contrast option has a series of settings from Light to Dark.

ENWW

Configuration options

267

The HP Toolbox

The Dial mode option has the following settings:
■

Pulse

■

Tone; default setting

The Redial option has the following settings:
■

On Busy; enabled by default

■

On no-answer

■

On communication errors; enabled by default

If you must use a dial prefix to send faxes, select the Dial prefix check box and type the dial-prefix
number in the field.
Select the Billing codes check box to enable billing codes for fax-send jobs.
The Fax from glass page size option has the following settings:
■

■

Letter; default setting

Figure 6-67 Receive screen

268

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Fax Setup Wizard
The Answer ring pattern option has the following settings:
■

All rings; default setting

■

Single ring

■

Double ring

■

Triple ring

■

double and triple ring

The Fax Setup Wizard appears after you install the software and restart your computer. HP
recommends that you run the Wizard to configure your fax settings for both the software and the HP
LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-68 Fax Setup Wizard – Welcome screen
NOTE After you install the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software, the Fax Setup Wizard
opens automatically. Run the Wizard even if your HP LaserJet all-in-one fax parameters have
already been configured. The HP Toolbox settings that you provide in the Fax Setup Wizard are
used to run other faxing features, such as the fax cover page.
Click Next to continue. The Fax identification: User Information screen appears.

ENWW

Configuration options

269

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-69 Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Identification: User Information screen
Type your name and, if desired, your company name in the appropriate fields.
In this and the following screens, click Back to return to the previous screen, or Cancel to stop the Fax
Setup Wizard.
Click Next to continue. The Fax Setup Dial prefix screen appears.

270

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-70 Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup: Dial prefix screen
If you do not need to dial a prefix number in order to send a fax, select No, I do not need to enter any
numbers before the fax number.
If you need to dial a prefix number in order to send a fax, select Yes, I need to enter a dial prefix before
the fax number, and type the number in the Dial prefix field.
Click Next to continue. The Fax Setup: Distinctive Ring screen appears.

ENWW

Configuration options

271

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-71 Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup: Distinctive Ring screen
If you have a distinctive-ring service, select Yes, I have a distinctive ring service. If you do not, select
No, I do not have a distinctive ring service. Click Next to continue. the Fax Setup: Fax Line screen
appears.

Figure 6-72 Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup: Fax Line screen

272

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Figure 6-73 Fax Setup Wizard – Fax Setup Confirmation screen
If you do not want to confirm these settings, click Back to return to previous screens.
Click Next to continue. The Fax Identification: Fax & Voice Number screen appears.

Figure 6-74 Fax Setup Wizard – Fax identification: Fax & Voice Number screen

ENWW

Configuration options

273

The HP Toolbox

If you have a dedicated fax line, select Yes, I have a dedicated fax line. If you do not, select No, I do
not have a dedicated fax line. Click Next to continue. The Fax Setup Confirmation screen appears.

The HP Toolbox

Type the required fax number in the Fax number field. If you choose, you can also type your phone
number in the Phone number (voice calls) field.

Figure 6-75 Fax Setup Wizard – Finish Fax Setup screen
Click Finish to complete the fax setup process. The Settings Saved screen appears.

Figure 6-76 Fax Setup Wizard – Settings Saved screen
Click Back to Toolbox to return to the HP Toolbox screens. Click Close This Window to exit the
browser window.

274

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox

Copy Settings tab
The Copy Settings tab contains the following screens:
●

Copying

●

Reduce / Enlarge

Copying
Use the Copying screen to configure general copy settings for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-77 Copying screen
The following table shows the options and settings that are available for the Copying screen.
Table 6-9 Copying options and settings
Option

Settings

Copy quality

■

Text; default setting

■

Draft

■

Mixed

■

Film photo

■

Picture

Contrast

Select one of 11 options between Light and Dark; default
setting is in the middle

Collation

■

Off

■

On; default setting

Number of copies

ENWW

Type a value between 1 and 99.

Configuration options

275

The HP Toolbox

Reduce / Enlarge
Use the Reduce/Enlarge screen to configure the default size and format copy settings for your HP
LaserJet all-in-one product.

Figure 6-78 Reduce / Enlarge screen
The following table shows the options and settings that are available for the Reduce / Enlarge screen.
Table 6-10 Reduce / Enlarge options and settings
Option

Settings

Standard sizes; default

■

A4 to Letter (97%)

■

Fit to page

■

Full Page (91%)

■

Legal to A4 (83%)

■

Legal to Letter (97%)

■

Original (100%); default setting

If you select Pages per sheet, you can also select either of the
following illustrations:

Custom

■

Portrait; default setting

■

Landscape

Type a percentage value between 25 and 400

Network Settings
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one contains on-board networking support. It does not
require the use an external Jetdirect box for network connectivity. By using the Network Settings tab,
you can configure the network settings for your product.

276

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

For network installations, the HP Toolbox communicates with the device by using the network settings
displayed on the Network Settings screens. The following screens can be opened by clicking the menu
items on the left of the Network Settings tab:
●

IP Configuration

●

Advanced

●

SNMP

●

Network Configuration

●

Password

IP Configuration
The IP Configuration screen shows the settings necessary for basic TCP/IP network configuration.
After you change these settings, you must click Apply to save the changes to the device. Changes to
these settings causes the device to restart.
The following illustration shows the IP Configuration screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

277

The HP Toolbox

See the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Advanced Network Reference Guide for more information
about the settings on the Network Settings tab.

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-79 IP Configuration screen
The IP Configuration screen shows the host name and domain of the device. By default, the device
uses automatic IP configuration and DNS Server. Use this screen to configure the TCP/IP address and
DNS Server manually.
The following IP Address Configuration options are available:

278

■

Automatic IP. This option is selected by default. It causes the device to obtain a TCP/IP address
from a Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server, BOOTP server, or AUTOIP.

■

Manual IP. Select Manual IP to manually specify an Internet Protocol (IP) address (also known as
a static IP address). If you select this option, you must specify an IP address in the IP address,
Subnet mask, and Default gateway fields.

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

■

Automatic DNS Server. This option is selected by default. It causes the device to automatically
obtain network addresses for DNS servers from the network. If you select this option, a DHCP server
provides this information.

■

Manual DNS Server. Select this option to manually specify network addresses for DNS servers
used by the computer. If you select this option, you must type the IP address for your DNS server
in Preferred DNS server field. If you are not sure which IP address to use, contact your network
administrator.
In the Alternate DNS server field, you can also specify the IP address for the alternate or secondary
DNS server for this computer. This server is used if the DNS server specified in Preferred DNS
server is unavailable.

Advanced
The Advanced screen is shown in the following illustration.

Figure 6-80 Advanced Network Settings screen
The following table shows the options and settings that are available for the Advanced screen.

ENWW

Configuration options

279

The HP Toolbox

The following DNS Address Configuraiton options are available:

The HP Toolbox

Table 6-11 Advanced Network Settings options and settings
Option

Settings

Enabled Features

■

DHCP; enabled by default

■

BOOTP; enabled by default

■

AUTOIP; enabled by default

■

Memory card sharing (CIFS); enabled by default

■

9100 Printing; enabled by default

■

LPD Printing; enabled by default

■

HP SLP Discovery; enabled by default

■

Auto negotiation; default setting

■

Manual negotiation

Link Speed and Duplex

Automatic Crossover

■

Link speed: 10 megabits per second (Mbps) or 100
Mbps

■

Duplex: Full or Half

■

Enable; default setting

■

Off

SNMP
The SNMP screen is shown in the following illustration.

280

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-81 SNMP screen
The following options are available on the SNMP screen:
■

ENWW

Enable SNMP v1 read-write access. Select this option to enable SNMP V1 agents on the printer.
Custom community names can be configured to control management access to the printer.
■

Set Community name: Type the SNMP Set Community Name (password) to allow SNMP
information to be configured (or written) on the printer.

■

Confirm Set Community name: Retype the SNMP Set Community Name (password) to allow
SNMP information to be configured (or written) on the printer.

■

Get Community name: Type the SNMP Get Community Name (password) to allow SNMP
information to be read from the printer.

■

Confirm Get Community name: Retype the SNMP Get Community Name (password) to allow
SNMP information to be read from the printer.

■

Disable SNMP v1 default Get Community name of “public”. Select this option to disable the
default Get community name "public". If you select this option, you will need to type values in
the Get Community name and Confirm Get Community name fields.

■

Enable SNMP v1 read-only access (uses “public” for the Get Community value). Select this
option to enable the SNMP V1 agents on the printer, but limit access to read-only. Write-access is
disabled. The default Get Community name "public" is automatically enabled.

■

Disable SNMP v1. Select this option to disable the SNMP V1 agents on the printer, which is
recommended for secure environments. If SNMP V1 is disabled, some port monitors or discovery
utilities may not operate properly.

Configuration options

281

The HP Toolbox

Network Configuration
The Network Configuration screen is shown in the following illustration.

282

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-82 Network Configuration screen

ENWW

Configuration options

283

The HP Toolbox

The Network Configuration screen provides an overview of the network settings that have been
enabled for the device. The settings appear under the following headings:
■

Network Hardware Configuration

■

Enabled Features

■

TCP/IP

■

SNMP

■

Network Statistics

A Print link and icon appear in the upper right corner of the screen. Click the link or icon to open a print
dialog box and print out a copy of the network configuration settings.

Password
The Password screen is shown in the following illustration.

Figure 6-83 Password screen
Network administrators can set user passwords to protect network settings. Once a password is set,
only users who know the password have access to the Network Settings tab. If a password has been
set, users are prompted to type the password. If the typed-in password matches the password stored
in the device, users can navigate through the Network Settings screens and make changes to the
settings. Users who do not type the correct password within three attempts are not allowed access to
the Network Settings screens.
If the password is lost or forgotten, the factory settings for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 must
be restored and a new password assigned. To restore factory settings, see Figure 6-58 Service screen
NOTE The same user password is used to protect the settings for the Memory Card screen
on the Print Settings tab.

Other screens
The following table lists screens that are also available through the HP Toolbox.

284

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Access

About HP Toolbox screen

Click the About Toolbox link that appears in the upper left
corner of the HP Toolbox screens, just beneath the HP logo.
This link is not available on any of the HP EWS screens that
appear when you click the Device Settings button.

Select Device screen

Click the Select a device link in the Toolbox Links box that
appears on all HP Toolbox screens. If only one device is
available, clicking this link opens the Device Status screen on
the HP Toolbox Status tab.

Current Alerts screen

Click the View current alerts link in the Toolbox Links box
that appears on all HP Toolbox screens.

Text-only Toolbox screen

Click the Text only page link in the Toolbox Links box that
appears on all HP Toolbox screens.

HP Instant Support

Click the HP Instant Support link in the Other Links box that
appears on all HP Toolbox and HP EWS screens.

Product Registration screen

Click the Product Registration link in the Other Links box
that appears on all HP Toolbox and HP EWS screens.

Order Supplies screen

Click the Order Supplies link in the Other Links box that
appears on all HP Toolbox and HP EWS screens.

Product Support screen

Click the Product Support link in the Other Links box that
appears on all HP Toolbox and HP EWS screens.

About HP Toolbox
This screen contains information concerning the versions of the various HP Toolbox components
installed on your computer.

Figure 6-84 About toolbox screen

ENWW

Configuration options

285

The HP Toolbox

Screen

The HP Toolbox

Select Device
Use the Device Select screen to select and open the individual set of tools for your HP LaserJet all-inone product. This screen is displayed as a list of the HP LaserJet all-in-one products that are available
to the HP Toolbox. The items listed in the Information or Options section appear for each all-in-one
product on the list.

Current Alerts
The Current Alerts screen provides you with a list of all the current alerts for all HP LaserJet all-in-one
products. This is a summary of all the alerts you have been notified about that currently still exist on the
product.

Figure 6-85 Current Alerts screen
When an alert has been cleared (i.e. the condition has been fixed), the alert does not appear in the
Current Alerts screen the next time it is displayed. The Current Alerts screen is a static screen that
does not refresh automatically. To update the list of alerts, you must click your browser's Refresh button.
Each alert can have no links or several links associated with it. These links are used to provide more
information or troubleshooting capabilities for that specific alert. Some alerts have a More Info link that
takes you to a screen in the user guide that provides troubleshooting or other information about that
specific alert. If no information is available about that specific alert, the link does not appear. Some
products may have additional links for specific alerts.

HP Toolbox – text only
Clicking the Text Only link opens the Text Only page. The Text Only page contains links to all of the
individual screens within the HP Toolbox, both within the HP Toolbox section and the Device Settings
section. This screen also contains links to the About HP Toolbox screen, the Device Select screen,
the Current Alerts screen, and the Order Supplies screen.
When you click one of the links, that screen is brought up in a simplified structure, which does not display
the header banner and associated information. Each of these screens has a Return to main menu link,
which allows you to go back to the main text-only Toolbox screen

286

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Figure 6-86 Text-only Toolbox screen

Figure 6-87 Text-only screen – sample expanded section

Product Registration
The Product Registration link connects you to a web page that helps you register your HP LaserJet
all-in-one product.

ENWW

Configuration options

287

The HP Toolbox

Click the Always use Text Only page when accessing Toolbox check box and then click Apply to
make the text-only Toolbox screen your default screen when you open the HP Toolbox.

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-88 Product Registration screen

Order Supplies
The Order Supplies link connects you to a web page that helps you order supplies online from a reseller
of your choice. The supplies you need for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product are pre-selected. You
can change quantities or select additional items. Your items are dropped into the shopping cart, ready
for checkout, ensuring that the correct supplies are ordered through your selected reseller.

288

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-89 Order Supplies screen

Product Support
The Product Support link connects you to a web page that helps get online support for your HP LaserJet
all-in-one product.

ENWW

Configuration options

289

The HP Toolbox
Figure 6-90 Product Support screen

290

Chapter 6

The HP Toolbox

ENWW

Software installation for Windows
operating systems

NOTE This chapter covers installation about the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software for
Windows only. For information about Macintosh installations, see Macintosh software
overview.
This chapter provides information about the following topics:

ENWW

●

Installation overview

●

Installation options

●

Printing-system software installation

●

Uninstall

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

291

Installation overview
NOTE The ReadIRIS software uses a separate installer that comes on a separate CD.
The software for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products comes on a single CD. On
Windows systems, the Setup program installs the HP LaserJet all-in-one software from the CD onto the
hard disk and updates Windows files.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

During installation, the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product presents two options in
Windows 2000 and Windows XP OSs:
■

Minimum Installation

■

Typical Installation

Only a Minimum Installation occurs in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me, and no option appears. The
following list shows the components of each installation.
■

■

292

Typical installation
■

HP Director

■

HP Image Zone

■

HP Document Viewer

■

HP Toolbox

■

HP Send Fax (HP Color LaserJet 2830 and HP Color LaserJet 2840 only)

■

HP Extended Capabilities (optional)

■

HP Software Update

■

HP PCL 6 Unidriver (color) and HP PCL 6 Unidriver (black and white) in Windows 2000 and
Windows XP; HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me

■

Scan driver (TWAIN and WIA for Windows XP)

■

Fax driver (HP Color LaserJet 2830 and HP Color LaserJet 2840 only)

■

Mass storage support for memory-card access over mapped drives (HP Color LaserJet 2840
only)

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide

Minimum installation
■

HP PCL 6 Unidriver (color) and HP PCL 6 Unidriver (black and white) in Windows 2000 and
Windows XP; HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver (color) in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me

■

Scan driver

■

Mass storage support over mapped drives (HP Color LaserJet 2840 only)

■

Fax Setup utility (HP Color LaserJet 2830 and HP Color LaserJet 2840 only)

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

For all of the supported platforms, each install option presents a series of query dialog boxes that guide
you through the installation process. You are asked to provide information about your computer
environment. The Installer guides you through the installation, whether you are configuring a directlyconnected or networked HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

NOTE The HP Color LaserJet 2820 all-in-one product does not support faxing.
If you want to change the configuration settings, or if changes to your telephone service or computer
environment require new settings, the product-configuration software provides a simple, intuitive
interface for updating configuration settings. This is also a convenient alternative to specifying settings
through the product control panel.

ENWW

Installation overview

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

The installer can detect hardware and network connections and help guide the installation. For instance,
if the installer detects an HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one product, it can automatically configure the
software connection to that printer. This saves several steps. If the installer detects fax capabilities or
a network, it can also direct you to set up those features.

293

Installation options
The HP LaserJet all-in-one software can be used with the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one
products in the following configurations:

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

■

Install the full HP LaserJet all-in-one software on a computer that is directly connected to the product
through a USB port. This option provides the most product functionality, and you can share your
HP LaserJet all-in-one product printing capabilities with other users on your network.

■

Install the HP LaserJet all-in-one software on a computer that has access to a network to which the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 is connected.

Windows installation for direct connections
Use the following instructions to install the product software on a computer that is running
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP (32-bit only).
NOTE Set up and turn on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one before installing
the software. Do not connect the HP LaserJet all-in-one product to the computer until the software
installation program prompts you.
NOTE You must have Administrator privileges (on start and restart) to install the software on
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
1

Quit all open programs.

Insert the HP LaserJet all-in-one software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If your CD-ROM does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse
to and double-click the HPSETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.

Click Install software and follow the onscreen prompts.

If you are prompted to restart your computer, click Yes.

After installation of the software, dialog boxes appear that allow you to print a test page, register
your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 over the Web, and set up faxes (HP Color LaserJet 2830
and HP Color LaserJet 2840 only).

Setting up Windows sharing (peer-to-peer networking)
This section describes procedures for using Windows sharing to make the product available to network
users when the product is directly connected to a computer.
Peer-to-peer networking is a feature of Microsoft operating systems, not of HP print drivers. If these
procedures are not successful, or for more information about peer-to-peer networking procedures,
contact Microsoft at the following Web site:
www.microsoft.com

294

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

NOTE Using Windows sharing, the person who uses the computer that is directly connected to
the product can allow other users on the network to print to the product.
When the product is shared, install the print drivers on all of the computers that you want to be
able to print to the product.

When you have set up the host computer to share your HP LaserJet all-in-one product, you must also
configure the client computers. For information about setting up the client computers for other network
users who want to use the product, see Setting up client computers running Windows 98 SE,
Windows Me, or Windows 2000 or Setting up client computers running Windows XP.
Setting up the host computer running Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows NT 4.0, or
Windows 2000
At the computer that is directly connected to the product, perform the following steps:
1

Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

In the printer list, right-click the icon for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product, and then click Sharing.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

The client computers will have print-only functionality for the HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

NOTE If Sharing does not appear on the menu, you must first enable printer sharing for
Windows 98 SE or Windows Me.
3

On the Sharing tab, click the Share As option button, and then type a name for the product in the
Share Name field. Click OK.

Setting up the host computer running Windows XP
At the computer that is directly connected to the product, perform the following steps.
1

Click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.

In the printer list, right-click the icon for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product, and then click Sharing.

On the Sharing tab, click the Share this printer option button, and then type a name for the product
in the Share Name field. Click OK.

Setting up client computers running Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, or Windows 2000

ENWW

Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

Double-click the Add Printer icon to open the Add Printer wizard.

Click Next to start the wizard.

Click the Network Printer option button, and then click Next.

Installation options

295

Type the path and share name of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product to which
you want to connect.
-orClick Browse and navigate to find the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product to
which you want to connect.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Click Yes or No when asked if you want to use this printer as your default printer for Windows-based
programs, and then click Next.

Click Finish to complete the installation and close the Add Printer wizard.
NOTE You might need the product software CD to complete the print driver installations.

Setting up client computers running Windows XP
1

Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers and Faxes.

In the column to the left, under Printer Tasks, click Add a printer to open the Add Printer wizard.

Click Next to start the wizard.

Click A network printer or a printer attached to another computer, and then click Next.

Type the path and share name of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one product to which
you want to connect, and then click Next.

Click Yes or No when asked if you want to use this printer as your default printer for Windows-based
programs, and then click Next.

Click Finish to complete the installation and close the Add Printer wizard.

Windows Installation for computers on a network
This section provides information about the following topics:
●

Network setup

●

Windows installation instructions for networked computers

Network setup
NOTE Set up, turn on, and connect the HP LaserJet all-in-one product to the network before
installing the software.

296

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

To connect an HP LaserJet all-in-one product to a network, use the following instructions:
1

Connect the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 to the network.

Turn on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840.

To print a configuration page from the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840, press MENU. Press
the > button until Reports appears on the control panel. Press the ENTER button. Press the > button
until Config report appears on the control panel. Press the ENTER button.

To complete the product installation, install the HP LaserJet all-in-one software. Use the information
from the test pages to specify the network variables during installation.

Windows installation instructions for networked computers
Each computer that has the HP LaserJet all-in-one software installed can use all of the product features
that are available over a network connection except for the Receive faxes to this computer feature.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

NOTE You must complete the power-up sequence in this order or the installer discovery
utility fails to recognize the product. It may take a few minutes for the device to obtain a TCP/
IP address.

To install the HP LaserJet all-in-one software on networked Windows operating systems, use the
following instructions:
NOTE You must have administrator privileges (upon start and restart) to install the software on
Windows 2000 or Windows XP.
1

Quit all open programs.

Insert the HP LaserJet all-in-one software CD into the CD-ROM drive.
NOTE If the CD-ROM does not start automatically, click Start, click Run, and then browse
to and double-click the HPSETUP.EXE file in the root directory of the CD.

ENWW

Click Install software and follow the onscreen prompts.

When the Installer software prompts you to select how the printer will be connected, select
Connected via the network, and then click Next. Follow the onscreen instructions.

If you are prompted to restart the computer, click Yes.

Installation options

297

Installing the print driver only
Use the following instructions to install only the print driver.

Print driver installation for Windows 98 SE or Windows Me
You might need to install the Install Network Printer Wizard to complete the following procedure. To
download the Install Network Printer Wizard from HP's Web site, go to www.hp.com/go and search for
the wizard.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

From the Start menu, click Settings and then click Printers.

Double-click Add Printer and then click Next.

When asked if the product is a local or network printer, click Network Printer, and then click Next.

Click Have Disk on the wizard screen that appears.

Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive. Navigate to the X:\Drivers\WIN98_Me/ folder
(where X is the letter of your CD-ROM drive).

Double-click the PCL6 or PS folder, depending on which driver that you want to install, and then
double-click the .INF file that you find in that folder.

Complete the installation. When prompted, print a test page to ensure that the print driver is installed
correctly.

Print-driver installation for Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003
NOTE If a port is not available for installation in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or
Windows Server 2003, you can create a port, click Have Disk, and insert the printing-system
software CD that came with your product.
1

From the Start menu, click Settings, and then click Printers (Windows 2000) or Printers and
Faxes (Windows XP).

Double-click Add Printer, and then click Next.

When asked if the product is a local or network printer, select local, and then click Next.
NOTE Use of a local port is recommended, if it is available. If no local port is available,
create a new port.

298

You might need to first select the printer from the list of printers or type a TCP/IP address. If the
print driver is not available, the Add Printer Wizard dialog box appears. Click Have Disk on the
wizard screen.

Insert the CD into the drive.

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (color), navigate to the root folder of the CD (where X is the letter
of the CD-ROM drive) and click OK. The Install Printer Software dialog box appears. Select the
driver for your product and click OK.
To install the HP PCL 6 Unidriver (black and white) or the or the PS Emulation Driver, click
Browse. Navigate to the X:\Drivers\Win2000_XP folder and click Open. The Install from Disk
dialog box appears. Click OK. Select the driver for your product and click Next.
Complete the installation. When prompted, print a test page to ensure that the print driver is installed
correctly.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

ENWW

Installation options

299

Printing-system software installation
This section contains information about the following topics:
●

Animated Install Guide

●

Printing-system software installation

Animated Install Guide

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

When you insert your printing-system software CD into the CD-ROM drive, the Animated Install Guide
starts automatically. The Begin Setup screen appears, as shown in the following illustration.

Figure 7-1 Animated Install Guide – Welcome screen
Click Begin Setup to initiate a series of screens that show you how to prepare your HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 for software installation. You can click the arrows in the lower-right corner of
the screen to view animated illustrations of each step.
When setup is complete, the Congratulations! Your all-in-one setup is complete screen appears.

300

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems
Figure 7-2 Congratulations! Your all-in-one setup is complete screen
If your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 has already been set up or is already installed on a network,
click Install Software to install the print drivers and other software features.

Printing-system software installation
NOTE HP recommends that you install the software before connecting the HP LaserJet all-inone product to the computer (software-first installation). These instructions are for a softwarefirst installation.
Use these instructions the first time you install the HP LaserJet all-in-one software.
The following sections describe the dialog box options that appear during the HP LaserJet all-in-one
software installation on Windows operating systems.
NOTE In the installation sequences described in this section, the product name HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 represents the specific HP LaserJet all-in-one product that you are
installing.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

301

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems
Figure 7-3 HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 CD Browser screen
The first dialog box includes the following command buttons:
Install HP Color LaserJet Software. This link contains the initial command for installing the software.
Click this link to close the CD Browser and the initial installation wizard and open the Welcome to the
HP LaserJet all-in-one Setup Wizard screen. For information about installing the printing-system
software over a USB connection, see Figure 7-6 USB install – Welcome to the Install Wizard dialog
box. For information about installing the printing-system software over a network connection, see
Network installation dialog box options for Windows
Animated Getting Started Guide. Click this option to open an animated installation guide that shows
you how to install and set up your new HP LaserJet all-in-one product.
Register Product. Click this option to open the HP web registration page through your Web browser.
View Documentation. Click this option to got to the HP Color LaserJet documentation screen.
Online support. Click this option to go to the Online Support screen.

302

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems
Figure 7-4 HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 documentation
View User Guide: Click this option to open the .CHM (online help) version of the HP Color LaserJet
2820/2830/2840 User Guide.
Print User Guide: Click this option to open Adobe Acrobat Reader and see a printable version of the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide in .PDF format.
Advanced Networking Guide. Click this option to open Adobe Acrobat Reader and see the
printable HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Advanced Network Reference Guide in .PDF format.
Install Notes: Click this option to open the Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 All-in-one
Install Notes in .HTM format.
Click back to return to the CD Browser screen.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

303

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems
Figure 7-5 HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Online Support
Click Product Supportto open another screen where you can select the product for which you want
information: the HP Color LaserJet 2820, HP Color LaserJet 2830, or HP Color LaserJet 2840. Clicking
any of these options starts your Web browser and opens the product support page on the HP Web site.
Click hp.com to start your computer's Web browser and open the hp.com Web site.
Click Order Supplies to start your Web browser and open the HP Web site to order supplies.
Click back to return to the CD browser screen.
Click exit to close the CD browser.

304

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

USB installation dialog box options for Windows

Figure 7-6 USB install – Welcome to the Install Wizard dialog box
Click Next to open the Check for recommended installation updates dialog box.
NOTE The Check for recommended installation updates dialog box appears only if the
installer detects that a network connection is available.
Click Cancel on any screen in the installation sequence to stop the installation. Click Back to return to
the previous screen.

Figure 7-7 USB install – Check for recommended installation updates (optional) dialog box

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

305

If you have Web access, you can click Yes to check for installation updates for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840. This step is optional.
Click No to continue the installation.
Click the following links to open a screen that provides further information:

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

■

Show the information that will be sent to HP

■

More information about installation updates

■

HP's Privacy Policy

Click No to continue the installation without checking for installation updates.

Figure 7-8 USB install – Installation Options dialog box
Select the Typical (Recommended) option to install the complete printing-system software, which
includes the following items:
■

Print drivers

■

Scan drivers

■

Mass storage driver

■

HP Image Zone

■

HP Document Viewer

■

HP Toolbox

■

HP Director

Select Minimum to install only the print, scan, and mass-storage drivers.
Click Details to find out if your system meets the recommended installation requirements. A sample
System Requirements Results dialog box is shown in the following illustration.

306

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-9 USB Install – sample System Requirements Results dialog box
NOTE In some cases, you can proceed with the installation even if your system does not meet
recommended requirements. The System Requirements Results screen in the foregoing
illustration shows a blocking condition that is preventing the installation from continuing, and the
Continue button is not available. When conditions allow, the Continue button is available and
installation can proceed despite the warning.
Click Retry to check again for minimum system requirements.
Click Continue to proceed with installation. The License Agreement dialog box appears.

Figure 7-10 USB install – License Agreement dialog box

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

307

Select I accept the terms in the license agreement, and then click Next to continue the installation.
The HP Extended Capabilities dialog box appears.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems
Figure 7-11 USB install – HP Extended Capabilities dialog box
If you select the Install HP Extended capabilities option, a dialog box appears two weeks after you
install the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, inviting you to participate in the HP Product
Survey Program.

Figure 7-12 Welcome to the HP Product Survey Program screen
If you select Do not install HP Extended capabilities, click Next to continue the installation. The
Destination Folder dialog box appears.

308

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-13 USB install – Destination Folder dialog box
The Destination Folder dialog box shows you where the printing-system software files are installed.
The default option creates an HP program group, which you can gain access to by clicking Start and
selecting Programs.
NOTE The destination-folder path might differ from what is shown in the illustration. If you
already have a product that installed HP Image Zone, the Change button does not appear, and
the installer automatically detects the location of the pre-existing software.
To change the location of the files to be installed, click the Change button and navigate to the location
that you want, and then click OK.
Click Next to open the Ready to Install dialog box.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

309

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-14 USB install – Ready to Install dialog box
If you do not want to add shortcut icons to your Desktop, click to clear the Add shortcuts to Desktop
check box.
NOTE The Add shortcuts to Desktop check box does not appear during a Minimum
Installation (Windows 2000 and Windows 2000).
To continue the installation, click Next. The Connection Type dialog box appears.

Figure 7-15 USB install – Connection Type dialog box

310

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Click Directly to this computer (a "direct connection"). The Connect Your Device Now dialog box
appears.

■

Yes, this time only

■

Yes, now and every time I connect a device

■

No, not this time

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

If you have Web access, you have three options for connecting to Windows Update, which will search
for updated software for your all-in-one:

Click Next to continue the installation.

Figure 7-16 USB install – Connect Your Device Now dialog box
When the Connect to your Device Now screen appears, make sure that your HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 is turned on. Then attach the USB cable to your computer and to the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840.
The Next button is enabled when you establish the USB connection. Click it to continue the installation.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

311

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-17 USB install – Device Found dialog box
The Device Found dialog box appears. Click Next to continue the installation.

Figure 7-18 USB install – Time Remaining dialog box
The Time Remaining dialog box appears. Click Next to continue the installation. It may take as long
as 35 minutes for this step to finish.
When this step of the installation is complete, the You must restart your computer dialog box appears.
Turn off and restart your computer.

312

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-19 USB install – Restart your computer dialog box
The You must restart your computer to finish the installation of your device dialog box appears.
Click Restart to continue the installation.

Figure 7-20 USB install – Congratulations! Software installation complete dialog box
When you start your machine again, the Congratulations! Software installation complete dialog box
appears. Click Finish to continue.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

313

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-21 USB install – Test Page dialog box
The Test Page dialog box indicates that a test page is being sent to the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840. If the test page prints successfully, click OK. If the test page fails to print,
click Troubleshoot. This option opens a series of dialog boxes that can help you troubleshoot the
problem.
The Sign Up Now screen appears.

Figure 7-22 Sign Up Now screen

314

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

If you have Web access, you can sign up to receive information from HP by following instructions on
the Sign Up Now screen. Click Next to open the HP Registration Web page. Follow the onscreen
instructions to register.

Figure 7-23 HP Registration screen

NOTE After you install the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software, the Fax Setup Wizard
opens automatically. Run the Wizard even if your HP LaserJet all-in-one fax parameters have
already been set up. The HP Toolbox that you provide in the Fax Setup Wizard to properly run
other features, such as the fax cover page. For more information, see the Fax Setup Wizard
section in this guide.

Network installation dialog box options for Windows
This section shows the dialog boxes that appear when you install the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 over a network connection.
Click the Back button, on any dialog box where it appears, to return to the dialog box. Click the
Cancel button, on any dialog box where it appears, to cancel the installation.
NOTE The sequence of dialog boxes might differ from what is shown here, depending on your
product, your network configuration, and the options that you select.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

315

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-24 Network install — Welcome dialog box
Click Next to continue. Between dialog boxes, a Current Progress screen appears. This screen shows
the progress of the installation and provides information about the number of subtasks that have been
completed in each step. The screen disappears, and a new dialog box appears that gives you the next
option in the installation sequence.

Figure 7-25 Network install – Sample screen showing current progress
The License Agreement dialog box appears.

316

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

When you select the I accept the terms in the license agreement option, the Next button becomes
available. Click Next. The HP Extended Capabilities dialog box appears.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-26 Network install – Licence Agreement dialog box

Figure 7-27 Network install – HP Extended Capabilities dialog box
If you select the Install HP Extended capabilities option, a dialog box appears two weeks after you
install the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, inviting you to participate in the HP Product
Survey Program.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

317

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-28 Welcome to the HP Product Survey Program screen
If you select the Do not install HP Extended capabilities option, click Next to continue the installation.
The Thank you for buying another HP product dialog box appears.

Figure 7-29 Network install – Thank you for buying another HP product! dialog box
This dialog box shows you the path where the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 printing-system
software will be installed. Click Next to continue the installation. The Ready to Install dialog box
appears.

318

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

If you do not want to add shortcut icons to your Desktop, click to clear the Add shortcuts to Desktop
check box. To continue the installation, click Next. The Connection Type dialog box appears.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-30 Network install – Ready to Install dialog box

Figure 7-31 Network install – Connection Type dialog box
Select Through the Network option, and then click Next to continue the installation. The Identify
Printer dialog box appears.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

319

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-32 Network install – Identify Printer dialog boxIdentify Printer
If you select Search from a list of detected printers (Recommended), your system searches the
network for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840, and the Searching dialog box appears, as shown
in the following illustration.

Figure 7-33 Network install – Searching dialog box
If you select the Specify a printer by address option on the Identify Printer dialog box, the Specify
Printer dialog box appears, as shown in the following illustration.

320

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

You can specify the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one by hardware address (MAC), TCP/
IP address, or IP Hostname. After typing one of these options in the appropriate field, click Next to
continue.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-34 Network install – Specify Printer dialog box

The Printer Found dialog box appears either after your system completes its search for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, or after you specify the product.

Figure 7-35 Network install – Printer Found dialog box
The Yes, install this printer option is selected by default. If you want to install a different printer, select
the No, install a different printer option. To continue installing the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
all-in-one, click Next. The Confirm Settings dialog box appears.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

321

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-36 Network install – Confirm Settings dialog box
To accept the settings (recommended), click Next to continue the installation. The Congratulations!
Software installation complete dialog box appears (see Figure 7-39 Network install – Congratulations!
Software installation complete dialog box).
If you want to change the settings, click Change TCP/IP Settings. The Confirm Changing Settings
dialog box appears.

Figure 7-37 Network install – Confirm Changing Setting dialog box
Because the printer is already configured for the existing network, you must confirm that you want to
change the settings. Click Next to continue. The Set Network Protocol dialog box appears.

322

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

To change the settings, click Change Settings, make your changes in the dialog box that appears, and
then click Next to continue. The Confirm Settings dialog box appears (see Figure 7-36 Network install
– Confirm Settings dialog box).

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-38 Network Install – Set Network Protocol dialog box

Click Next to continue. The Congratulations! Software installation complete dialog box appears.

Figure 7-39 Network install – Congratulations! Software installation complete dialog box
Click Finish to continue the installation. The Test Page dialog box appears.

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

323

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Figure 7-40 Network install – Test Page dialog box
Click OK to print the test page.
The Sign Up Now screen appears.

Figure 7-41 Sign Up Now screen
If you have Web access, you can sign up to receive information from HP by following instructions on
the Sign Up Now screen. Clicking Next opens the HP Registration web page. Follow the onscreen
instructions to register.

324

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems
Figure 7-42 HP Registration screen

ENWW

Printing-system software installation

325

Uninstall
This section provides information about the following topics:
●

Uninstall instructions for Windows

●

Files not removed and manual uninstall (Windows)

Uninstall instructions for Windows

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

The uninstall procedures vary according to the type of installation you used.

Uninstalling HP Image Zone in Windows operating systems
When you uninstall the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, only the printing-system software
for the all-in-one is uninstalled. The uninstall does not delete the following software features:
■

HP Director

■

HP Document Viewer

■

HP Software Update

■

HP Image Zone

■

HP System Diagnostics

For troubleshooting purposes, it is not necessary to uninstall all software that is associated with your
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840. This software functions independently of the product and can be
associated with other HP products and system devices.
To uninstall these programs, you must use the Add/Remove Programs feature in Windows. If you choose
to uninstall the software, you receive warnings that features that are associated with the software might
not function correctly if you proceed.

Uninstalling a Typical or Minimum installation
The following methods can be used to uninstall a Typical or Minimum installation.
■

Using the HP LaserJet all-in-one software Uninstall component (recommended)

■

Using the Windows Add or Remove programs component
NOTE If you uninstall the software for troubleshooting purposes, try uninstalling only specific
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 print, scan, or fax drivers. The shared software programs,
such as HP Image Zone, HP Director, and HP Document Viewer, might not uninstall
successfully, and are unlikely to be the cause of product-specific problems. These shared
software programs should not need to be uninstalled, especially if they are being used by another
HP product.

Using the HP LaserJet all-in-one software Uninstall component (recommended)
Follow these steps to uninstall a Typical or Minimum installation of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software
by using the Uninstall component.

326

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Quit all open programs.

Click Start, click Programs, select HP, select hp Color LaserJet 2820,2830,2840, and then
click Uninstall.

The Important Uninstall Information dialog box appears. Click Continue.

The Cleanup progress dialog box appears. The progress bar reflects the status of the uninstall
process.

When the uninstall process is completed, the Restart dialog box appears. Click Restart to restart
your computer and finish the uninstall process.

Using the Windows Add or Remove Programs component
Follow these steps to uninstall a Typical or Minimum installation of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software
by using the WindowsAdd/Remove programs component.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

NOTE To uninstall the software from Windows 2000 or Windows XP, you must log on with
administrator privileges.

NOTE To uninstall the software from Windows 2000 or Windows XP, you must log on with
administrator privileges.
1

Quit all open programs.

Click Start, click Control Panel, double-click Add or Remove Programs.

Click Change or Remove programs on the left side of the window, and then click the name of your
HP LaserJet all-in-one product. Click Remove.

The Important Uninstall Information dialog box appears. Click Continue.

The Cleanup progress dialog box appears. The progress bar reflects the status of the uninstall
process.

When the uninstall process is completed, the Restart dialog box appears. Click Restart to restart
your computer and finish the uninstall process.

Uninstalling a Minimum installation
NOTE If the Uninstall option does not appear in your HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 allin-one program group, click Start, click Settings, click Control Panel, and select Add or
Remove Programs to uninstall the software.

ENWW

Uninstall

327

Follow these steps to uninstall the HP LaserJet all-in-one software if you have used a Minimum
Installation.
1

In Windows XP, click Start and then click Control Panel.
NOTE In Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, and Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings,
and then click Control Panel.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

Click Add or Remove Programs.

Click hp LaserJet all-in-one and then click Change/Remove.

The Important Uninstall Information dialog appears. Disconnect your HP LaserJet all-in-one
product from your computer, quit all open programs, and then click Continue.

The Cleanup progress dialog appears and the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software
components are removed from your computer. The status bar refreshes several times during this
process.

The Restart dialog appears. Click Restart to continue the uninstall.

Uninstalling an Add-Printer installation
Follow these steps to uninstall a Typical or Minimum installation of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software
by using the HP LaserJet all-in-one software Add or Remove software component. Use the procedure
for the appropriate operating system.
●

Windows 98 SE or Windows Me

●

Windows 2000 or Windows XP

Windows 98 SE or Windows Me

328

Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

Right-click the icon for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product and then click Delete.

The product icon and the associated files are removed from your computer.

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Windows 2000 or Windows XP
NOTE To uninstall the software from Windows 2000 or Windows XP, you must log on with
administrator privileges.
1

Click Start, click Settings, and then click Printers.

Right-click the icon for your HP LaserJet all-in-one product and then click Delete. This removes the
icon for the product only, but it does not remove the associated files.

To remove the associated files, click File from inside the Printers folder, and then click Server
Properties.

Click the Driver tab, click the name of your HP LaserJet all-in-one product, and then click
Remove. When you are prompted to confirm the deletion, click Yes.

Click Close to close the Server Properties dialog box, and then close the Printers folder.

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

NOTE For Windows XP, click Start, and then click Printers and Faxes.

Files not removed and manual uninstall (Windows)
The tables in the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Software Technical Reference Addendum list all
the installed files and folders. The tables also show which of the installed files are shared, and which
are removed during the Uninstall process.
The uninstall program does not remove some files and folders. Manually removing the HP LaserJet allin-one software folder does not remove some files that were installed, such as Windows-shared files
and hidden files.
NOTE If you need to perform a manual uninstall, you might need to make some hidden files
visible. Use the View menu in Windows Explorer to set the option to show all files.
Files marked with a "Y" (for Yes) in the Uninstall column are removed when using the recommended
automated uninstall procedure. Files marked with an "N" (for No) in the Uninstall column are not removed
when using the recommended automated uninstall procedure. You can use this information if you must
complete an uninstall procedure manually.
NOTE If you must perform a manual uninstall of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software, do not
remove shared files that are marked with an "N" (for No) in the Uninstall column of the System
Changes tables. These shared files might be used by the operating system or by other programs,
and removing them might cause your computer system to work incorrectly.
You should not remove any of the files that are modified by the HP LaserJet all-in-one software
installation process. Generally, these are shared files that the operating system or other programs might
use, and removing them might cause your computer system to work incorrectly.

ENWW

Uninstall

329

Other files that are not removed when using the recommended automated uninstall procedure are as
follows:
■

The LaserJet 28XX directory (where 28XX is the model number of your HP LaserJet all-in-one
product) in your data/document folder (in the MY DOCUMENTS\MY SCANS folder on your
computer)

Software installation for
Windows operating
systems

CAUTION Do not remove the LaserJet 28XX directory from the MY DOCUMENTS\MY
SCANS folder unless you are sure that you do not want any of the documents that are stored
in the All-in-One directory. If you move the LaserJet 28XX directory to the Windows desktop
Recycle Bin, do not empty the Recycle Bin unless you are sure that you do not want any of
the files that are stored in the LaserJet 28XX directory.
■

The default directory for faxes
NOTE In the following examples, the italicized text varies based on the drive and the
location of your computer, the specific HP LaserJet all-in-one product that you have installed,
and the job number of the faxes that you have sent and received.
The individual faxes are listed in the JOBX folder. Three separate files exist for each fax:
a .PDF file to print, a .JPEG file to view, and an original data file.
■

Received faxes.
C:\PROGRAM FILES\HEWLETT-PACKARD\TOOLBOX\APACHE TOMCAT 4.0\WEBAPPS
\TOOLBOX4.0\PRODUCTS\HP_COLOR_LASERJET_2800_ALL_IN_ONE\FAXDATA
\RECEIVED\JOBX

■

Sent faxes.
C:\PROGRAM FILES\HEWLETT-PACKARD\TOOLBOX\APACHE TOMCAT 4.0\WEBAPPS
\TOOLBOX2.7\PRODUCTS\HP_COLOR_LASERJET_2800_ALL_IN_ONE\FAXDATA\SENT
\JOBX

330

Chapter 7

Software installation for Windows operating systems

ENWW

Engineering details

This chapter provides information about the following topics:
Media attributes

●

Readme

●

HP System Diagnostics

●

Troubleshooting

●

Summary of HP Toolbox known issues

Engineering details

●

ENWW

331

Media attributes
This section includes the following information about media attributes:
●

Media sources and destinations

●

Source commands

●

Media types and sizes

Media sources and destinations
The following table indicates the standard and optional media sources and destinations for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840:
Table 8-1 HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 media sources and destinations
Media sources

Media destinations

Multipurpose tray (tray 1)

standard

250-sheet paper tray (tray 2)

standard

Top output bin

standard

Engineering details

Source commands
The PCL 6 attribute for paper source is ubyte # MediaSource or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource. See the following table for values of #. For example, "ubyte 4 MediaSource" is the
command for tray 2.
The PCL 5 escape sequence for media source is Esc&l#H (the "l" is a lowercase "L" rather than the
numeral "1"). See the following table for values of #. For example, Esc&l8H is the command for tray 4.
Table 8-2 Media-source commands
Media source

PCL 6

PCL 5

PostScript

ubyte # MediaSource
or ubyte_array "string"
MediaSource1

Esc&l#H

/MediaPosition # /
ManualFeed true | false
or null

Tray 1 (125-sheet;
multipurpose)

3 false

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

0 false

Auto Select

Manual feed in tray 1

3 true

For the string value, you must use include the quotation marks around the variable. For example, ubyte_array "TRAY2"
MediaSource is the PCL 6 command for Tray 2.

Media types and sizes
The tables in this section provide information about media features, media attributes, and mediahandling constraints for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840.

332

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Media features and attributes
The following table lists the features and attributes of the media that appears under the Size Is: dropdown menu on the Paper tab. The list order can vary, depending on the product and operating system.
The list contains all of the following sizes, and might contain sizes from other drivers.
Table 8-3 Supported features and attributes, by driver
Paper sizes1

Width

Height

PCL 62

Letter

216 mm

279 mm

"LETTER"

(8.5 inches)

(11.0 inches)

197 mm

273 mm

(7.75 inches)

(10.75 inches)

216 mm

330 mm

(8.5 inches)

(13 inches)

274 mm

393 mm

(10.75 inches)

(15.50 inches)

210 mm

297 mm

(8.27 inches)

(11.69 inches)

148 mm

210 mm

(5.83 inches)

(8.27 inches)

257 mm

364 mm

(10.12 inches)

(14.33 inches)

B5 (ISO)

176 mm (6.93 inches)

250 mm (9.,84 inches)

ISOB5”

B5 (JIS)

182 mm

257 mm

"JIS B5"

(7.17 inches)

(10.12 inches)

Postcard

100 mm (3.94 inches)

148 mm (5.83 inches)

Double Postscard (JIS)

100 mm

200 mm

“Double Postcard (JIS)”

(5.83 inches)

(7.87 inches)

105 mm

241 mm

(4.13 inches)

(9.5 inches)

176 mm

250 mm

(6.93 inches)

(9.84 inches)

162 mm

229 mm

(6.38 inches)

(9.02 inches)

110 mm

220 mm

(4.33 inches)

(8.66 inches)

99 mm

190 mm

8.5x13

B4 (JIS)

Envelope #10

Envelope B5

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Envelope Monarch

ENWW

"ROC16K"

"8.5x13"

"ROC8K"

"A4"

Engineering details

16K

"A5"

"JIS B4"

"COM10"

"B5 ENV"

"C5"

"DL"

"MONARCH"

Media attributes

333

Table 8-3 Supported features and attributes, by driver (continued)
Paper sizes1

Executive

Executive (JIS)

Legal

Custom

Engineering details

2
3

Width

Height

(3.88 inches)

(7.5 inches)

185 mm

266 mm

(7.25 inches)

(10.5 inches)

216 mm

330 mm

(8.5 inches)

(12.99 inches)

216 mm

355 mm

(8.5 inches)

(14.0 inches)

Minimum:

98 mm

191 mm

(3.86 inches)

(7.5 inches)

Maximum:

312 mm

470 mm

(12.28 inches)

(18.5 inches)

PCL 62

"EXEC"

"JISEXEC"

"LEGAL"

For all paper sizes, the PCL 6 margins are 100 dots, at 600 dots per inch.
The PCL 6 command for paper size is ubyte_array “String” MediaSize. The values in this column are the values for "String."
For custom sizes, the PCL 6 driver specifies actual dimensions, for example, for 8-inch x 9-inch custom size, "real32_xy 8.0
9.0 CustomMediaSize ubyte eInch CustomMediaSizeUnits."

Table 8-4 Supported media types

334

Media types (command string)

Tray 1 (125-sheet;
multipurpose

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Bond

Cardstock1

Color

Envelope

Gloss

Heavy (90-105 gm/m2

Heavy Gloss

Labels

Letterhead

Light (<70 g/m2

Plain

Preprinted

Prepunched

Recycled

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Table 8-4 Supported media types (continued)
Media types (command string)

Tray 1 (125-sheet;
multipurpose

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

Tough Paper

Transparency
1

Y
2

Tray 1 accepts cardstock between 106 g/m (29 lb) and 163 g/m (45 lb) in weight.

If you want to print on HP LaserJet Photo paper, use the Heavy Glossy setting in your print driver.

Custom media sizes
The following table shows custom paper sizes that are available for the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840.

Tray

Dimensions

Minimum

Maximum

Tray 1 (multipurpose)

Width

127 mm (5 inches)

216 mm (8.5 inches)

Height

127 mm (5 inches)

381 mm (15 inches)

Width

127 mm (5 inches)

216 mm (8.5 inches)

Height

127 mm (5 inches)

381 mm (15 inches)

Width

127 mm (5 inches)

216 mm (8.5 inches)

Height

127 mm (5 inches)

381 mm (15 inches)

Tray 2 (250-sheet)

ADF unit

Engineering details

Table 8-5 Custom media sizes

Media-type commands
The HP Traditional PCL 5e Driver escape sequence for paper type is "Esc&n#Wdpapertype", where
"n#" is the number of characters in the paper type plus 1. For example, in the sequence
"Esc&n6WdPlain", "Plain" has 5 letters plus 1, for a total of 6.
Table 8-6 Media-type commands

ENWW

Esc&

Paper type

Esc&

Plain

Esc&

Preprinted

Esc&

Letterhead

Esc&

Transparency1

Esc&

Prepunched

Esc&

Labels

Esc&

Bond

Esc&

Recycled

Esc&

Color

Esc&

Cardstock2

Media attributes

335

Table 8-6 Media-type commands (continued)

1
2

Esc&

Paper type

Esc&

Rough

Esc&

Envelope

You must spell out the word "Transparency" in the string, although it is abbreviated as TRNSPRNCY on the control panel.
The correct command for cardstock is "Esc&n11WdCard Stock", with a space between the "d" and the "S", and with an
uppercase "S".

Engineering details
336

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Readme
The Readme files for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one are also available on the
following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

Windows Readme
●

Introduction

●

Late-breaking information

●

Installation Instructions

●

Technical assistance

●

Legal statements

Introduction

This document provides specific installation instructions and other information you should know before
you install and use the printing system. Installation instructions are provided in this document for the
following operating systems:
■

Windows 98 SE

■

Windows Me

■

Windows 2000

■

Windows XP

For information and printer drivers for Linux, see the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/linux
For information and printer drivers for UNIX®, see the following Web site:
www.hp.com/go/jetdirectunix_software
For instructions to install OS/2 printer drivers, Macintosh OS components, or other systems, see the
associated installation notes, readme files, or other product information for that particular system.
The following HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one models are supported:
■

ENWW

HP Color LaserJet 2820 all-in-one printer, scanner, copier. 96 megabytes (MB) of random
access memory (RAM), expandable to 224 MB; a Hi-Speed universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 port; an
internal print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-T network; a 125-sheet or 10-envelope
multipurpose tray for automatic and manual feeding of envelopes, labels, transparencies, and other
special media (tray 1); color print cartridges that can print as many as 2,000 pages at 5% coverage.

Readme

337

Engineering details

Purpose of this document

■

HP Color LaserJet 2830 all-in-one printer, scanner, fax, copier. 96 megabytes (MB) of random
access memory (RAM), expandable to 224 MB; a Hi-Speed universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 port; an
internal print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-T network; a 125-sheet or 10-envelope
multipurpose tray for automatic and manual feeding of envelopes, labels, transparencies, and other
special media (tray 1); a V.34 fax modem and 4 MB flash fax storage memory; high-capacity color
print cartridges that can print as many as 4,000 pages at 5% coverage.

■

HP Color LaserJet 2840 all-in-one printer, scanner, fax, copier. 96 megabytes (MB) of random
access memory (RAM), expandable to 224 MB; a Hi-Speed universal serial bus (USB) 2.0 port; an
internal print server for connecting to a 10/100Base-T network; a 125-sheet or 10-envelope
multipurpose tray for automatic and manual feeding of envelopes, labels, transparencies, and other
special media (tray 1); a 250-sheet tray (tray 2) for standard sizes; a V.34 fax modem and 4 MB
flash fax storage memory; high-capacity color print cartridges that can print as many as 4,000 pages
at 5% coverage; rated memory-card slots as well.

This file provides specific installation, compatibility, and troubleshooting information. For additional
information about device features and driver features, see the device user guide and the online help
included with each software component.
Who needs this software?
All users require this printing system software to operate the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-inone.

Engineering details

Overview of the printing-system components
The Windows CD-ROM has software for IBM-compatible computer systems, and the Macintosh CDROM has software for Apple Macintosh (and compatible) systems. For more information about a
particular driver or software component, see its associated online help.
End-user software components for Minimal Install (Available on Windows 98 SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 and Windows XP)
Drivers
A driver is software that provides software applications access to the device features. Typically, you
should install drivers for each device. The printing-system software CD-ROM that came with your device
includes the following Windows drivers:
■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 SE and
Windows Me, and the HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP, all with similar
graphical user interfaces

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 HP PCL 6 Unidriver – Black and white print driver for
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, all with similar graphical user interfaces

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 TWAIN Scan driver for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 and Windows XP

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 WIA Scan driver for Windows XP

■

HP Color LaserJet 2840 Mass Storage driver for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 and
Windows XP. This driver provides access to the memory card slots on the device

Software applications
■

338

Fax Setup Utility

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

End-user software components for Minimal Install (Available on Windows 98 SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 and Windows XP)
Drivers
A driver is software that provides software applications access to the device features. Typically, you
should install drivers for each device. The printing-system software CD-ROM that came with your device
includes the following Windows drivers:
■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 HP Traditional PCL 6 Driver for Windows 98 SE and
Windows Me, and the HP PCL 6 Unidriver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP, all with similar
graphical user interfaces

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 HP PCL 6 Unidriver – Black and white print driver for
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, all with similar graphical user interfaces

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 TWAIN Scan driver for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 and Windows XP

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 WIA Scan driver for Windows XP

■

HP Color LaserJet 2840 Mass Storage driver for Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000 and
Windows XP. This driver provides access to the memory card slots on the device

■

HP Toolbox

■

HP SendFax

■

HP Image Zone

■

HP Director

■

HP Document Viewer

■

OCR Software

■

HP Image Transfer Wizard

Engineering details

Software Applications

The most recent drivers and software, including Windows NT 4.0 and Windows XP Intel 64-bit drivers,
for your HP Color LaserJet device are available at the following Web site:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series
The PS Emulation Driver for Windows 98 SE and Windows Me, and the PS Emulation Unidriver for
Windows 2000 and Windows XP, are available on the CD. To install either of these drivers, you must
use the Microsoft Add Printer wizard after a normal installation has completed. The .INF file for the
Postscript driver is available at :\drivers\\ Install the driver to
the printer port that was created for the PCL 6 driver during install.
Additional drivers might be available from your HP distributor or from online sources. See the “Technical
Assistance” section of this document or the device user guide for more information about obtaining
drivers and other HP software.
HP Toolbox
For Windows 2000 and Windows XP, the printing system software includes the HP Toolbox software
utility for end-users. HP Toolbox provides device status information such as toner and paper levels,
consumable and supplies-reorder information, and provides pop-up alert messages when attention is
ENWW

Readme

339

needed at the device. HP Toolbox is also used for fax setup, receiving faxes on your PC, setting up the
fax speed dial buttons and fax phone book entries, configuring the Scan to button, and configuring the
device settings.
Adobe Acrobat Reader
Acrobat Reader should be used to view the online manuals. A version is available on the CD. Path:
:\apps\Adobe\Acrobat5.0\Reader\AcroRd32.exe
The latest version of Acrobat Reader is available on the Adobe Web site at www.adobe.com.
Device Documentation
The following documents are available on the printing system software CD-ROM:
■

Document: HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 User Guide
File name: LJ28X0_use_.pdf
File name: LJ28X0_use_.chm
Path: :\\MANUALS\LJ28X0_use_.pdf
Path: :\\MANUALS\LJ28X0_use_.chm

■

Document: HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Advanced Network Reference Guide

Engineering details

File name: LJ28X0_network-ref_.pdf
Path: :\\MANUALS\LJ28X0_network-ref_.pdf
■

Document: Hewlett-Packard Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 All-in-one Install Notes
File name: LJ28X0_installnotes_.htm
Path: :\\MANUALS\LJ28X0_installnotes_.htm

Uninstall
The uninstall utility allows you to remove the Windows HP printing system components. See the
"Uninstaller" section for more instructions.

Late-breaking information
Known issues and workarounds
General

340

■

The SNMP Community Name can be set from the HP Toolbox software or the device embedded
Web server. If the Community Name setting is changed to something other than "public", network
scanning and faxing will stop working.

■

Firewall software can interfere with the HP software installer. If you do not disable the firewall during
install, you may see longer install times and failures to detect the device during a network install.

■

Certain high speed USB 2.0 cards ship with unsigned host controller drivers. If you have purchased
a USB 2.0 add-in card and have an unsigned driver, you may experience driver installation problems
or communication problems between the device and HP software. It is recommended that you
always use a Microsoft WHQL Certified host controller driver with your USB hardware.

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

■

Plug and Play Print/Scan driver packages are available on the Web at the following URL:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

■

Functionality on systems that meet only minimum system requirements will be limited. Use of many
images or videos requires a system that meets the recommended system requirements for
acceptable performance and reliability.

■

Troubleshooting Setup and Install

ENWW

■

Verify that your cable is USB 2.0 high-speed compliant.

■

Ensure that your cable is connected correctly. Remove the USB cable, look at the end of the
cable, and then match it to the pattern on the USB port. Make sure that it is not upside down.
Insert one end of the USB cable completely into the USB port on the HP device and the other
end into the back of the computer.

■

Check that the peripheral is powered on. Peripherals will not be recognized if the power is off.

■

Ensure that your USB cable is no more than 15 feet or 5 meters in length.

■

Check that the USB port is enabled. Some computers ship with disabled USB ports.

■

The HP Image Zone software supports a variety of HP products. HP Image Zone software installs
by default into the C:\Program Files\HP folder. The user can change this install folder during the
first install. Subsequent installs of other HP products that use the HP Image Zone software will
automatically use the same folder as the first install. To change the folder where the software is
installed, you must first uninstall the software for every device that uses the HP Image Zone
software, uninstall the HP Image Zone software itself, and then re-install.

■

HP Image Zone software will install in the same language as a previous install on the same system.
If you wish to change the language of the HP Image Zone software, you must first uninstall the
software for every device that uses the HP Image Zone software, uninstall the HP Image Zone
software itself, and then re-install. HP Image Zone software will install in the language of the
operating system of the PC by default (if that language is supported by the HP Image Zone software).

■

The installer does not support Windows NT 4.0, Windows 98 First Edition, Windows 2000 Server,
Windows XP (Intel 64-bit), or Windows Server 2003. Print drivers for these operating systems are
available at www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

■

On a Thai system, some components may show English text.

■

Printing and scanning concurrently is not supported. If the device is scanning, the print job will be
held off until the scan completes. If the device is printing, an attempt to scan will result in a "Device
Busy" error.

Readme

341

Engineering details

If your device is not recognized:

HP Toolbox
■

Firewall software can interfere with network communication between the device and HP Toolbox
software. If you see a prompt to allow "javaw" or "statusclient" network access, you must allow it for
HP Toolbox to work properly. The network ports that HP Toolbox software must have access to are
5225 and 5226.

■

HP Toolbox software does not support all Web browsers. For a list of supported web browsers, refer
to the user guide.

■

Your network settings (and memory card settings if supported by your device) can be password
protected, by setting a password within HP Toolbox. If you forget your password, you must restore
the factory defaults on your device.

Fax

Engineering details

■

The device fax header is limited to 25 characters.

■

If you wish to save your current device settings (excluding network settings) and the contents of
your fax phone book, you may do so by using the Save / Restore feature within the HP Toolbox
software. After saving your settings on your PC, you can later restore these settings to your device
by using HP Toolbox.

■

Using Restore Defaults on the device control panel will erase the fax header, fax activity log, fax
speed dials, and fax phone book. Run the fax Setup Wizard to reenter fax header information. Fax
speed dials and phone book can be entered via the HP Toolbox software or the device embedded
Web server.

■

If you repeatedly get a fax error 441 when sending faxes, try disabling the v.34 protocol. To do this,
go to the device control panel and select Menu, and then Fax Setup, All Faxes, V.34, and Off.

Scanning
■

Scanning at higher resolutions can take a long time to scan and the process and will create big files.
For most purposes, the best compromise between quality and time or size is provided by the default
resolution.

■

A preference change for scanning from HP Scanning software does not take effect until you restart
the HP Scanning software. If you change preferences from the HP Director by selecting
Settings, Scan Settings, Preferences, and then Scan Preferences, the change will take effect
upon the next scan.

■

To turn off the prompt for additional scans, open HP Director, click Settings, Scan Settings,
Preferences, and then click Scan Preferences. Click the Automatic tab and clear the Prompt for
additional scans from glass/TMA option. Click OK.

■

To turn off the preview scan setting, open HP Director, click Settings, Scan Settings,
Preferences, and then click Button Settings. Click the tab associated with the button in the Director
or on the device that you want to change. Clear the preview options you want to turn off. Click OK.
NOTE The preview scan options do not apply to scans started from HP Image Zone or from
other software applications.

■

342

If you choose to scan using the ADF, you must put media into the feeder before clicking on the
Scan Picture or Scan Document icon in the HP Director. Otherwise scanning will occur from the
glass scanning bed. Similarly, if initiating the scan from the hardware scan button, you must put the
media into the feeder before pushing the button in order to scan from the feeder.

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

■

If you change to or from a Transparency Materials Adapter (TMA) by loading a profile, you must
select preview again to see an image in the HP Scanning software preview window.

■

If your scanner supports an automatic feeder, you cannot use the TMA if there is paper in a feeder
connected to the scanner. To use the TMA, remove paper from the feeder.

■

The default file type when scanning to the HP Image Zone is JPEG. This file type supports millions
of colors (24 bit) and 256 Gray Shades (8 bit) output types. If you select an output type of black and
white (1 bit) or any of the 256-color output types, the file produced will still be in the JPEG format.
Black and white output types will result in gray scale JPEG files and 256-color output types will result
in 24 bit JPEG files. To get true black and white or 256-color output types, change the setting for
the default file type to either TIF or BMP in the Save Settings dialog under the Scan Picture
Settings accessed through the Settings menu in the HP Director for your device.

■

When you preview images from an ADF, you can view each page in the scanning application. A
preview scan allows you to make some adjustments to individual pages before completing the final
scan, such as cropping the page or lightening or darkening the image. If you change resolution
during the preview, the software will adjust to the requested resolution. If you want to change the
default scan resolution or output type for your ADF scans, follow these steps BEFORE you begin
scanning pages with the ADF:

2. Click Modify Scan Document Settings.
3. Select the resolution and output type for the image type you will be scanning. For example, if you
want to scan all of your text and graphics pages at 300 ppi (pixels per inch), change that setting
from 200 to 300 ppi.
4. When you are done changing the settings, click OK, then click OK again.
NOTE If you want to restore the factory defaults for your ADF scans, open the Scan
Document Settings dialog. Click Restore Defaults, click Apply and then click OK.
■

To use the descreen feature with the ADF, first scan one page through the ADF to bring up the
scanning application user interface. Then place the images you want to scan using descreen feature
into the ADF and click Descreen in the scanning application user interface. When you click
Descreen, a new scan will start, deleting the images already in the Preview window.

■

When using autocrop, ensure the lid is properly centered on the scanner. This will prevent stray
light from entering into the scan and will result in the best autocrop results. Some images may not
autocrop well even when the lid is on properly. In these instances you will need to draw the crop
area manually.

■

When creating html files in languages other than the language of the PC operating system during
scanning, for best results do not use extended ASCII characters in the file name.
If you have installed both an HP All-in-One or HP printer and an HP Scanjet scanner, the onscreen
help for your All-in-One or printer might appear to be missing. Look for it under the help for your HP
Scanjet model within the HP Image Zone help contents. To modify your HP Scanjet help so that
your HP All-in-One or HP printer onscreen help appears at the top level of the help contents, do the
following:
1. Open your Web browser and go to www.hp.com/support. The Hewlett Packard Technical Support
web page opens.

ENWW

Readme

343

Engineering details

1. Click the Director Settings menu, and then click Scan Settings, Preferences and Button
Settings. Click Scan Document button (front Panel) or Scan Document button (Director).

2. Select your country/region. The Support & Drivers web page opens.
3. Select the Download drivers and software option.
4. Enter your HP Scanjet product name and click the button to the right of the list.
5. If necessary, select your scanner from the list.
6. Select your operating system from the software & driver downloads list.
7. Under Patch, click Update HP Scanjet on-screen help to correct placement of HP all-inoneor HP printer on-screen help.
8. Follow the instructions on the web page.
■

OCR recommendations for input files:
■

300 dpi, 8-bit grayscale or 24-bit image data.

■

400 dpi, 8-bit grayscale or 24-bit image data for Asian languages (Traditional and Simplified
Chinese, Japanese and Korean).

■

Do not use 1-bit files for OCR.

Engineering details

■

Putting a few sheets of paper on top of flatbed scanned originals can help eliminate bleed through
of the second side image or foam mat and to help flatten the original

■

Scanned originals that are bent, creased or scored can cause shadows to appear on the image.

■

Scan buttons on the device control panel will not function unless you have done a typical install and
set up Scan-To in the HP Toolbox software.

HP Image Zone

344

■

HP Image Zone is an easy, full-featured software application that helps you view, organize, edit,
print, and share your digital photos, and use them in creative projects. Look at your Windows
Desktop for the HP Image Zone or HP Image Zone Express icon to determine which application is
installed.

■

If you have previously downloaded and installed the HP Image Zone Express application from the
HP web site before installing your HP device, you may have both HP Image Zone and HP Image
Zone Express installed. Both applications may be safely installed on a PC at the same time, and
you may use either of the applications depending on your preference.

■

When HP Image Zone and HP Image Zone Express are installed on the same PC, HP Image Zone
will be the default imaging software program that opens when images are transferred from cameras
or cards using the HP Image Transfer software, or scanned using the HP scanning software. To
change the default imaging software program that you use to view images scanned by using HP
scanning software, open the HP Director and select the Settings menu. Select the Scan Settings
and Preferences and then select the Scan To…Setup option to change the default software
program that opens after scanning is completed.

■

To place images in the Projects tab template, first select the images you want in the My Images
tab and place them in the selection tray. When you open a project template, your selected images
will be placed in the template automatically.

■

If you cannot see some of your photos in the thumbnail viewer, it may be because there are
unsupported characters in the name of the file. Try re-naming the file without any special characters
in the filename.

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

■

The Image Zone displays or prints only the first page of a multi-page TIFF file.

■

Moving files outside Image Zone (for example, in Windows Explorer) will remove any keywords
applied to those images.

■

For some ISPs (Internet Service Providers), the autodial function does not always work with HP
Instant Share. If your system fails to autodial or if your system autodials and HP Instant Share fails
to recognize the Internet connection, try repeating the Instant Share operation after manually
connecting to the Internet through your ISP.

■

Configuring and using your camera with HP Instant Share menu items from more than one HP
Passport account will cause undesirable behavior, such as authentication failed messages when
trying to modify Instant Share menu items, or not authorized error messages when unloading and
executing Instant Share services. The best way to avoid these problems is to always sign-in under
the same HP Passport user ID whenever you use the HP Instant Share feature of your camera. If
you are already seeing problems, then delete and re-add the offending HP Instant Share items via
HP Instant Share Setup while signed-in under the same HP Passport user ID.

■

Selecting more than one copy in your printer settings will be ignored when printing from HP Instant
Share. The number you selected in your Share menu on the back of your camera will be used
instead.

■

In some situations, there are problems printing from HP Instant Share when changing from the
default printer to another printer. The results could be print errors, missing images, or images not
oriented correctly. The situation is printer dependent and happens when selecting a non-default
printer in the Print dialog box. To avoid this problem, set the printer that you want to print to as the
system default printer before you print from HP Instant Share.

■

If you forget your HP Passport user ID or password, click the If you don't have an account, click
here link on the Sign-in with HP Passport page. Then select either forgot password or forgot user
ID from the menu on the left side of the hp passport new user registration page.

■

When you connect a camera to your PC or insert a memory card into your printer’s card slot to
transfer pictures from a memory card, some versions of Windows may display a dialog box asking
you to choose which application to use to transfer your pictures. For HP Instant Share tasks to be
processed, you must choose the HP Image Transfer Software. To automatically use the HP Image
Transfer software whenever you transfer pictures to your PC from a memory card, check the Always
do the selected action checkbox near the bottom of the dialog.

■

HP Image Zone Express does not support setting up HP Instant Share destinations on your HP
digital camera or processing HP Instant Share actions while transferring images to your PC.
However, you can use the HP Instant Share tab in HP Image Zone Express to share your images
with your friends and family after your images have been transferred from your HP device.

HPPhoto Web site
■

ENWW

The HPPhoto Web site currently supports English only. If you are a non-English user, you may still
use HPPhoto, but you may run into limitations. For example, HPPhoto does not accept filenames
with Japanese characters.

Readme

345

Engineering details

HP Instant Share

Unloading and Memory Card Issues
■

If possible, format memory cards in the image capture device (e.g., a digital camera). Do not use
Windows Explorer to format cards.

■

Secure digital cards have a lock switch that should never be set when the card is in the camera.

■

If you experience trouble unloading images from the image capture device while a screen saver or
power management feature on the PC has been activated, you may need to disable these features
during the unload operation. The settings of these features can be configured from the system
control panel.

■

Some HP imaging products, such as the HP Photo scanner and digital cameras configured in disk
drive mode, appear to the operating system as a disk drive. On computers running Windows 98,
only one of these devices can be supported at a time. This issue does not occur on newer operating
systems such as Windows 2000, Windows Me, or Windows XP. To work around this issue, do one
of the following:
■

If the device has multiple connect modes, switch the device to a connect mode other than "disk
drive".

■

Connect only one device at a time to the computer. Temporarily disconnect the device(s) you
are not using. If your software has recognized the wrong imaging device, disconnect all of your
imaging devices, and re-connect only the device you want to use.

Engineering details

■

For best results, always exit the HP Image Transfer software, or the Instant Share Setup software
before removing or replacing the Compactflash card from the card reader.

■

If the memory card cannot be seen on your mapped network drive after an install, try removing and
reinserting the card.

Upgrading Windows
■

HP recommends that you uninstall your HP Image Zone software and HP devices before upgrading
to a newer supported version of Windows. For example, when upgrading from Windows 98 to
Windows XP, uninstall HP Image Zone and your HP device using Add/Remove Programs and then
upgrade to the new operating system. After the operating system upgrade is complete, re-install
your HP Image Zone software and device using the latest software from www.hp.com/support/
clj2800series.

Other Applications
■

Microsoft Wordpad does not display compressed JPEG files contained in an RTF file. To display
these files, use a different application such as Microsoft Word.

■

Systems with Norton AntiVirus 2002 installed may have an error message displayed when sending
an image to Microsoft Word from the HP Image Zone. Upgrading to Norton AntiVirus 2003 or to
Microsoft Word Service Pack 2 will eliminate this error message.

See the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 device support page at www.hp.com/support/
clj2800series for an updated listing of known issues for the HP Color LaserJet printing system software.
Use the link for the "Release Notes" or "Readme File" found on the driver download page for the
operating system and driver version to be used.
Issues fixed
See the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 support page at www.hp.com/support/clj2800series for an
updated listing of issues fixed for the HP Color LaserJet Printing System Software. Use the link for the

346

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

"Release Notes" or "Readme File" found on the driver download page for your operating system and
driver version.

Installation Instructions
When operating in a Windows environment, the CD-ROM setup or installation software detects the
version and language of the operating system that you are running.
Installation options
Two methods are available for installing printer drivers and software components for the device.
■

Typical installation installs the most commonly used HP printing system components.

■

Minimal installation installs drivers for basic device functionality.

Installing software on Windows 98 SE, Windows 2000, and Windows XP
NOTE Administrator privileges are required to install the printing system on a Windows 2000
or Windows XP operating system.
Printing system installation from a CD-ROM
Do not plug the USB cable into the computer system.

Close all programs.

Insert the CD-ROM.

If the HP printing system installer program has not started after 30 seconds, complete steps 5
through 7.

Select Run from the Start menu on your taskbar.

Browse to the root directory on the CD-ROM drive.

Select the HPSETUP.EXE file, click Open, and then click OK. When the Animated Installation guide
appears, click “Begin Setup” for help setting up the device.

After watching the Installation guide, you will be given the option to click on “Launch CD Browser”
to view additional documentation, or to click “Install Software” to start the software installation.

Follow the prompts.

Engineering details

Uninstaller
After a printing system installation, use the uninstall icon in the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
program group to remove all of the HP printing system components.
Starting the Uninstaller

ENWW

From the Start menu, in the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 program group, click the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 uninstall icon.

The printing system guides you through removing all of the printing system components.

Readme

347

If you have performed a Typical install and you do not have any other HP devices installed, you will
also need to follow steps 4 and 5. Following these steps may break certain functionality of other HP
devices you have previously installed because they share the software.

Open your Microsoft Windows Control Panel. Double-click Add/Remove Programs.

You will see entries for HP Image Zone, HP Extended Capabilities, and HP Software Update. For
each item, click Change/Remove and follow the prompts.

Technical assistance
Some of the following services are provided for the United States only. Services similar to those listed
below are available in other countries/regions. See the device user guide or the in-box support flyer, or
call your local authorized HP dealer.
Customer support
See your device user guide or the in-box support flyer, or call your local authorized HP dealer.
Web
Browse to the following URL for online technical support:
www.hp.com/support/clj2800series

Engineering details

HP software and support services — additional information
See your device user guide for additional methods of obtaining software and support information, such
as printer driver distribution centers, other online services, fax services, and other online support.

Legal statements
Trademark notices
Adobe, Acrobat, and PostScript3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries/regions.
Microsoft®, MS-DOS®, Windows®, and Windows NT® are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corp.
TrueType™ is a U.S. trademark of Apple Computer, Inc.
UNIX® is a registered trademark of the Open Group.
Warranty and copyright
Warranty
See the device user guide for complete warranty and support information.
Copyright
© 2004 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.
All rights reserved. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited,
except as allowed under the copyright laws.

348

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Macintosh Readme
The following section includes the text of the Mac Readme, which is available on the HP LaserJet allin-one software CD-ROM for Macintosh.

Information about the hp LaserJet all-in-one software version 5.8
Edition 1, 5/2005
Contents
■

Supported HP Products

■

Supported Operating Systems

■

For OSX users only

■

For OS 9.2.2 users only

■

For more information

This software is intended for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products and should be
used only for those products.
Supported Operating Systems
This software is designed for Apple computers using one of the following Macintosh operating systems:
OS 9.2.2, or OSX versions 10.2.8 or 10.3.x.
For OSX Users Only
The HP scan application does not support the Quit selection on the application menu. To close the HP
scan application, choose the Done button on the application's user interface window.
For reliable print function on OS 10.2.8 and OS 10.3.0 through OS 10.3.7 systems, the HP LaserJet
software must be installed.
On some older versions of Safari, the Device Configuration frame sometimes fails to fully load. To work
around this issue, use the Safari page refresh feature or upgrade to a newer Safari version.
How to Configure a Print or Fax Queue
It is recommended the HP all-in-one Setup Assistant application be used to add print and fax queues.
However, it is also possible to configure such queues manually by performing the following steps after
the software has been installed.
To configure a print queue for your HP LaserJet all-in-one

ENWW

Open Print Center from /Applications/Utilities/Print Center.

Click Add.

Select HP AiO USB in the drop-down box. Do not select USB from the drop-down box.

Readme

349

Engineering details

Supported HP Products

Select your printer in the browser list and click Add. Your device is added to the Print Center's printer
list, with the suffix "(Printer)".

Quit Print Center.

To configure a fax queue for your HP LaserJet all-in-one (fax models only)
1

Open Print Center from /Applications/Utilities/Print Center.

Click Add.

Select HP AiO Fax in the drop-down box. Do not select USB from the drop-down box.

Select your printer in the browser list and click Add. Your device is added to the Print Center's printer
list, with the suffix "(Fax)".

Quit Print Center.

Engineering details

NOTE For USB connections, Mac OS X will automatically create a printer named "hp LaserJet
xxxx." DO NOT PRINT TO THIS QUEUE. You should always print to the queue that you created
by following the steps above, which should include the suffix "(Printer)."
Earlier versions of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software used a module named HP AiO Print for
print queue setup. This module has been replaced by HP AiO USB.
Earlier versions of the HP LaserJet all-in-one software used a module named HP AiO Print for
print queue setup. This module has been replaced by HP AiO USB.
For OS 9.2.2 users only
NOTE Using Auto Setup from within the Apple Desktop Printer Utility or using the Chooser to
create a desktop print queue for the HP all-in-one device is not supported and will crash the host
computer. To create such a desktop print queue, use the HP all-in-one Setup Assistant supplied
with the HP software.
The HP all-in-one print-to-fax driver does not support drag-and-drop printing.
The HP all-in-one print-to-fax driver does not support faxing from SimpleText. To fax a SimpleText
document, print the document, and then fax the hardcopy from the device.
For More Information
The following Web site provides information on software upgrades and can help you get more from your
HP all-in-one product.
www.hp.com/support
Copyright
© 2005 Copyright Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P.

350

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Engineering details

The only warranties for HP products and services are set forth in the express warranty statements
accompanying such products and services. Nothing herein should be construed as constituting an
additional warranty. HP shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein.

ENWW

Readme

351

HP System Diagnostics
The HP System Diagnostics software is a new tool that is designed to give IT administrators direct
access to system information about HP products and software.
To open the HP System Diagnostics software, click Start, click Programs, click HP, and then select
HP System Diagnostics.
The HP System Diagnostics software user interface consists of the following tabs:
●

System

●

Devices

●

Applications

●

HP Applications

●

Logging

System
Use this tab for an overview of the operating system and its components. Click the Refresh button to
update the information on the tab.

Engineering details
Figure 8-1 HP System Diagnostics – System tab

Devices
When you click the Devices tab, the system checks for devices that are installed on the system, such
as disk drives, imaging devices, ports, keyboards, and mice.
When you select any device in the list in the panel to the left, related items appear in the panel to the
right. Select any of the items in the panel to the right to view system information about that item, including
an indication of whether the item is functioning correctly.

352

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Applications
When you click the Applications tab, a list appears that shows currently installed third-party software
programs. Click the Refresh button to update the information on the tab. Select any item in the Running
Application field to view related system information.

Figure 8-3 HP System Diagnostics – Applications tab

ENWW

HP System Diagnostics

353

Engineering details

Figure 8-2 HP System Diagnostics – Devices tab

HP Applications
When you click the HP Applications tab, a list appears that shows currently installed HP software
programs. Click the Refresh button to update the information on the tab. Select any item on the tab to
view related system information.

Engineering details

Figure 8-4 HP System Diagnostics – HP Applications tab

Logging
Use the Logging tab to generate a log of detailed system information. Three kinds of information can
be included in the log:
■

Dr. Watson log

■

HP Installation Logs

■

Legacy System Config Files

Select the check box for the information that you want, and then click Create Log File. To view the log,
click the View Log File button; the log appears in a new window.

354

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Engineering details

Figure 8-5 HP System Diagnostics – Logging tab

ENWW

HP System Diagnostics

355

Troubleshooting
The following topics are described in this section:
●

Port communication

●

File to E-mail utility

●

Standalone scrubber

●

Two-pass cleaning-page utility

●

Collect.bat utility

●

E-mail

●

My Scans directory

Port communication
This section provides information on the following topics:

Engineering details

●

Overview

●

USB port connections

●

Device conflicts in Windows

Overview
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one products include both a 10/100Base-T network
Jetdirect port and a USB port.
The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 can be connected with either the 10/100Base-T network
Jetdirect or the USB port. The HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 does not support connection over a
parallel port.
NOTE Do not connect both the 10/100Base-T network Jetdirect port and the USB port at the
same time.
Do not connect two computers directly to the same HP LaserJet all-in-one product.

USB port connections
Hi-speed USB is an input/output mode that both PC and Macintosh computers support. A wide variety
of consumer devices, such as digital cameras and scanners, also support USB. Hi-speed USB is the
current standard. HP LaserJet all-in-one products are compatible with Hi-speed USB specifications.
A USB host is distinct from a USB device. The HP LaserJet all-in-one products are USB devices. They
can connect only to a USB host or a USB hub.

Device conflicts in Windows
When two-way communication cannot be established with the HP LaserJet all-in-one product, the
Windows Device Manager might show a conflict. Conflicts should be resolved immediately, before

356

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

continuing to troubleshoot two-way communication issues. The following sections contain a few
guidelines for identifying and resolving these conflicts.
NOTE USB connections for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 are supported only in
Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
Opening the Windows Device Manager
Follow these steps to open the Windows Device Manager.
1

In Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, or Windows 2000, click Start, click Settings, and then click
Control Panel.
In Windows XP or Windows Server 2003, click Start.

Click Control Panel

Double-click the System icon.

On the Hardware tab, click Device Manager.

Check for device conflicts
Follow these steps to check for device conflicts.

ENWW

Look for devices that appear on the list with a yellow exclamation mark (!) or a red X .

Identify port conflicts by double-clicking Port or by clicking the plus sign (+). Conflicts here usually
interfere with two-way communication.

To check the status of a device, click the device name, and then click Properties. The Device
Status appears in the middle of the dialog box.

To check the Conflicting Device list, click the device name, and then click Properties. Click the
Resources tab, and look at the Conflicting Device list at the bottom of the dialog box.

Click the plus sign (+) to the left of Open the Other Devices. Misidentified or noncategorized devices
are placed here.

Troubleshooting

357

Engineering details

NOTE In Windows 98 SE or Windows Me, click the Device Manager tab.

Guidelines for troubleshooting and resolving device conflicts
Follow these steps for resolving device conflicts.
1

If the conflicting device is no longer present in the list of devices, click the device name, click
Remove, and then click Yes. Click Yes to restart Windows.

If the conflicting device is a duplicate (and one of the duplicate listings does not show a conflict),
click the name(s) of the device(s) that have a conflict, click Remove, and then click Yes. Click
Yes to restart Windows.
NOTE You might not need to restart the computer in Windows 2000 and Windows XP,
depending on the type of port conflict you are resolving.

If a device has a conflict and you have the driver for that device, remove the device and then reinstall
it. After removing the device, restart the computer. When Windows reinstalls devices, it usually finds
nonconflicting resources.

Engineering details
358

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Engineering details

Installed Devices

Figure 8-6 Sample Device Manager screen – Windows XP
Click the View menu to see further options:
■

Devices by Type

■

Devices by Connection

■

Resources by Type

■

Resources by connection

■

Hidden Devices

The following table shows devices that are installed by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software
in Windows XP.

ENWW

Troubleshooting

359

Table 8-7 Devices installed by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software in Windows 2000 and
Windows XP
Device by type

Device

Disk drives

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 USB Device

IEEE 1284.4 compatible printers (Windows XP)

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 (DOT4PRT)

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 (DOT4)

Imaging devices

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840

Universal Serial Bus controllers

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 Series (DOT4USB)

■

HP EWS 2820/2830/2840

■

HP MS HP Color LaserJet 2840 (Windows XP)

■

USB Mass Storage Device (Windows 2000)

■

USB Composite Device

DOT4Print HPZ12 (Windows 2000)
IEEE 1284.4 devices
DOT4Print HPZ12 (Windows 2000)

Engineering details

The following table shows devices that are installed by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software
in Windows 98 SE and Windows Me.
Table 8-8 Devices installed by the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software in Windows 98 SE and
Windows Me
Device by type

Device

Disk drives

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 USB Device

Dot4 HPZ12

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 (DOT4)

Dot4 HPZ12

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 (DOT4PRT)

Dot4 HPZ12

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 (DOT4USB)

Imaging devices

■

HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840

Universal Serial Bus controllers

■

USB Composite Deviceon USB 2.0 Bus

File to E-mail utility
The File to E-mail utility is a standalone Microsoft Foundation Class (MFC) application that reads an .INI
file to detect where the HP LaserJet all-in-one product software is installed. The application then attaches
relevant log or history files to an e-mail that can be sent to HP Customer Support to assist

360

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

troubleshooting. The utility runs on your computer, but does not interact with your HP LaserJet all-inone product.
The tool is included on the installer CD, but is not copied to your computer during the software
installation. HP Customer Support can also send the utility to you by e-mail or by posting it to an HP
web page.
The tool is compatible with Windows 98 SE, Windows Me, Windows 2000, and Windows XP.
The File to E-mail utility runs with any MAPI-compliant e-mail applications. It does not run with Webbased e-mail services such as Yahoo, Hotmail, or AOL.
Depending on the speed of your computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log
files and attach them to an e-mail message.

■

util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.exe

■

util\CCC\FiletoEmail\FileToEmail.ini

To use the File to E-mail utility, copy these files to your desktop, navigate to them in Explorer, and
double-click FileToEmail.exe to open the utility. The utility generates files, opens an e-mail message,
and attaches the files so that you can send them to your IT administrator, as shown in the following
figure shows some of the attachments.

Figure 8-7 File to E-mail – sample e-mail message with files attached
If the File to E-mail utility is not successful for any reason (for instance, if you cancel the new message),
all the files are copied to a folder on the desktop that is named CCC, possibly with strings of 0's attached
to the end. You can zip these files and e-mail them separately.

ENWW

Troubleshooting

361

Engineering details

The File to E-mail utility consists of two files that are located on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840
software CD:

Standalone scrubber
If the installer fails and troubleshooting efforts have not solved the problem, you can use HP's standalone
scrubber utility to remove files.
The scrubber utility is located on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software CD in the following
folder:
util\CCC

Two-pass cleaning-page utility
The two-pass cleaning-page utility is included as a standalone tool for those who do not have
HP Toolbox installed to initiate a cleaning page. A two-pass cleaning page can be sent to the HP Color
LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one to resolve print-quality defects.
The two-pass cleaning-page utility is located on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software CD in
the following folder:
util\CCCD\CleanPage
To clean the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840, follow these steps:

Engineering details

Make sure that the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one is turned on and in the Ready
state.

At the device, remove any print media that might be in tray 1.

From the printing-system software CD, open the .PDF file (Letter or A4) from the util\CCCD\CleanPage folder.

From Adobe Acrobat Reader, print the file to the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 on a clean
sheet of paper that is at least 74 — 75 g/m2, using either tray 1 or optional tray 2.

At the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one control panel, press MENU.

Press the < or > button repeatedly to scroll to Service and press ENTER.

Press the < or > button repeatedly to scroll to Cleaning Mode and press ENTER.

Open tray 1 and load the cleaning page, printed side down.

Press ENTER again to confirm and begin the cleaning process. The page feeds through the device
slowly. The Cleaning message appears on the product control panel.

10 Discard the page when the cleaning process is complete.

Collect.bat utility
If the installer fails and troubleshooting efforts have not solved the problem, you can use HP's standalone
collect.bat utility to collect log files for further troubleshooting.
Depending on the speed of your computer, it might take several seconds for the utility to gather the log
files and place them in a folder on your computer desktop.

362

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

E-mail
If e-mail messages fail to be sent, try following these steps:
1

Open Windows Microsoft Explorer or Internet Explorer and navigate to the file.

Right-click the file, select Send To, and then click Mail Recipient.

If this method fails, check the MAPI mail setup. The MAPI setup is a third-party issue.

My Scans directory
During software installation, the My Scans directory is placed in the following location:
\My Documents\My Scans
If you move this directory for scan jobs, the scanner stays hard-coded to this default location.

Engineering details

CAUTION If you move the My Documents folder, the My Scans folder does not follow to the
new location. It remains hard-coded to the current-user's home, and scan jobs continue to be
stored there.

ENWW

Troubleshooting

363

Summary of HP Toolbox known issues
This section summarizes issues that are known to affect the version HP Toolbox released with the
HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840. The following topics are included:
●

Firewalls block HP Toolbox communication

●

USB drivers are unsigned

●

Second restart is required after installation

●

Problems occur after device replacement or restoration of factory defaults

●

Receive-to-PC problems occur after receiving a large number of faxes

●

After experiencing fax communication problems, Receive to PC problems occur

●

Intermittent scan problems occur

●

A need to enabling or disabling HP Toolbox arises

Firewalls block HP Toolbox communication
Engineering details

If you have installed a firewall before or after HP Toolbox is installed, the HP Toolbox might not operate
correctly. If firewall dialogs appear that enquire whether javaw.exe should be allowed to continue or be
blocked, select the option to continue or unblock the item in question.

USB drivers are unsigned
The HP Toolbox for the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one communicates over USB
connections by using a new, composite USB I/O. This version of HP Toolbox does not use DOT4, which
will prevent issues previously observed on other products. However, this new I/O path requires that USB
host controllers use signed USB drivers. Use the Windows Device Manager to choose a signed driver.
If the host controller driver is not signed, obtain an updated Microsoft driver. For more information, see
Port communication in the Engineering details chapter of this guide.

Second restart is required after installation
If HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 software is installed after other HP Toolbox products have been
installed, it may be necessary to restart the computer twice before the HP Toolbox functions properly.

Problems occur after device replacement or restoration of factory
defaults
If you are using the Fax Receive to PC feature and perform an operation to restore factory defaults, or
replace the device with a new one, the fax log and fax-viewer feature might not match data sent from
the device.
If this occurs, restart the HP Toolbox, remove and save any data from faxes received to the PC. To
restart HP Toolbox, you can click Start, click Run, and use the following Run command:
C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\Toolbox\hpbsttp.exe —restart
All data that is stored on the computer for the Received to PC faxes is located in the following directory:
C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\Toolbox\Apache Tomcat 4.0\webapps\Toolbox\products
\hp_color_LaserJet_2800_all_in_one\faxData

364

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

This data, which includes PDF files for each fax job received, can be copied to any directory that you
choose.
After you perform an operation to restore factory defaults, or replace the device with a new one, save
any fax data, and restart the HP Toolbox, the system will be in a fresh state, as if a fresh install had just
occurred. The fax setup wizard will run again, and you can set up the device and HP Toolbox with your
preferred settings.

Receive-to-PC problems occur after receiving a large number of
faxes
If you use the Fax Receive to PC feature and receive a large number of faxes, the fax log firmware might
overflow and roll over to a value of 0. This can disrupt data synchronization in the HP Toolbox.
When this occurs, you will typically observe the problem when you attempt to browse to the Fax
Received log page in the HP Toolbox. The following error message appears: The resource is no longer
available at the server, with some additional technical information.
NOTE For the initial release of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, the rollover
point occurs after 999 fax jobs. This number will be increased to as much as 65,535 fax jobs in
a future release of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 firmware.

Rename the folder that contains all data stored on the computer for the Received to PC faxes.
All data that is stored on the computer for the Received to PC faxes is located in the following
directory:
C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\Toolbox\Apache Tomcat 4.0\webapps\Toolbox\products
\hp_color_LaserJet_2800_all_in_one\faxData

Restart the HP Toolbox. To restart the HP Toolbox, can click Start, click Run, and use the following
Run command:
C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\Toolbox\hpbsttp.exe -restart
NOTE This procedure does not change any of the settings stored in the device, but returns all
HP Toolbox settings, such as whether alerts are enabled or disabled, to their default value.

After experiencing fax communication problems, Receive to PC
problems occur
If you use the Fax Receive to PC feature and a telecom fax communication error occurs, the firmware
and software fax logs might not be properly synchronized.
When this occurs, you will typically observe the problem when you attempt to browse to the Fax
Received log page in the HP Toolbox. The following error message appears: The resource is no longer
available at the server, with some additional technical information.
NOTE For the initial release of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one, the rollover
point occurs after 999 fax jobs. This number will be increased to as much as 65,535 fax jobs in
a future release of the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 firmware.

ENWW

Summary of HP Toolbox known issues

365

Engineering details

To recover from this situation, follow this procedure:

To recover from this situation, follow this procedure:
1

Intermittent scan problems occur
You might receive one of the following error messages after attempting to scan by pressing the SCAN
TO button on the HP Color LaserJet 2820/2830/2840 all-in-one:
Cannot Connect

Engineering details

Not set up on PC
To recover from this situation, restart your computer.

A need to enabling or disabling HP Toolbox arises
Some users might not use any of the features provided by the HP Toolbox, and might want to disable
it in order to free memory and processing resources. To disable the HP Toolbox, follow these steps:
1

Use the Windows Search feature to find the hpbpsttp.exe application. Typically, this executable
file is found in the following location:
C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\Toolbox

Click Start.

Click Run.

Browse to the location of the application, or type the path. Do not click OK yet.

Add the disabling option by typing -disable at the end of the path. The information in the Open
field will appear as follows:
"C:\Program Files\Hewlett-Packard\Toolbox\hpbpsttp.exe -disable"

Click OK.
CAUTION Disabling the HP Toolbox will cause users to lose all HP Toolbox functionality.
If multiple devices have been installed that use the HP Toolbox, disabling the HP Toolbox causes
all the devices to lose HP Toolbox functionality

366

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Functionality that will be lost when HP Toolbox is disabled includes:
Status alerts

■

E-mail alerts

■

The ability to initiate a scan from the device (by pressing the SCAN TO and START SCAN buttons on the
control panel)

■

Fax Receive to PC

Engineering details

■

ENWW

Summary of HP Toolbox known issues

367

Engineering details
368

Chapter 8

Engineering details

ENWW

Index

Symbols/Numerics
% of Normal Size setting
PCL 6 traditional driver 115
unidrivers 75
A
About HP Toolbox screen 285
About tab
PCL 6 traditional driver 133
unidrivers 97
activity log, fax 218
ADF
HP Director 156
media supported 4
Adobe Acrobat Reader 17
Advanced network settings 279
Advanced Printing Features setting,
unidrivers 62
Advanced tab, unidrivers 58
alerts
Current Alerts screen 286
e-mail 191
e-mail, setting up 197
pop-up 191
Receive Alert messages for
device events 190
Setup Status Alerts screen, HP
Toolbox 195
system-tray icons 191
Animated Demonstrations screen,
HP Toolbox 234
Animated Install Guide 300
Apple Macintosh. See Macintosh
Apple Mail 155
Applications tab, HP Systems
Diagnostics 353
ASCII protocol, PS Emulation
Unidriver settings 95
Auto continue settings 256

ENWW

B
Back Cover settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 109,
126
unidrivers 70
Back to Front printing, unidrivers
65
Basics tab, PCL 6 traditional driver
131
bidirectional communications 19,
158
binary protocol, PS Emulation
Unidriver settings 95
binding settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 107
PCL 6 unidriver 81
bitmaps, sending TrueType fonts as
PCL 6 traditional driver 112
PS Emulation Unidriver 63
black, printing all text as
PCL 6 traditional driver 112
unidrivers 64
booklets
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
108
PCL 6 unidriver settings 82
unidriver settings 82
both sides, printing on
media supported 334
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
106
unidriver settings 94
browsers supported, HP Toolbox
188
C
call report settings, fax 266
cardstock, paper type commands
336

Cartridge low threshold settings
256
CD Browser screen 302
CDs, ordering 6, 158
cleaning mode 257
cleaning-page utility, two-pass
362
Clearing Jams screen, HP Toolbox
227
collation speed 4
collect.bat utility 362
Color tab
PCL 6 traditional driver 134
unidrivers 85
colors
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
134
Printing Mode, PCL 6 unidriver
62
PS Emulation Driver settings
145
unidriver settings 60, 85
watermark settings, PCL 6
traditional driver 117
commands, paper
size 334
source 332
type 335
comparison, features 17
components, software
feature comparison 17
Macintosh 156
Windows 15
compression settings, PCL 6
traditional driver 111
Configure Device utility 156
Configure Font DIMMs dialog box
140
Configure tab, PCL 6 traditional
driver 137

Index

369

Confirm Changing Setting screen
(Windows network installation)
322
Confirm Settings screen (Windows
network installation) 322
conflicts, device 356
Congratulations Software
installation complete screen (USB
Windows installation) 313
Congratulations Software
installation complete screen
(Windows network installation)
323
Connect Your Device Now screen
(USB Windows installation) 311
Connection time-out (I/O) settings
256
Connection Type screen (USB
Windows installation) 310
Connection Type screen (Windows
network installation) 319
connection types 49
constraint messages
constraint, unidrivers 57
PCL 6 traditional driver 101
Control Panel Messages screen,
HP Toolbox 226
copies, number of
PCL 6 traditional driver 131
PS Emulation Driver 142
unidriver settings 60
copy features 4
Copy Problems screen, HP Toolbox
230
Copy Settings tab, HP Toolbox
275
copying
features available 49
How do I screen 237
multitasking 51
Reduce/Enlarge screen 276
troubleshooting 230
cover settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 109,
126
unidrivers 70
Creative Ideas icon 35
CTRL-D settings, PS Emulation
Unidriver 95

370

Index

Current Alerts screen, HP Toolbox
286
Current Progress screen (Windows
network installation) 316
custom paper sizes
PCL 6 traditional driver 122
unidrivers 69
custom paper support 335
D
Date/Time screen, HP Toolbox
257
density settings, HP Toolbox 249
Destination Folder screen (USB
Windows installation) 309
Device Configuration screen, HP
Toolbox 199
device conflicts 356
Device Found screen (USB
Windows installation) 312
Device Information screen, HP
Toolbox 242
Device Options tab 146
Device Polling screen 259
Device Settings section, HP
Toolbox 241
Device Settings tab 89
Device Status screen, HP Toolbox
193
Devices tab, HP Systems
Diagnostics 352
diagnostics 352
dial prefix settings 271
dialog boxes, Macintosh installation
171
dialog boxes, Windows installation
CD Browser 302
Confirm Changing Setting
(network) 322
Confirm Settings (network)
322
Congratulations Software
installation complete (network)
323
Congratulations Software
installation complete (USB)
313
Connect Your Device Now
(USB) 311

Connection Type (network)
319
Connection Type (USB) 310
Current Progress (network)
316
Destination Folder (USB) 309
Device Found (USB) 312
HP Extended Capabilities
(network) 317
HP LaserJet Documentation
303
HP Registration 315
HP Registration (network) 325
HP Software License
Agreement (USB) 307
Identify Printer (network) 320
License Agreement (network)
317
network 315
Network Protocol (network)
323
Online support 304
Printer Found (network) 321
Ready to Install (network) 319
Ready to Install (USB) 310
Restart your computer (USB)
313
Searching (network) 320
Sign Up Now 314
Sign Up Now (network) 324
Specify Printer (network) 321
Test Page 314
Test Page (network) 324
Thank you for buying another
HP product (network) 318
Time Remaining (USB) 312
Welcome (network) 316
Welcome (USB) 305
DIMMs
font, PCL 6 traditional driver
settings 140
slots, included 3
direct connections 49
Director. See HP Director
disitinctive ring settings 272
Document Options
PCL 6 traditional driver 105
unidrivers 61
document preview image
PCL 6 traditional driver 110

ENWW

unidrivers 73
Document Viewer. See HP
Document Viewer
documentation
dialog box, Windows installation
303
localized versions 8
operating systems supported
19, 158
Print Task Quick Set for use
guide, unidriver 67
Readme files 337
User Guide Quick Set, PCL 6
traditional driver 105
Documentation tab, HP Toolbox
235
dots per inch (dpi) setting, PCL 6
traditional driver 111
double-sided printing
media supported 334
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
106
PCL 6 unidriver settings 81
unidriver settings 94
dpi (dots per inch) setting, PCL 6
traditional driver 111
drivers
availability by operating system
18, 158
HP postscript level 3 emulation
support 58, 142
installing 298
localized versions 19
localized versions, Macintosh
158
Macintosh 156
media supported 332
media-source commands 332
scan 40
settings, overriding HP Toolbox
241
Windows 16
Drum low threshold settings 256
duplexing
media supported 334
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
106
unidriver settings 94

ENWW

E
e-mail
alerts 191
alerts, setting up 197
Macintosh programs supported
155
scanning to 189, 221
troubleshooting 363
Windows programs supported
40
Easy Install option, Macintosh
165
Edge Control
PCL 6 traditional driver 136
unidrivers 88
Effects tab
PCL 6 traditional driver 112
unidrivers 73
Entourage, Microsoft 40, 155
envelopes, paper type commands
336
error messages
Auto continue settings 256
constraint, PCL 6 traditional
driver 101
constraint, unidrivers 57
control panel 226
e–mail alerts 191
pop-up alerts 191
Receive Alerts for device events
190
escape sequences
media-source 332
media-type 335
Event Log screen, HP Toolbox
204
EWS Device Configuration utility,
Macintosh 159
Extended Capabilities, HP 26,
308, 317
External Fonts settings, PCL 6
unidriver 92
F
fax
Call Report settings 266
Data Properties screen 217
Device Polling screen 259
dial prefix settings 271
distinctive ring settings 272

entries, phone book 208
features 4
features available 49
groups, Create screen 209
groups, Edit screen 210
How do I screen 220, 236
HP Send Fax software 45
importing phone books 211
laptop computers 190
Macintosh software 156
multitasking 51
PC fax programs 53
Problems screen 231
Receive Log screen 214
Receive screen 267
reports 218
ring settings 269, 272
Send Log screen 214
Send screen 265
Settings tab, HP Toolbox 265
settings, detail screen 219
Setup Wizard screen 269
troubleshooting HP Toolbox
364
Viewer screen 216
Fax Phone Book screen, HP
Toolbox 207
Fax tab, HP EWS Device
Configuration utility 161
Fax tab, HP Toolbox 205
Fax Tasks screen, HP Toolbox
206
features
comparison 17
connection types 49
HP Toolbox 186
model comparison 3
multitasking 51
new 15
file formats, supported 38
File to E-mail utility 360
files and folders added, Windows
329
Finishing tab
PCL 6 traditional driver 104
unidrivers 62, 80
firewalls, HP Toolbox issues 364
First Page paper settings,
unidrivers 72, 128

Index

371

Fit-to-Page option, PCL 6 traditional
driver 114
Flip Pages Up settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 107
PCL 6 unidriver 81
folders
scanning to 189, 221
Windows installation 165, 329
fonts
download as outline, PS
Emulation Unidriver settings
96
External, PCL 6 unidriver 92
HP postscript level 3 emulation
support 58, 142
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
112, 140
Send TrueType as Bitmap, PCL
6 unidriver 64
Send TrueType as bitmap, PS
Emulation Unidriver 63
substitution table, unidrivers
91
TrueType settings, unidrivers
61
watermark settings, PCL 6
traditional driver 117
watermark settings, unidrivers
77, 79
Windows operating systems
supported 19
Form to Tray Assignment,
unidrivers 91
formatter
number 199
Front Cover settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 109,
126
unidrivers 70
Front to Back printing, unidrivers
65
fulfillment centers 6, 158
fuser modes 251
G
Graphics Settings, PCL 6 traditional
driver 111
Graphics tab, PS Emulation Driver
144
grayscale settings

372

Index

PCL 6 traditional driver 134
PS Emulation Unidriver 95
unidrivers 87, 89
H
halftone settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 136
PS Emulation Driver 146
unidrivers 88
heavy paper, paper type commands
336
help
HP Toolbox screens 235
Macintosh 157
operating systems supported
19, 158
PCL 6 traditional driver 100
unidrivers 56
Windows 17
How do I? screens, HP Toolbox
235
HP Applications tab, HP Systems
Diagnostics 354
HP Director
ADF detection 156
features 27
localized versions 19
operating systems supported
19
HP Document Viewer
features 33
localized versions 19
operating systems supported
19
HP EWS Device Configuration
utility, Macintosh 159
HP Extended Capabilities 26,
308, 317
HP Image Zone
localized versions 19
operating systems supported
19
uninstalling 326
HP LaserJet Documentation screen
303
HP LaserJet Scan software 38
HP LaserJet Scanner program
157
HP LaserJet Send Fax program
156

HP postscript level 3 emulation
support 57, 58, 142
HP Send Fax program 45
HP Shopping Web site 35
HP Software License Agreement
screen (USB Windows
installation) 307
HP Software License Agreement
screen (Windows network
installation) 317
HP System Diagnostics 352
HP Toolbox
About screen 285
Advanced network settings
279
Animated Demonstrations
screen 234
Auto continue settings 256
browsers supported 188
Clearing Jams screen 227
Control Panel messages screen
226
Copy Problems screen 230
Copy Settings tab 275
Current Alerts screen 286
Date/Time screen 257
Detailed Fax Settings screen
219
Device Configuration screen
199
Device Information screen
242
Device Polling screen 259
Device Settings section 241
Device Status screen 193
disabling or enabling 366
Documentation tab 235
Event Log screen 204
Fax Data Properties screen
217
Fax How do I screen 220
Fax Phone Book - Create a New
Group screen 209
Fax Phone Book - Edit a Group
screen 210
Fax Phone Book - Edit Entry
screen 208
Fax Phone Book - Import screen
211
Fax Phone Book screen 207

ENWW

Fax Problems screen 231
Fax ReceiveLog screen 214
Fax Reports screen 218
Fax Send Log screen 214
Fax Settings tab 265
Fax Setup Wizard screen 269
Fax tab 205
Fax Tasks screen 206
Fax Viewer screen 216
features 16, 186
How do I? screens 235
IP Configuration settings 277
Jam recovery settings 256
language settings 255
localized versions 19
Memory Card Problems screen
232
Memory Card screen 263
navigating 187
Network Configuration screen
202
Network Configuration settings
282
Network Settings tab 276
opening page 186
operating systems supported
19
Order Supplies screen 288
Paper Handling screen 243
Password settings 284
PCL 5e screen 262
PostScript screen 263
Print Density screen 249
Print Info Pages screen 204
Print Modes screen 251
Print Problems screen 228
Print Quality screen 246
Print Settings tab 261
Printing screen 261
Product Registration screen
287
Product Support screen 289
Receive screen 267
Reduce/Enlarge screen 276
Save/Restore settings screen
260
Scan How do I screen 224
Scan Preferences 222
Scan Problems screen 229

ENWW

Scan to E-mail or a Folder
screen 221
Scan to tab 221
sections 186
Select Device screen 286
Send Fax software 45
Send screen 265
Service screen 257
Set up E-mail Alerts screen
197
settings vs. driver settings
241
Setup Status Alerts screen
195
SNMP Configuration settings
280
starting 186
Supplies Status screen 194
system requirements 188
System Settings tab 242
System Setup screen 254
Text Only screen 286
Troubleshooting Information
screen 225
troubleshooting known issues
364
Troubleshooting Process screen
225
Troubleshooting tab 224
Troubleshooting Tools screen
225, 233
Volumes screen 256
HP Web Jetadmin 19

Animated Install Guide 300
collect.bat utility 362
dialog boxes, Macintosh 171
dialog boxes, Windows 301
driver-only 298
File to E-mail utility 360
HP Toolbox, troubleshooting
364
Macintosh product software
168
network software, Macintosh
169
networks, Windows 296
Windows product software
294
installers
included 18, 158
new features 15
options 165, 292
IP Configuration settings 277
IPX/SPX protocols 51

I
ICM (Image Color Management)
settings 60
Identify Printer screen (Windows
network installation) 320
Image Color Management (ICM)
settings 60
Image Zone. See HP Image Zone
importing phone books 211
inches, Measurement Units button
125
information pages, printing 204
input trays. See trays
Installable Options, PS Emulation
Unidriver 93
installation

L
landscape orientation
Flip Pages Up, PCL 6 unidriver
81
PCL 6 traditional driver 107,
132
PS Emulation Driver 142
unidrivers 84
languages, localized versions
documentation 8
Macintosh software components
158
ordering CDs 6, 158
ReadIRIS 22
settings 255
Windows software components
19

J
jams
recovery settings 256
troubleshooting 227
Job Timeout, PS Emulation
Unidriver 96
JPEG data compression, PCL 6
traditional driver 111
K
known issues, HP Toolbox 364

Index

373

laptop computers, receiving faxes
190
LaserJet Scan software 38
LaserJet Scanner program 157
LaserJet Send Fax program 156
Layout Options, unidrivers 65
license agreement (USB Windows
installation) 307
License Agreement screen
(Windows network installation)
317
Linux support 13, 18
localized versions
documentation 8
Macintosh software components
158
ordering CDs 6, 158
ReadIRIS 22
settings 255
Windows software components
19
Logging tab, HP Systems
Diagnostics 354
logs, fax
activity 218
Receive screen 214
Send screen 214
Lotus Notes 40
M
Macintosh
components, software 156
dialog boxes, installation 171
e-mail programs supported
155
Easy Install option 165
features not available 157
HP EWS Device Configuration
utility 159
installers 158
installing product software
168
languages supported 158
networks, installing software
169
operating systems supported
154, 190
Readme file 349
system requirements 164
uninstalling software 183

374

Index

manual uninstall, Windows 329
manuals
localized versions 8
operating systems supported
19, 158
margins, PCL 6 driver 334
matching, color 60
Measurement Units button, PCL 6
traditional driver 125
media. See paper
memory
Device Configuration screen,
HP Toolbox 199
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
141
product, included 3
PS Emulation Driver 147
PS Emulation Unidriver settings
95
system requirements 50
unidriver settings 94
Memory Card Problems screen, HP
Toolbox 232
Memory Card screen, HP Toolbox
263
messages
alerts, receiving 190
Auto continue settings 256
constraint, PCL 6 traditional
driver 101
constraint, unidrivers 57
control panel 226
e-mail alerts 191
pop-up alerts 191
Microsoft Entourage 40, 155
Microsoft Outlook 40, 155
Microsoft Windows. See Windows
millimeters, Measurement Units
button 125
minimum installation
Macintosh 165
Windows 292, 306
mirror image, printing with PS
Emulation Driver 146
Mirrored Output, PS Emulation
Unidriver 64
models, feature comparison 3
moire effect, resolving in PCL 6
traditional driver 112
multitasking 51

My Scans directory 363
N
negative image, printing with PS
Emulation Driver 146
Network Configuration screen, HP
Toolbox 202
Network Configuration settings
282
network connections
features available 49
Macintosh, installing software
169
peer-to-peer, setting up 294
system requirements 50
Network Protocol screen (Windows
network installation) 323
Network Settings tab, HP Toolbox
276
Networking tab, HP EWS Device
Configuration utility 162
networks
Advanced settings 279
Configuration settings 282
how do I screen 239
installation dialog boxes,
Windows 315
IP Configuration settings 277
Password settings 284
settings 202
SNMP settings 280
Windows software installation
296
Neutral Grays settings, unidrivers
87
new features 15
number of copies
PCL 6 traditional driver 131
PS Emulation Driver 142
unidriver settings 60
O
O/S2 support 13
OCR
accuracy 53
file types supported 38
localized versions 22
Macintosh software 157
software programs supported
53

ENWW

Windows software 16
online help
HP Toolbox screens 235
Macintosh 157
Windows 17
Online support screen 304
operating systems
supported 154
Windows, supported 12
optical character recognition. See
OCR
Optimizations option, PCL 6
unidriver 62
Optional Paper Sources menu, PCL
6 traditional driver 139
order of pages 110
Order Supplies screen, HP Toolbox
288
ordering software 6, 158
orientation, page
Flip Pages Up, PCL 6 unidriver
81
PCL 6 traditional driver 132
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
107
PS Emulation Driver 142
unidrivers 84
Outlook 40, 155
Output Protocol, PS Emulation
Unidriver 95
Output Settings, PCL 6 traditional
driver 112
P
Page Order settings, unidrivers
65
page orientation
Flip Pages Up, PCL 6 unidriver
81
PCL 6 traditional driver 107,
132
PS Emulation Driver 142
unidrivers 84
pages per minute 3
Pages per Sheet settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 110
unidrivers 83
paper
cover settings, unidrivers 70

ENWW

custom size, PCL 6 traditional
driver 122
custom sizes, PCL driver
support 335
Form to Tray Assignment,
unidrivers 91
margins 334
margins, PCL 6 driver 334
Pages per Sheet settings,
unidrivers 83
Paper Handling screen 243
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
119
Print Document On settings,
unidrivers 74
Print Modes screen 251
Print on Both Sides (Manually),
PCL 6 unidriver 81
PS Emulation Driver settings
142
size commands 334
Size is settings, PCL 6 traditional
driver 121
Size is settings, unidrivers 68
sizes supported 4
source commands 332
Source is settings, unidrivers
69, 129
sources and destinations 332
type commands 335
Type is settings, PCL 6
traditional driver 130
Type is settings, unidrivers 69
types and sizes supported
332
types supported 334
unidriver settings 67
paper handling features 4
Paper Handling options, PCL 6
traditional driver 138
Paper Handling screen, HP Toolbox
243
Paper Options
PCL 6 traditional driver 121
unidrivers 67
Paper tab
PCL 6 traditional driver 119
PS Emulation Driver 142
Paper/Quality tab, unidrivers 65
parallel port, not supported 356

part numbers
documentation 8
software CDs 6, 158
Password settings 284
PC 5e L screen, HP Toolbox 262
PC fax programs 53
PCL 5 drivers
media-source commands 332
PCL 5e driver support 16
PCL 6 traditional driver
% of Normal Size 115
About button 133
Basics tab 131
booklet printing 108
Color tab 134
Configure tab 137
constraint messages 101
cover settings 126
custom paper sizes 335
Document Options 105
Effects tab 112
Finishing tab 104
Fit-to-Page option 114
Flip Pages Up 107
Font Settings 112
font settings 140
help 100
installing 298
localized versions 19
margins 334
media supported 332
media-source commands 332
media-type commands 335
memory settings 141
operating systems supported
18
Optional Paper Sources 139
orientation settings 132
Output Settings 112
Pages per Sheet 110
Paper Handling Options 138
Paper Options 121
paper size commands 334
Paper tab 119
Print all Text as Black 112
Print Document On 114
Print on Both Sides (Manually)
106
Print Task Quick Sets 105
Scale to Fit 114

Index

375

Type is paper settings 130
watermarks 115
PCL 6 unidriver
About tab 97
Advanced Printing Features,
enabling 62
Advanced tab 58
booklet printing 82
Color Printing Mode 62
Color tab 85
constraint messages 57
Copy Count 60
custom paper sizes 335
Device Settings tab 89
Document Options 61
document preview image 73
Effects tab 73
External Fonts settings 92
Finishing tab 80
font substitution table 91
Form to Tray Assignment 91
Graphic settings 60
help 56
Image Color Management (ICM)
60
Installable Options 93
installing 298
Layout Options 65
localized versions 19
margins 334
media supported 332
media-source commands 332
media-type commands 335
memory settings 94
operating systems supported
18
orientation settings 84
Paper Options 67
paper size commands 334
Paper/Quality tab 65
Print Optimizations option 62
Print Task Quick Sets 66
Printer Properties tab 89
Printing Preferences tab 58
Raster Compression 65
Resizing Options 74
Send TrueType as Bitmap 64
settings, changing 56
TrueType font settings 61
Watermarks settings 76

376

Index

PDF files, online help 17
peer-to-peer networking 294
Percent of Normal Size setting
PCL 6 traditional driver 115
unidrivers 75
phone books, fax
Create a New Group screen
209
Edit a Group screen 210
Edit Entry screen 208
Fax Phone Book screen, HP
Toolbox 207
Import screen 211
Photo How do I screen 238
photo settings 264
polling settings 259
pop-up alerts 191
portrait orientation
Flip Pages Up, PCL 6 unidriver
81
PCL 6 traditional driver 107,
132
PS Emulation Driver 142
unidrivers 84
ports
connecting 356
device conflicts 356
specifications 3
PostScript Options, PS Emulation
Unidriver 62
PostScript Passthrough 94
PostScript screen, HP Toolbox
263
PostScript tab, PS Emulation Driver
147
PPDs, included 18
preview image
PCL 6 traditional driver 110
unidrivers 73
Print all Text as Black
PCL 6 traditional driver 112
unidrivers 64
Print Density screen, HP Toolbox
249
Print Document On settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 114
unidrivers 74
Print in Grayscale 89
Print Info Pages screen, HP
Toolbox 204

Print Modes screen, HP Toolbox
251
Print on Both Sides (Manually)
PCL 6 traditional driver 106
PCL 6 unidriver 81
Print Optimizations option, PCL 6
unidriver 62
Print Problems screen, HP Toolbox
228
Print Quality screen, HP Toolbox
246
Print Quality, PCL 6 traditional
driver 111
Print Settings tab, HP Toolbox
261
Print tab, HP EWS Device
Configuration utility 161
Print Task Quick Sets
PCL 6 traditional driver 105
unidrivers 66
Printer Found screen (Windows
network installation) 321
Printer Properties tab, unidrivers
89
printing
features available 49
How do I screen 236
multitasking 51
settings 261
troubleshooting 228
Printing Preferences tabs,
unidrivers 58
Printing screen, HP Toolbox 261
Product Registration screen, HP
Toolbox 287
Product Support screen, HP
Toolbox 289
protocols, network 51
PS Emulation Driver
Device Options tab 146
features 142
Graphics tab 144
installing 298
localized versions 19
media supported 332
memory available 147
operating systems supported
18
Paper tab 142
PostScript tab 147

ENWW

PS Emulation Unidriver
About tab 97
Advanced Printing Features,
enabling 62
Advanced tab 58
booklet printing 82
Color tab 85
constraint messages 57
Copy Count 60
CTRL-D settings 95
Device Settings tab 89
Document Options 61
document preview image 73
Effects tab 73
Finishing tab 80
font substitution table 91
Form to Tray Assignment 91
Graphic settings 60
gray settings 95
help 56
Image Color Management (ICM)
60
Installable Options 93
installing 298
Layout Options 65
localized versions 19
media supported 332
memory settings 94, 95
Mirrored Output 64
operating systems supported
18
orientation settings 84
Output Protocol 95
Paper Options 67
Paper/Quality tab 65
PostScript Options 62
PostScript Passthrough 94
Print Task Quick Sets 66
Printer Properties tab 89
Printing Preferences tab 58
Resizing Options 74
settings, changing 56
timeout settings 96
TrueType font settings 61, 96
Watermarks settings 76
PS fonts 19
Q
quality settings, PCL 6 traditional
driver 111

ENWW

quick sets
PCL 6 traditional driver 105
unidrivers 66
R
RAM
product, included 3
system requirements 50
Raster Compression
PCL 6 traditional driver 111
PCL 6 unidriver 65
ReadIRIS text-recognition software
file types supported 38
localized versions 22
Macintosh 157
Windows 16
Readme files
downloading 337
Macintosh 349
Windows 337
Ready to Install screen (USB
Windows installation) 310
Ready to Install screen (Windows
network installation) 319
Receive Alert messages for device
events 190
Receive faxes to this computer
190
Receive Log screen 214
Receive screen, fax 267
Receive to PC, disabled 17
Receive to PC, troubleshooting
365
Reduce/Enlarge screen, HP
Toolbox 276
Registration 315
Registration screen (Windows
network installation) 325
registration, product 287
release notes 19, 158
removing software. See
uninstallation
reports, printing 204
Resizing Options, unidrivers 74
resolution
Print Quality screen settings
246
printing 4
PS Emulation Driver 145
scanning 4

Restart your computer screen (USB
Windows installation) 313
restarting, troubleshooting 364
restoring factory settings 257
RGB settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 136
unidrivers 89
ring settings, fax 272
rings, fax settings 269
ROM, included 3
S
Save/Restore Settings screen
260
saving settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 105
unidrivers 66
Scale Patterns (WYSIWYG), PCL 6
traditional driver 112
Scale to Fit setting
PCL 6 traditional driver 114
unidrivers 74
Scaling settings, PS Emulation
Driver 146
Scan Driver
localized versions 20
using 37
scan driver
TWAIN 18
Scan Preferences dialog box 43
Scan Problems screen, HP Toolbox
229
Scan to E-mail or a Folder screen
221
Scan to tab 221
scanner resolution 4
scanning
e-mail settings 221
features available 49
How do I screen 224, 238
HP LaserJet Scan software
38
methods 37
multitasking 51
preferences 43, 222
to e-mail or a folder 189
troubleshooting 229, 366
TWAIN driver features 40
WIA driver features 43
scrubber utility 362

Index

377

Searching screen (Windows
network installation) 320
Select Device screen, HP Toolbox
286
Send CTRL-D settings, PS
Emulation Unidriver 95
Send Fax program 45, 156
Send Log screen 214
Send screen, fax 265
Send TrueType as Bitmap
PCL 6 traditional driver 112
PS Emulation Unidriver 63
serial number 199
Service ID 199
Service screen, HP Toolbox 257
Set up E-mail Alerts screen, HP
Toolbox 197
settings
Device Configuration screen
199
fax 219
HP Toolbox vs. driver 241
Print Task Quick Sets, PCL 6
traditional driver 105
Print Task Quick Sets, unidrivers
66
restoring factory 257
Save/Restore screen 260
setup. See installation
Setup Status Alerts screen, HP
Toolbox 195
Setup Wizard, fax 269
shading, watermark settings
PCL 6 traditional driver 118
unidrivers 79
shared files and folders 329
sharing
features available 50
setting up 294
Sign Up Now screen 314
Sign Up Now screen (Windows
network installation) 324
sizes, paper
commands 334
custom 335
custom, PCL 6 traditional driver
settings 122
Form to Tray Assignment,
unidrivers 91
HP Toolbox settings 243

378

Index

margins 334
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
121
unidriver settings 68
SNMP settings 280
software license agreement (USB
Windows installation) 307
software license agreement screen
(Windows network installation)
317
Software Update 36
software, ordering 6, 158
Source is settings 69, 129
sources, paper. See trays
Specify Printer screen (Windows
network installation) 321
speed
collation 4
printing 3
standalone fax and copier features
49
standalone scrubber utility 362
status alerts screen, HP Toolbox
195
status screen, HP Toolbox 193
Status tab, HP EWS Device
Configuration utility 160
Supplies Status screen, HP
Toolbox 194
supplies, ordering 288
support, product 34, 289
system diagnostics 352
system requirements
HP Toolbox 188
Macintosh 164
Windows 12, 13
System Settings tab, HP Toolbox
242
System Setup screen, HP Toolbox
254
System tab, HP EWS Device
Configuration utility 160
system-tray icon alerts 191
T
T.30 trace test 257
TBCP protocol, PS Emulation
Unidriver settings 95
TCP/IP protocols 51
Test Page screen 314

Test Page screen (Windows
network installation) 324
Text Only screen, HP Toolbox
286
text, printing all as black
PCL 6 traditional driver 112
unidrivers 64
Thank you for buying another HP
product screen (Windows network
installation) 318
Time Remaining screen (USB
Windows installation) 312
timeout settings, PS Emulation
Unidriver 96
Toolbox. See HP Toolbox
trace test 257
transparencies, paper type
commands 336
trapping settings, unidrivers 88
trays
Form to Tray Assignment,
unidrivers 91
HP Toolbox settings 243
included 332
Installable Options, unidrivers
93
media supported 334
media-source commands 332
media-type commands 335
Optional Paper Sources, PCL 6
traditional driver 139
Source is settings, unidrivers
69, 129
troubleshooting
alerts, receiving for device
events 190
Animated Demonstrations
screen 234
Clearing Jams screen 227
collect.bat utility 362
constraint messages, PCL 6
traditional driver 101
constraint messages, unidrivers
57
Control Panel Messages screen
226
Copy Problems screen 230
device conflicts 356
e-mail 363
e-mail alerts 191

ENWW

Fax Problems screen 231
File to E-mail utility 360
HP System Diagnostics 352
HP Toolbox 364
Information screen, HP Toolbox
225
Memory Card Problems screen
232
My Scans directory 363
pop-up alerts 191
Print Problems screen 228
Process screen, HP Toolbox
225
Scan Problems screen 229
scanning 366
scrubber utility 362
tab, HP Toolbox 224
Tools screen 233
Tools screen, HP Toolbox
225
TWAIN 41
Troubleshooting Tools screen, HP
Toolbox 233
TrueType fonts
download as outline, PS
Emulation Unidriver settings
96
Send as Bitmaps, PCL 6
traditional driver 112
Send as Bitmaps, PCL 6
unidriver 64
Send as Bitmaps, PS Emulation
Unidriver 63
unidriver settings 61
TWAIN
driver 16, 18, 40
Macintosh support 157
troubleshooting 41
two-pass cleaning-page utility
362
two-sided printing
media supported 334
PCL 6 traditional driver settings
106
PCL 6 unidriver settings 81
unidriver settings 94
types, paper
commands 335
HP Toolbox settings 243

ENWW

PCL 6 traditional driver settings
130
supported 332, 334
unidriver settings 69
typical installation
Macintosh 165
Windows 292, 306
U
unidrivers
About tab 97
Advanced Printing Features,
enabling 62
Advanced tab 58
booklet printing 82
Color tab 85
constraint messages 57
Copy Count 60
custom paper sizes 335
Device Settings tab 89
Document Options 61
document preview image 73
Effects tab 73
Finishing tab 80
font substitution table 91
Form to Tray Assignment 91
Graphic settings 60
help 56
Image Color Management (ICM)
60
Installable Options 93
installing 298
Layout Options 65
localized versions 19
media supported 332
media-type commands 335
memory settings 94
operating systems supported
18
orientation settings 84
Paper Options 67
paper size commands 334
Paper/Quality tab 65
Print Task Quick Sets 66
Printer Properties tab 89
Printing Preferences tab 58
Resizing Options 74
settings, changing 56
TrueType font settings 61
Watermarks settings 76

uninstallation
HP Image Zone 326
Macintosh software 183
manual, Windows 329
Windows product software
326
UNIX support 13, 18
updating software 36, 311
USB port
connecting 356
device conflicts 356
devices vs. hubs 356
HP Toolbox issues 364
specifications 3
Windows installation dialog
boxes 305
Use Different Paper/Covers
PCL 6 traditional driver 109,
126
unidrivers 70
User Guide Print Task Quick Set
PCL 6 traditional driver 105
unidrivers 67
user guides
HP Toolbox screens 240
localized versions 8
operating systems supported
19, 158
V
viewer, fax 216
Volumes screen, HP Toolbox
256
W
Wait Timeout, PS Emulation
Unidriver 96
watermarks
PCL 6 traditional driver 115
unidrivers 76
Web sites
Adobe 58
HP Shopping 35
software updates 36
support 34
Welcome screen (USB Windows
installation) 305
Welcome screen (Windows
network installation) 316
WIA driver 16, 18, 43

Index

379

Windows
Animated Install Guide 300
components, software 15, 18
device conflicts 356
dialog boxes, installation 301
driver-only installation 298
drivers supported 16
installation options 292
installers 18
installing product software
294
manual uninstall 329
network software installation
296
operating systems supported
12
Readme file 337
sharing, setting up 294
system requirements 12, 13
uninstalling HP Image Zone
326
uninstalling product software
326
Windows Update 311

380

Index

ENWW

www.hp.com

*XXXXX-XXXXX*
*XXXXX-XXXXX*
XXXXX-XXXXX

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Page Count                      : 406
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : XMP toolkit 2.9.1-13, framework 1.6
About                           : uuid:96e06fc5-c784-4f22-8a67-05cc8c4d9dcd
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 5.0.5 (Windows)
Keywords                        : Edition 1, 4/2005
Create Date                     : 2005:04:13 19:51:39Z
Modify Date                     : 2005:04:14 08:38:43-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2005:04:14 08:38:43-06:00
Creator Tool                    : XSL Formatter V3.2 MR3
Document ID                     : uuid:e2935ae2-086f-4a1f-be46-5917b962d232
Format                          : application/pdf
Creator                         : HP LaserJet Information Engineering
Title                           : HP Color LaserJet 2820/28430/2840 Software Technical Reference, External - ENWW
Author                          : HP LaserJet Information Engineering

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

HP Color LaserJet 2820/28430/2840 Software Technical Reference, External ENWW Laser Jet 2820/2830/2840 All In One Reference C00341096

2830 to the manual 892daa9a-117b-44c0-a1eb-f29c36bf3091

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation